DUKE
UNIVERSITY
DIVINITY SCHOOL
LIBRARY
->!^*%i=S^
i^iVi'tiuT
Qalesville. wis-----''
?
1
1
^iiXiiUR F. QIERE,
^alesville. Wisconsin
"THE TIME OF THE END:
}f
A PROPHETIC PERIOD,
DEVELOPING, AS PREDICTED,
AN INCREASE OF KNOWLEDGE
BESPECTINO
C()C gropljcrifs anJr |)friflijs tliat foretell tijc €r(t:
ILLUSTRATED
BY THE HISTORY OF PROPHETIC INTERPRETATION", THE EXPECT-
ATION OF THE CHURCH, AND THE VARIOUS COMPUTATIONS
OF THE TIMES OF DANIEL AND JOHN, BY COMMENTA-
TORS, WHO (JENEKALLY TERMINATE THEM
BETWEEN A. D. 1830 AND 1880.
ALSO ,
"OUR PRESENT POSITION IN THE PROPHETIC CALENDAR,"
WITH HIS " APOCALYPTIC SEVEN-SEALED SCROLL,"
BY THE KEV. E. B. ELLIOTT, A. M. ;
LECT[JRES OX THE NATURE AND NEARNESS OF THE ADVENT,
BY THE REV. JOHN CUMMLNG, D.D.;
LECTURES ON THE NEW HEAVENS AND NEW EARTH,
BY DE. CHALMEnS, DE. HITCIICOCK, AND JOHN WESLEY;
AND
THE TESTIMONY OF MORE THAN ^-^7^
ONE HUNDllED WITNESSES ^ —
AGAINST THK MODERN WllITBYAN THEORY
OF A MILLENNIUM BEFORE THE ADVENT.
BY A CONGREGATIONALIST.
1 to th« Time of tbe Eod : xo&nj ihkll nia to and fro, and Ed
BOSTON:
PL^LTSIIED BY JOHN P. JEWETT AND CO^IPANY.
CLEVELAND, 0.: JEWETT, PROCTOR & WORTHINGTON,
NEW TOKK: SHELDON, LA51P0RT & BLAKEMAN.
LONDON : TRUliXKH i. CO.
18 5G.
Kntered acconling to Act of Congress, in the year 1855, by
JOHN P. JKWETT ii CO.,
In the Clerk'3 OUice of tlie Liistrict Couit for the District of Massachusetts.
^51
GALE COLLEGE LfBRARY
CAMBRIDGE:
AILEN AND FARMIAM, PKINTEKS.
Stereotyped by
HOUART k ROBBINS,
New England Tvpe and Stereotype Fouodcrj,
BOSTON.
Div. S.
GALE COLLESE ,.
PREFACE
The cause of truth, doubtless, has often been greatly injured
by much that has been written on the subject of prophecy. And
the confidence of many in the possibility of any correct inter-
pretation has been greatly weakened by the failure of desig-
nated times, — sometimes based on fanciful conjectures, or dog-
matically maintained and ill-advised speculations, which have
only served to bring the study of prophecy into disrepute.
The design of this volume is not to bestow censure on the
well-meant endeavors of mistaken expositors ; but it is to awaken
new interest in the predictions of the future, respecting which
there exists in the church a remarkable and alarming indiflfer-
ence, that is hardly reconcilable with the love for Christ's return
which the Scriptures inculcate. If the position here maintained
be correct, — viz., that " the Time of the End" is a period to pre-
cede the end, during which prophecies previously obscure or
misinterpreted were to be unsealed for the edification of the
church, the knowledge of which, respecting the close of the
present and the ushering in of a new dispensation, was to be
gradually but surely increased, — then it can hardly be doubted
that we are within this predicted period ; and hence the import-
ance of awakening the church to a realizing sense of her true
position, which should be like that of a bride awaiting the
return of her absent but soon-expected spouse.
418459
IV PREFACE.
In aid of this object, there is here given a condensed view of
the history of prophetic interpretation, the erroneous expecta-
tions which have prevailed, the various computations of the pro-
phetic periods which have attracted the attention of any consid-
erable portion of the church, and valuable selections from the
writings of divines, and others, whose opinions are worthy of
consideration. There is thus presented, in a small compass, a
condensed view of the light which has been shed on the subject
of unfulfilled prophecy, which shows that we are surely nearing
the port of earth's destiny.
It is a significant fact, that all the computations of prophetic
times, by the several commentators, terminate within a compara-
tively limited period. While no man should dogmatize on a
subject of human speculation, if it be admitted that the periods
teach anything, this near agreement must show that we are in
the neighborhood of their end. On this point, the chapter from
Mr. Elliott on " Our Present Position in the Prophetic Calendar,"
and the views of Dr. Gumming, may be read with great profit.
Respecting the events which are then to transpire, the testimony
of more than one hundred witnesses, many of whom are honored
as the fathers of the church, shows that her voice has been
anything but uniform in support of the dreams' of victory and
ease, during her Lord's absence, with which she is now solacing
herself, instead of with the hope of her Lord's return. And the
arguments advanced by Drs. Chalmers and Hitchcock, and by
the celebrated Wesley, in evidence of the renewal of this mate-
rial earth, and the prominent place which it has ever had in the
faith of the church as the home of the redeemed, entitle this
subject to the candid and serious examination of all lovers of
truth.
BosToiT, Sept. 1855.
INDEX.
Paje.
Abstract of Dr. CumminR's Lectures, . 195
Age of the World, by Cbronologcrs, . . 155
Alleine, Joseph, 321
Anabaptists, 40
Anderson, Rev. William, 348
Apocalypse, an Unveiling of Prophecy, 21
Apocalypse, a Key to Daniel, .... 47
Aretius, of Berne, 65
Auriol, llcv. Kdward, 362
Bale, Bishop John, of Ossory, Ireland, 38
Baxter, llicliard, 319
Bengal, James Albert, 49
Benson, George, D.D., 325
Bickersteth, Kev. Edward, .... 77, 368
Birks, Kev. T. R., 366
Bonar, Rev. Andrew, 352
Bonar, Rev. Iloratius, D.D., LL.D., . 350
Bonar, Rev. James, 350
Bradford, John, 306
Brock, Rev. Muurant, 371
Brooks, Rev. J. W., 298, 365
Bryant, Rev. Alfred, 67, 3S8
Bunyan, John, 338
Burnet, Thomas, D.D., 310
Burroughs, Jeremiah, D.D., 315
Bush, I'rof. George, 4t5
Butler, Bishop Joseph, 312
Calvin, John, 300, 304
Candlish, Rev. Robert S., 348
Carlton, Rev. Hiram, 393
Cause of Supposing the End Near, . . 8
Chalmers, Rev. Thos., D.D., LL.D., 251, 347
Charles, Landgrave of Ilesse, .... 381
Charnock, Stephen, D.D., 323
Christian Fathers all Millen.-irians, . 27
Christ's Advent I're-millennial, . . . 161
Chronology, Tabular Schemes of, . . . 113
Church, no Expectation came to Crisis, 29
" it became A))ostate, 29
Chyrtrasus, Rev. David, D.D., .... 65
Cogswell, Rev. William, D.D., .... 66
Coke, Rev. Thomas, LL.D., 345
Coming Events Revealed, 8
Cox, Rev. John 341
Cranmer, Archbishop Thomas, . . . . 307
Crisis, Expectation of one Impending, . 7
Cumming, Rev. John, D.D., .... 70, 159
Cuninghame, William, 59,374
Dallas, Rev. Alexander, 3G7
Dalton, Rev. W., 365
Davenant, Bishop John, D.D., .... 309
Davenport, Rev. John, 329
Decline of .Millenarian Views, .... 28
Destiny of the Earth, 272
1*
44P459
Diagram of Prophetic Periods, .... 116
Discoveries Providentially Revealed, . 39
Duffield, Rev. George, D.D., 387
Duraut, John, 317
Eliot, Rev. John, 330
Elliott, Rev. E. B., 77
" the Concluding Chapter of his
Uora; Apoctalyptica, ... 89
Epoch of the Reformation, 33
" " A. D. 1836, 48
" " " 1843, 4, 56
" " " 1847 69
" » " 1864—6, 65
" " " 1868, 77
" " " 1S73, 79
" " " 1880, 80
Expectation in the Tenth Century, . . 31
Falter, Rev. George Stanley, 68
Fairbairn, Rev. Patrick, .... 353, 399
Fifth Jlonarchy Men, 40
First Prophetic Discovery of Luther, . 34
Fletcher, Rev. John, 344
Fox, Rev. II. W., 395
Fox, the Martyrologist, 65
Freemantle, Rev. R. W., 367
Future Destiny of the Earth, .... 272
Gale, Theophilus, 310
George, Duke of Manchester, .... 373
Gilfillan, Rev. George, 353
Gill, Rev. John, D.D., 339
Gootlhart, Rev. C. J., 364
Goodwin, Thomas, D.D., 310
Gregory of Oxford, 25
Griffin, Rev. Edward, D.D., 286
Grosse, A. 317
Ilabershon, Rev. Matthew, .... 59, 375
Hales, Rev. William, D.D., LL.D., . . 80
Half-Centurv of Expectation, .... 48
Hall, Rev. Robert, 341
Hamilton, Rev. James, D.D., .... 356
Henshaw, Rt. Kev. John P., . . 295, 384
Henry, Matthew, 324
Herschcl, Rev. Ridley n., 381
Hewitson, Rev. W. H., 348
Hill, Rev. Thomas, 36S
Hitchcock, Rev. Edward, D.D., LL.D., 272
Hoare, Rev. E., 370
Hooper, Rev. John, 373
Hopkins, Rt. Rev. John H., 384
Howe, John, .. . .' . ^ 324
Imbrie^v. Oliajfts ».,' ; 7 v < . . 387
Israel, the Hoiife of, . 39»
yGAl^i' GOLL'E--'
VI
INDEX.
Janeway, James, 323
Knapp, 2S4
Knox, 303.
Latimer, Bishop Hugh, 37, 305
Lord, Rev. Nathan, D.D., 388
Lord, Rev. Jolin King, 390
Lord, David N., 393
Lord, Eleazer, 394
Lowrie, Rev. Walter, 395
Lutlier, Martiu, 34, 37, 301
Macdonald, Rev. R., 349
Maitland, Rev. CD., 357
Mather, Rev. Cotton, D.D., 333
Jtatlier, Rev. Increase, 332
Matlier, Rev. Samuel, 331
Maton, Robert, 309
Mcllvaine, Rt. Rev. C. P., 384
McNeile, Rev. Hugh, D.D., . . . 35S, 398
Mede, Joseph, D.U., 25, 309
Melancthon, Philip, 35, 303
Menasse, 25
Midnight Cry, 45
Millenarians Expelled by the Papists, 30
Miller, Hugh, 374
Miller, William, 57, 386
Misapprehensions Corrected, .... 19
Nearness of the End, 34, 245
Newcorae, Archbishop William, D.D., . 313
New Heavens and Earth, 249
Newton, Sir Isaac, 314
Newton, Bishop Thomas, D.D., .... 312
Noel, Hon. and Rev. Gerard T., . ■ . 359
Open Book, the Symbol of ..... . 33
Pareus, David, 65
Philo, 284
Philpot, Rev. B., 370
Poor, Rev. Daniel, D.D., 396
Prince, Rev. Thomas, 335
Prophecies Foreshadowing the End, . 17
Prophecy, not understood till near its
Eulfilment, 14
" Unsealed by the Apocalypse, 21
" Indifference to displeasing, 23
Prophetic Calendar, our Position in, . 88
Prophetic Periods necessarily obscure to
the Early Christians 23
Pym, Rev. William, 362
Reformation, the Epoch of 33
" under the Sixth Trumpet, 37
Richards, Rev. John, D.D., ..... 392
Ridley, Bishop Nicholas , 306
Rudd, Sayer, 325
Rutherford, Rev. Samuel 327
Sabine, Charles, 376
Sander, Rev. Frederic, 64
Say brook Platform, 335
Scott, Rev. Thomas, D.D., 65
Schemes of Chronology, 113
Sermon by Rev. Thomas Chalmers, . 251
" " Rev. John Wesley, .... 204
Seven Thunders uttered their Voices, . 43
Shimeal,Rev. R. C, 60
Signs of the Second Advent, 173
Sirr, Rev. Joseph D'Arcy, 357
Six Thousand Years, the expected Peri-
od of the World's Duration, ... 24
Spaulding, Rev. Joshua, 335
Sterry, Peter, 316
Stuart, Rev. James Haldane, .... 369
Stuart, Prof. Moses, 46
Symbol of the Open Book, 33
Tabular Schemes of Chronology, . . . 113
Taylor, Bishop Jeremy, .... 300, 310
Testimony of the Reformers, 301
" " Martyrs of the Church, 305
" " Old English Divines, . 309
" " Westminster Divines, 314
" " Old English Dissent-
ers, 317
" " Early N. Eng. Divines, 329
" " Baptist Divines, . . 337
" " Methodist Divines, . 343
" " Scotch Presbyterians, 346
" " Min's of the Eng. Ch., 351
" « English Laymen, . . 373
" " Am. Epis. Divines, . 384
" " Pres. and Congrega-
tionalists, 387
" " Missionaries, .... 394
The Moslem and his End, 219
" Temporal Millennium a Novelty, . 295
" Time of the End a Subject of
Prophecy, 14
" Time, the Shortening of, .... 36 ,
" Time not then, 43
" Word to be again Preached, . . 44
Tholuck, 282, 285
Those who Sleep in Jesus, 297
Thorp, William, 376
Toplady, Rev. Augustus Montague, . 326
Truth, Applicable to each Age, .... 15
Twisse, William, D.D., 315
Tyndal 300
Tyng, Rev. Stephen W., D.D., ... 385
Usher, Archbishop James, D.D., . . 309
Views of Luther and the Reformers, . 35
Views of Dr. John Gumming, .... 159
Villiers, Hon. and Rev. H. Slontague, 361
Vincent, Thomas, 318
*\Valley, Rev. Thomas, 330
Ward, Rev. F. De W., 390
Watchman, what of the Night ? . . . 7
Watson, Thomas, 319
Watts, Rev. Isaac, D.D., 325
Watts, Rev. J., 34B
Wesley, Rev. John, 54,343
Wesley, Rev. Charles, 343
While the Bridegroom Tarried, &c., . . 31
Whiston, Rev. William, 65
Whitby, Rev. Daniel, D.D., .... 296
Whiting. Rev. Samuel, 330
Wickes, Rev. Thomas, 393
Winthrop, Rev. Edward, 385
Wolf, Rev. Joseph, 63
Wood, Hans, 56
Woodward, Rev. Henry, 361
Year-Day, Principle of Interpretation, 45
THE TIME OF THE END.
" I heard, but I understood not : then said I, my Lord, what shall
be the cud of these things? And he said, Go thy way, Daniel, for the
WORDS ARE CLOSED UP AND SEALED TILL TUE TIME OF THE EXD. Many
shall be purified, and made white, and tried ; but the wicked shall do
•wickedly : and none of the wicked shall understand ; but the wise shall
understand." — Daniel 12 : 8 — 10.
That Ministers of the Gospel are the Lord's Watchmen,
and that it is incumbent on them carefully to familiarize
themselves with the teachings of the Sacred Oracles, and
to bear to the church and world, as Ambassadors of Christ,
a fiiithful testimony of what is therein inculcated, will hardly
be denied by any regenerated believer in Inspiration. " For
thus hath the Lord said unto me, Go set a Watchman, let
him declare what he seeth." — Isa. 21: 6, Of such,
multitudes of anxious listeners arc now seriously inquiring,
'•' Watchman, what of the Night ? "
Is that inquiry a reasonable one, or do those inquired of
satisfy the obligations devolving on them, when such in-
quiries are left unheeded ?
THE EXPECTATION GENERAL, THAT A CRISIS IS
IMPENDING.
That this world is verging towards a momentous crisis,
is testified to by men in every walk and department of life.
Endeavor to divest themselves of the impression as they
may, they cannot shake off the conviction that events of
unprecedented importance are impending, which may change
and revolutionize the whole framework of society. Men
may not be agreed as to the natnre of these ; but, whatever
their views respecting the future, they express themselves
in similar phraseology, and unite in denominating the era
iDALE COLLEGE LIBRARY
8 THE TIME OF THE END.
in Avhich we live as one that is to be terminated by " the
sounding of the seventh trumpet," "the binding of the
Great Red Dragon," "the regeneration," "the pouring
out of the Apocalyptic Vials," " the battle of Armaged-
don," &c. &c.,— terms -which inspiration and the faith of
the church have ever connected with the ushering in of the
millennium. Are all these voluntary utterances meaning-
less expressions and idle rhetorical flourishes, designed
merely to amuse the hearer or reader ? or are they solemn
expressions of honest and serious convictions ? And if so,
whence come these convictions, and whence originates the
impression, everywhere encountered, that events of start-
ling importance, and Avorld-wide interest, are about to
transpire ? Can they be other than the premonitions which
God, by His providence and grace, grants to His children
when about to perform any marvellous work ?
GOD REVEALS COMING EVENTS.
No truth of inspiration can be more clearly enunciated
than that " Surely the Lord God doeth nothing, but He
revealeth His secret unto His servants, the prophets." —
Amos 3 : 7. He does not necessarily do this by a special
revelation, nor by visible manifestations, — His communica-
tions with men being different in different ao;es of the world.
" God, who at sundry times and in divers manners spake in
time past unto the fathers by the prophets, hath in these
last days spoken unto us by His Son." (Hcb. 1 : 1, 2.)
And the prophets by whom He now speaks are the faithful
men who are called in His providence, and qualified by His
grace, to become "ambassadors for Christ;" and He re-
vealeth His secrets to them by moving them to the study,
and enlightening them to comprehend the import, of the
" Sure Word of Prophecy, whereunto," says an inspired
apostle, "ye do well that ye take heed, as unto a light that
shineth in a dark place, until the day dawn, and the day-
star arise in your hearts."
It is not to be truthfully disputed that, during the last
half-century, the attention of the church has been called to
the study of the prophetic Scriptures, in a manner never
before witnessed, and with an intensity and earnestness of
investigation that is irreconcilable with any theory that
GOD REVEALS COMING EVENTS.
denies that God is thus moving upon the people, and pre-
paring His chosen ones for some manifestation of His deal-
ings Avith them, the nature of Avhich can only be known by
a careful and prayerful study of His Word.
That He should thus give admonition of the future is in
harmony with the record of all His past doings. Said the
Rev. John Hooper :
" As God is one^ having one will and one purpose, so
His dealing with mankind has ever been the same. What
He was to man at the beginning, and what He was to him
in after ages, that He is now and ever will be ; ' Jesus
Christ, the same yesterday, to-day, and forever : ' He
changeth not, neither can change. To this the Psalmist
beareth witness, saying, ' Thy memorial, 0, Lord, endureth
throughout all ages.' Now, one great feature in God^s deal-
ing towards His people is, that He revealeth himself to
them according to the age in which they live, and according
to their need in their day and generation, that they, know-
ing His will and purpose concerning them, might worship
Him truly and serve Him acceptably, and so be prepared
for greater manifestations of His glory, and dwell forever
in His presence."' — Apoc, p. 12.
In accordance wntli this principle, when man had flillen
from the created innocence in which God had placed him,
one of God's first acts towards him was to reveal His pur-
pose of redemption, by the triumph of the Seed of the
woman over the head of the serpent. When the wickedness
of man had become great on the earth, and it was necessary
to destroy all flesh by a flood of waters, God revealed His
purpose to Noah, and instructed him to build an ark, so
that as many as believed might enter in, and be saved from
the coming judgment. During one hundred and twenty
years the long-suffering of God then waited, and men doubt-
less were faithfully admonished and entreated ; and though
the unbelieving multitude knew not the nearness of the
judgment till the flood came and swept them all away, yet
those that believed were in the secret of God, entered into
the ark at the appointed time, and were all saved. At a
later period, when the nations had become sunk into idolatry,
and Abraham, apparently, was alone faithful, God commu-
nicated His purpose to make his seed a blessing to all the
10 THE TIiME OF THE END.
nations of the earth, revealed the length of their sojourn-
ings, and made known the time of their restoration. When
the destruction of -wicked Sodom was determined on, the
Lord said (Gen. 18 : 17), " Shall I hide from Abraham
that thing which I do, seeing that Abraham shall surely
become a great and mighty nation, and all the nations of
the earth shall be blessed in him ? " And due notice was
given to righteous Lot, who, with his daughters, Avas pre-
served ; and none, even in that guilty city, perished without
due warning. When "the time of the promise drew nigh
which God had sworn unto Abraham " (Acts 7 : 17), we
find the children of Israel (Ex. 1 : 23) sighing by reason
of their bondage, and crying unto God for deliverance. We
also find that Moses was divinely moved to visit his breth-
ren, supposing they " would have understood how that God
by his hand would deliver them; but they understood not,"
till the period of their Egyptian servitude was more nearly
fulfilled : when Moses spake unto them the words of Jeho-
vah and performed wonders in their sight, and " the people
believed." This was a prerequisite for their deliverance;
and so (Ex. 12: 41) "it came to pass at the end of the
four hundred and thirty years, even the self-same day it
came to pass, that all the hosts of the Lord went out from
the land of Egypt." As we come down through the periods
of Jewish history, and it became necessary to punish them
for their transgressions (2 Ch. 36 : 15), "the Lord God of
their fathers sent to them by His messengers, rising up
betimes, and sending; because He had compassion " on
them. When ' ' they mocked the messengers of God, and
despised His words," so that His wrath "arose against His
people, till there was no remedy," they w"ere graciously
informed of the duration of their punishment, — that it was
to be in Babylon for seventy years. As what is once writ-
ten needs no repetition by a special revelation, so the record
of Jeremiah (25 : 11) was amply sufficient to make known
the end of the Babylonish servitude. And, accordingly,
we read that Daniel (9: 2) "understood by books the
number of years, whereof the word of the Lord came to
Jeremiah the prophet, that He would accomplish seventy
years in the desolations of Jerusalem ; " and, therefore, he
set his heart towards God to seek its accomplishment. To
GOD REVEALS COMING EVENTS. 11
him also was made known (Dan. 9 : 25 — 27) '"that from
the going forth of the commandment to restore and to build
Jerusalem unto the Messiah the Prince, shall be seven
weeks, and three-score and two weeks," of symbolic time,
or four hundred and eighty-three years. And in just that
period from the date of the decree wliich Artaxerxes the
king gave to the priest Ezra (7: 11), we hear " a voice
from heaven (Matt. 3: 17) saying, This is my beloved
Son in Avhom I am well ple;ised." And the Saviour affirms
the accuracj'^ of the prediction when he declares (Mark 1 :
15), "77«e time is fuIJUhd^ and the kingdom of God is at
hand : repent ye, and believe the Gospel."' Previous to
the appearing of our Lord, there were those among the
Jews who understood from the Scriptures that the time of
Ilis advent drew near, and who were " waiting for the con-
solation of Israel." To one of these, the "just and devout "
Simeon (Luke 2 : 26), " it was revealed that he should not
see death till he had seen the Lord's Christ." And there
was a widow, also (v. CG), "one Anna, a prophetess," "of
about four-score and four years, which departed not from
the temple, but served God with fastings and prayers night
and day," who "spake of Him to all them that looked for
redemption in Jerusalem." Not only (Matt. 13: 17)
" many righteous men desired " to see His day, but the
opinion was so general, that when the Baptist preceded Him,
Luke 3 : 15, " the people were in expectation, and all men
mused in their hearts of John, whether he were the Christ
or no." Nor was the belief confined to Palestine, that
some remarkable personage was about \o appear in Judea.
Says Suetonius, a Roman historian, "An ancient and set-
tled persuasion prevailed throughout the East, that the
Fates had decreed some one to proceed from Judea, who
should attain universal empire." And Tacitus, another
Roman historian, says, " Many were persuaded that it was
contained in the ancient books of their priests, that at that
very time the East should prevail, and that some one should
proceed from Judea, and possess the dominion." When He
came, the glad tidings of His birth were announced by
angelic voices to shepherds who were keeping watch over
their flocks by night ; and wise men, recognizing His star
in the east, came to woi-ship Him. A forerunner was sent
12 THE TIME OF THE END,
to prepare the vfaj before Him ; and those who received
Him not were rejected, " because," as He said to Jerusa-
lem (Luke 19: 44), " thou knewest not the time of thy
visitation." When He laid down His life, He first revealed,
not only to His disciples, but to the entire nation, that in
three days He should rise again ; and when He ascended
on high. He left the promise of the bestowal of the Holy
Spirit, till the reception of which the disciples were com-
manded to tarry at Jerusalem. If these illustrations are not
sufficient, we have on record the Saviour's prediction of the
destruction of Jerusalem during the continuance of the gen-
eration that rejected Him, which was fulfilled in less than
forty years subsequent to His crucifixion. And, that the
Christians living in Judea might escape its impending doom,
they were told (Luke 21: 20) that when they should " see
Jerusalem encompassed with armies," or, in other language
(as in Matt. 24: 15), "the abomination of desolation
spoken of by Daniel the prophet stand in the holy place,"
they were to "flee to the mountains;" which admonition
they heeded, and escaped safe to Pella.
Such is the testimony of inspiration respecting the uni-
form dealings of God with His people in past ages ; in view
of which, is it to be supposed that an unchangeable Being
should pursue an opposite policy respecting events of the
future, particularly when that future is to witness the
"crowning consummation of all prophetic declarations"?
Under every dispensation, the near coming of every great
event has been known to His people. In every important
instance He has told them what He was about to do ; so
that none of them were ignorant of it, or unprepared for it,
who regarded His revelations respecting it — those only
being left in darkness who disregarded and wickedly closed
their eyes and ears to the instruction which God gave them.
Therefore it cannot be that God will withhold from His
people, in any age, such knowledge of their own times as
is needed for their serving Him acceptably in the perform-
ance of the duties pertaining to their respective age. And
that He would not do so respecting the time of the closing
of the present, and the ushering in of the Millennial dis-
pensation, may be clearly inferred from the considerations
already presented.
THE OBSCURITY OF PROPHECY. 13
PROPHECY NOT UNDERSTOOD TILL NEAR ITS
FULFILMENT.
It is not in accordance with God's providential dealings
to suppose that the epoch of the occurrence of events should
be /////// known for a long period previous to their fulfil-
ment : for such knowledge is not needed by those who live
in earlier periods of tlie worhl's history. Forty years before
the deliverance of Israel from Eg^'^pt (Acts 7 : 25), "they
understood not '' that God would deliver them by the hand
of INIoscs. When Daniel inquired respecting the end of
wonders that extended to the resurrection, he was told (Dan.
12: 9) that "the words are closed up and sealed till the
time of the end." And when (1 Pet. 1 : 10—12) " proph-
ets have inquired and searched diligently, who prophesied
of the grace that should come unto you : searching what,
or what man?icT of time, the Spirit of Christ which was in
them did signify, when it testified beforehand of the suffer-
ings of Christ, and t/ic glory that should follow^'' it was
revealed unto them, " that not unto themselves, but unto us
they did minister."
The declaration that the words were sealed up till "the
time of the end," implies that, at the period referred to, the
obscurity, in which they might be shrouded from the under-
standing of those living in previous ages, would be pene-
trated, so that their import should be no longer a sealed
mystery. Not only so, but, in the context, it is expressly
declared (Dan. 12:4) that, at the time or period of the
end, "many shall run to and fro, and knowledge shall be
increased."' And it is also added (v. 10), that " many
shall be purified and made white, and tried : but the wicked
shall do wickedly : and none of the wicked shall understand :
but the wise shall understand." That which they were to
understand was that which was to be closed up and sealed
till that period of understanding should arrive, and which,
by its being denominated a ''time,'' may, perhaps, be un-
dei-stood as comprising a period of three hundred and sixty
years,* commencing, not unlikely, with the Protestant reform-
* If the date of the Reformation be 1517, a time, oi' three hundred and
sixty years, carries us to 1877, the period within which the mystery of God
should be finished. — jRci'. Edward Bickcrstcth's Practical Guide to the
Prophecies.
9
14 THE TIME OF THE END.
ation, during whicli knowledge was to be disseminated, and
to be continually increased by the running to and fro of
many, — their running to and fro being not a movement in
space, but put by substitution for the various and often
contradictory interpretations which should be advanced, each
serving to call attention and adding interest to the subject,
until the true light should have gradually dawned on the
minds of believers, Avho should earnestly give themselves to
the study of unfulfilled prophecy. For (Prov. 18 : 15)
'*the ear of the wise seeketh knowledge;" and, said the
prophet (Hos. 14: 9), "Who is wise, and he shall under-
stand these things; prudent, and he shall know them ? "
Such will delight in the study of *'the things Avhich shall
be revealed.''
THE TIME OF THE END A SUBJECT OP PROPHECY.
That the period of the advent will be known, may not
only be inferred fi-om the analogy of God's providence in
past ages, but it is clearly demonstrable from the testimony
of Holy Writ. When inquired of by His disciples, JMatt.
24 : 3, " What shall be the sign of Thy coming and of the
end of the world ?" the Saviour told them the signs that
should precede those events. And though (v. 36) "of
that day and hour knoweth no man, no, not the angels in
heaven, but my Father only," so that none may presump-
tuously dogmatize respecting particular dates, yet in refer-
ence to the signs He had given, He said (vs. 32, 33), " Now
learn a parable of the fig-tree : When his branch is yet
tender, and putteth forth leaves, ye know that summer is
nigh ; so Ukeivise ye, when ye shall see all these things,
know that it is near, even at the doors." Or, as Luke
expresses it (21 : 28), "When these things begin to come to
pass, then look up and lift up your heads, for your redemp-
tion draweth nigh." They would know^ enough of its near-
ness to induce Avatchfulness and a preparation for the event;
but their knowledge Avould not be sufiiciently definite to
make it safe to postpone the event, in their own minds, to a
period beyond any present moment ; and so the Saviour
said (Matt. 24: 42, 44), " Watch therefore : for ye know
not what hour your Lord doth come. . . . Therefore be ye
also ready : for in such an hour as ye think not the Son of
TRUTH APPLICABLE TO ITS OWN AGE. 15
man cometli." But, while (1 Th. 5 : 24) " the day of the
Lord so Cometh as a thief in the night," " sudden destruc-
tion Cometh ' only on those who "shall say peace and
safety: '" Avliich Christ's children will not do: for, address-
ing them, the apostle says, " Ye, brethren, are not in dark-
ness, that that day should overtake you as a thief. Ye are
all the children of the light and the children of the day ;
•\ve arc not of the night nor of the darkness. Therefore let
us not sleep as do others, but let us watch and be sober."
Thus the nearness of the end was to be known for a
period previous to its occurrence ; and not only so, but
ignorance or indifference respecting its approach may be
attended with serious consequences ; for, otherwise, there
Avould be little significancy in the Saviour's admonition
(Luke 21 : 34 — 3(J), '• Take heed to yourselves, lest at any
time your hearts be overcharged with surfeiting and drunk-
enness, and cares of this life, and so that day come upon
3^ou iiuavmres. For as a snare shall it come," not on
those who know that their redemption draweth nigh, but
'^ on all them tliat dwell on the face of the whole earth.
Watch ye, therefore, and pray always, that ye may be
accounted worthy to escape all these things that shall come
to pass, and to stand before the Son of Man," — of whom
Paul says (Heb. 9 : 28), that, "Unto them that look for
Him shall He appear the second time without sin unto sal-
vation." Thus Christians were expected to live (Titus 2 :
13), " looking for that blessed hope, and the glorious ap-
pearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ."
THE TRUTH APPLICABLE TO EACH AGE IMPERATIVE
ON THAT AGE.
"While no truth is to be neglected in the dispensation of
the Word, it is particularly the duty of Christ's ambassa-
dors, and it is made imperative on them, to instruct the
church and make known to the world, in a more emphatic
manner, those truths which have a specific application to
the times in Avhich they live, whether they have respect to
sins which prevail then more than at other times, duties
whose performance is then more imperatively demanded, or
predictions which are then near to be fulfilled. And this,
16 THE TIMR OF THE END.
in the beautiful imagery Avith -wliich the Saviour illustrated
his teachings, is called giving " meat in due season," by the
faithful servant ^vho is made ruler over the household ; and,
to neglect to do this, is to be unfaithful to the charge com-
mitted by Christ to His ministers. Said the Saviour (Matt.
24:45 — 51), "Who then is a faithful and -wise servant,
•whom his lord hath made ruler over his household, to give
them meat in due season ? Blessed is that servant, Avhom
his lord when he cometh shall find so doing. Verily, I say
unto you, that he shall make him ruler over all his goods.
But and if that evil servant shall say in his heart, JMy lord
delayeth his coming ; and shall begin to smite his fellow-
servants, and to eat and drink with the drunken, the lord
of that servant shall come in a day when he looketh not for
hira, and in an hour that he is not aware of. and shall cut
him asunder, and appoint him his portion Avith the hypo-
crites; there shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth; " and
(in Mark 13 : 34) " The Son of man is as a man taking a
far journey, who left his house, and gave authority to his
servants, and to every man his work, and com.manded the
porter to watch." Can the porter be negligent of his duty
without incurring the displeasure of the Master ?
What, then, is implied in the duty of watching ? The
context shows that it has reference to the Master's return ;
which, being shrouded in a kind of definite indefiniteness, if
the paradoxy may be allowed, makes the duty constant and
unceasing. Said the Saviour (vs. 35, 36), " Watch ye,
therefore ; for ye know not when the Master cometh, — at
even, or at midnight, or at the cock-crowing, or in the
morning; lest, coming suddenly, he find you sleeping."
As a porter watching for his master's return would be
mindful of all the tokens Avhich the master had given as
indications of his coming, so should the servant of Him, who
has promised to return again, familiarize himself with all
the predictions which are left on record respecting that
return, the events that were to precede it, and the periods
that measure His absence. And, if we are indeed living
in the time of the end (which who dare deny ?), then they
are culpably indifferent and ignorant, Avho seek not to " un-
derstand by books," as did Daniel of old, the " number of
years " which are to intervene between given epochs and
PROPHECIES OF THE END, 17
the end, or to approximate as near to such knowledge as
tlie means which God has furnished them will allow.
PROPHECIES FORESHADO"WING THE END.
Among the prophecies which were given for instruction
respecting the end, there stands prominent the great Imago
(Dan. 2 : 28), by which the "God in heaven" maile
" known to the king Nebuchadnezzar what shall be in the
latter days." (Vs. 32, 33.) — " This image's head was of
fine gold, his breast and his arms of silver, his belly and
his thighs of brass, his legs of iron, and his feet part of
iron and part of clay." The king saw (vs. 34, 35) '• Till
that a stone was cut out of the mountain without hands,
which smote the image upon his feet that were of iron and
clay, and brake them to pieces : then was the iron, the clay,
the brass, the silver and the gold, broken to pieces together,
and became like the chaft' of the summer threshing-tloors ;
and the wind carried them away, that no place was found
for them ; and the stone that smote the image became a
great mountain, and filled the whole earth." Such was the
king's dream, which Daniel proceeded to interpret as .sym-
bolic of a succession of empires, beginning with that of
Nebuchadnezzar, w Inch was represented by the head of gold.
An inferior one, that was to arise after him, corresponded to
the breast and arms of silver; and succeeding ones corre-
sponded to the brass and the iron of the image. When the
last should have existed for a period in a divided state, then,
said the prophet (v. 44), " shall the God of heaven set up a
kingdom, which shall never be destroyed ; and the kingdom
shall not be left to other people, but it shall break in pieces
and consume all these kingdoms, and it shall stand for-
ever."
Parallel with this prophecy is that other in the 7th of
Daniel, in which the prophet saw in vision by night (v. 3),
" four great beasts come up from the sea, diverse one from
another," — the last of which had ten horns ; and among them
(v. 8) came up another "little horn," with "eyes like the
eyes of a man, and a mouth speaking great things." Then
followed a symbolic representation of the session of the
Ancient of Days, the slaughter of the beasts, and the inves-
2*
18 THE TIME OF THE END.
ture of one like the Son of Man with the kingdom. In
harmony with the former vision, the interpreter, of whom
Daniel inquired the meaning of this, said (vs. 17, 18),
" These great beasts, which are four, are four kings which
shall arise out of the earth. But," he added, " thg saints
of the Most High shall take the kingdom, and possess the
kingdom for ever, even for ever and ever." As Daniel
would know more particularly of the beast with many horns,
and of that horn which "prevailed until the Ancient of
Days came, . . . and the time came that the saints possessed
the kingdom," the angel replied (vs. 23—27), " The fourth
beast shall be the fourth kingdom upon earth, which shall
be diverse from all kingdoms, and shall devour the Avhole
earth, and shall tread it down, and break it in pieces. And
the ten horns out of this kingdom are ten kings that shall
arise; and another shall rise after them, and he shall be
diverse from the first, and he shall subdue three kings.
And he shall speak great words against the Most High, and
shall wear out the saints of the Most High, and think to
change times and laws ; and they shall be given into his
hand until a time and times and the dividing of time. But
the judgment shall sit, and they shall take away his
dominion, to consume and to destroy it unto the end. And
the kingdom and dominion, and the greatness of the king-
dom under the whole heaven, shall be given to the people
of the saints of the Most High, whose kingdom is an ever-
lasting kingdom, and all dominions shall serve and obey
Him."
In the chapter following, w^hen the first-named kingdom
■was about to pass away, Daniel had a corresponding vision,
in which (v. 8) a ram that " stood before the river " sym-
bolized (v. 20) " the kings of Media and Persia ; " and
(v. 21) a "rough goat the king of Grecia." It was shown
(v. 22) that, in the place of the first king of the last king-
dom, " four kingdoms should stand up out of the nation,"
— corresponding to Alexander's successors, — which w^ere to
be followed (v. 23), "in the latter times of their kingdom,"
by " a king of fierce countenance, and understanding dark
sentences," who should " stand up against the Prince of
princes," and "destroy the mighty and the holy people,"
till the sanctuary and the host should be trodden down (v.
MISAPPREHENSIONS CORRECTED. 19
14) for "two thousand three hundred " prophetic days; at
the end of wliich "' sliall the sanctuary be cleansed."
A prophecy commencing with the 11th of Daniel notices
more particularly the same events, and closes with the
deliverance (12 : 1 — 3) of " every one that shall be found
written in the book," the awaking of " many of them that
sleep in the dust of the earth," and their shining " as the
brightness of the firmament," and ** as the stjirs, for ever
and ever." It is in connection with these predictions that
the angel (v. 7) lifts " his right iiand and his left hand to
heaven, and sware l)y Ilim that liveth forever, that it shall
be for a time, times and an half;" and that "when he
shall have accomplished .to scatter the power of the holy
people, all these things shall be finished." He also reveals
(v. 11) that " from the time that the daily shall be taken
away, and the abomination that makcth desolate set up,
there shall be a thousand two hundred and ninety days ; "
and adds a blessing (v. 12) to him " that waitcth and
Cometh to the thousand three hundred and five and thirty
days." This is the prophecy before referred to, the words
of which (v. 9) were " closed up and sealed till the time of
the end," and respecting which, then, knowledge was to be
increased by tlje running to and fro of many.
We come then to the New Testament, and, in answer to
questions of the disciples respecting the time of the destruc-
tion of Jerusalem, and the sign of Ilis coming and end of
the world, we have in the 24th chapter of Matthew's gos-
pel a prophecy given by the Saviour which answers both of
those questions by a glance at the occurrences which should
transpire before the end ; and He emphatically announced
(v. 14) that " This Gospel of the kingdom shall be preached
in all the world as a witness unto all nations ; and," said
the Saviour, " then shall the end come."
MISAPPREHENSIONS CORRECTED.
The Saviour was ever ready to correct any misapprehen-
sion on the part of His children respecting the time of the
event. On one occasion (Luke 21: 11 — 13) " He ac^ed
and spake a parable . • . because they thought that the king-
dom of God should immediately appear. He said, therefore,
20 THE TIME OF THE END.
A certain nobleman went into a far country to receive for
himself a kingdom, and to return. And he called his ten
servants, and delivered unto tiiem ten pounds, and said unto
them, Occupy till I come." And. after a long time, when
he was returned, he called his servants, and reckoned with
them, rewarded those found faithful, and destroyed those
who disregarded his authority. When the Saviour was
about to leave His disciples to go into that far country, they
asked of Him (Acts 1 : 6, 7,), " saying, Lord, wilt thou at
this time restore the kingdom to Israel ? And He said unto
them, It is not for you to know the times or the seasons
which the Father hath put in his own power." The " time "
had not come, — the period in wtich was to be gradually
removed the seal which was set on them till " the time of
the end." Their specific mission was to make known the
resurrection of Jesus, and the fact of his second coming ;
and therefore the Saviour said (v. 8), " But ye shall
receive power after that the Holy Ghost is come upon you ;
and ye shall be witnesses unto me, both in Jerusalem and in
all Judea, and in Samaria, and unto the uttermost parts of
the earth," — to which the Gospel must be preached before
the end could come. Accordingly we find that the sum of their
preaching was (Acts 17: 18) "Jesus and the resurrec-
tion." They taught men (1 Th. 1 : 9, 10) to turn " to
God from idols, to serve the living and true God, and to
wait for His Son from heaven, whom He raised from the
dead, even Jesus which delivered us from the wrath to
come."
When under such preaching the Thessalonian brethren
were led to regard the day of the Lord as more imminent
than the sacred oracles warranted them in believing, the
apostle Paul promptly called their attention to the desolating
power prophesied of in Daniel, and reminded them (2 Th.
2:3) that " that day shall not come except there come a
falling away," or an apostasy, "first, and that Man of Sin
be revealed, the Son of Perdition," " whom the Lord shall
consume by the spirit of His mouth, and shall destroy with
the brightness of His coming."
PROPHECY UNSEALED. 21
THE APOCALYPSE AN UNVEILING OR UNSEALING OP
PBOPHECY.
That the drooping spirits of His children might not be
left to faint under the long absence of the Nobleman -who
had gone to the far country till Ilis enemies be made His
footstool, before the beloved disciple was laid asleep in Jesus
there was given (Rev. 1:1,2) " The Revelation of Jesus
Christ, which God gave unto Him, to show unto His ser-
vants things which must shortly come to pass ; and He sent
and signified it by His angel unto His servant John, who
bare record of the word of God, and of the testimony of
Jesus Christ, and of all things that he saw." When the
Saviour was on earth He told his servants many things ; but
He had also (John 16 : 12) " yet many things to say " to
them which they could not then bear ; but in this Revela-
tion to John they are shown a long series of events which
>Yere shortly to come to pass, or, literally, which were shortly
to begin to come to pass, and extended down to the binding
of the dragon, the resurrection, and the new creation. It
will be seen, also, that this Revelation comprised "times
and seasons," which, at the time of the ascension (Acts 1 :
7), Avere reserved in the Father's own power, but which have
here been given to Jesus Christ, shown unto his servants,
signified by an angel to John, and written by John to
the churches.
The words of this Revelation are not sealed like those
given to Daniel ; for John was commanded (Rev. 22 : 10)
to '■^ seal not the sayings of the prophecy of this book."
It was given, also, through the medium of " the appointed
Heir of all things " (Heb. 1 : 2), by whom God was to
speak in these last days, and who alone (Rev. 5:2) "is
worthy to open the book, and to loose the seals thereof."
Not only (v. 5) hath " the Lion of the tribe of Judah "
prevailed to open the book and to loose the seals, but it is
declared (1 : 3) that " Blessed is he that readeth, and they
that hear, the words of this prophecy, and keep those things
whicli are written therein."
Thus prepared, there follows a succession of visions, wliich
John wrote, and whose significance was communicated to
him. First, we have (chap. 5) the successive loosening of
22 THE TIME OF THE END.
the seals of a book ; and, as each symbolic seal is broken,
successive portions of the writing in the book become
accessible, showing the gradual manner in which the church
would be enabled to understand the full import of the reve-
lations which God has given for its instruction, and closing
with the appearance of " a great multitude, which no man
could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and peoples,
and tongues," which (7:9) " stood before the throne and
before the Lamb, clothed in white robes, and palms in their
hands," — the result of the preaching of the Gospel as a
witness to all nations.
Then follows (chap. 8) a vision of the sounding of a suc-
cession of trumpets, marking periods which are covered by
those of the seals, symbolizing events which were to trans-
pire during those respective periods, and closing with the
seventh trumpet, at the sounding of which (11 : 15 — 18)
are heard " great voices in heaven, saying. The kingdoms of
this world are become [that] of our Lord and of his Christ ;
and he shall reign for ever and ever." And then also is
come ( v. 18) " the time of the dead that they should be
judged," those who serve the Lord being rewarded, and
those who destroy'' the earth being destroyed.
In harmony with these visions, others follow, in which is
more minutely symbolized, — under the imagery of a great
red, seven-headed and ten-horned dragon (chap. 12), of
a seven-headed, ten-horned leopard beast (chap. 13), and
of a seven-headed, ten-horned, scarlet-colored beast, with a
woman seated on it (chap. 17), and corresponding to Dan-
iel's (7 : 7) teu-horned nondescript fourth beast, — " the
fourth kingdom on the earth," or Rome under its five
forms of united rule, its division into decem-regal gov-
ernments, and the period of its papal supremacy. In the
connection are (11 : 2) the treading down of the holy city
" forty and two " prophetic months (v. 3), the prophesying
of the witnesses in sackcloth " a thousand two hundred and
three-score " prophetic days, the fleeing of the woman into
the wilderness (12 : 6), where she was to be fed for the
same period, or (v. 14^ nourished for a time and times, and
half a time, from the face of the serpent, the " forty and
two months " (13 : 5) that it was to be given to the blas-
phemous mouth of the beast to speak blasphemy, the " five
OBSCURE TO THE EARLY CHRISTIANS. 23
months" (9 : 5) that the locusts "weie to torment men, and
(v. 15) the "hour and a day, and a mouth, and a year,"
in Avhich they -were to have po\Yer to kill. And the whole
series closes Avith the sj^mbol of the destruction of Baby-
lon, the battle of Armageddon, the new heavens and new
earth, the descent of the New Jerusalem, and the estab-
lishment of "the tabernacle of God with men."
INDIFFERENCE TO PROPHECY DISPLEASING TO
JEHOVAH.
Such prophecies being committed to the church, for its
instruction an., p. 290.
Then follows a table of events, extending from the crea-
tion of the world to tlie binding of Satan, in which he gives :
" Rev. 10 : G. Connnencement of the ^lon-chronos (or
a TiJiK no Io7/(/er), which lasts 1036
years, 800—1836
The Third Woe (ch. 12 : 12) lasts 'a
short time,' 888| years, - - - 947—1836.
"12:14. The time, times and hali-time, or 3J-
ye;us, in which the woman nourishes
and supports herself in the northern
countries of Europe a period, 777f
years, 1058—1836
52 THE TIME OF THE END.
" The most favorable time, wherein she
nourishes herself, &c., - - - 1G17 — 183G.
" TJie Harvest and the Vintage. The
sweeping away of many good and
bad men from the earth, ch. 14 : 15
—18, 1740—1836
" 11 : 3. The prophesy'mrj of the Tzvo Witnesses;
which hists I'iGO common days, 1830 — 1836
" 11 : 2. The last Treadin/j-down of Jerusalem ;
which continues 'forty and two com-
mon months, 1830—1836
" The rise of the Beast out of the bot-
tomless pit, about 1830
" The Beast takes his throne upon the
seven mountains; where he nmst
'continue a short space,' ch. 17 : 10, 1831 — 1832
" The power of the Ten Kings (one hour), 1832,
ch. 17 : 12, lasts one prophetic hour ; fro™ the uth
, , , . ... , 11 to the 22d
that is, eight natural days, - - oct.
" The Seven Plagues, ch. 16. Divide
into four and three, and run out about
quickly in the days of Antichrist, 1831 — 1836
" The ten kings lay Babylon (Rome)
waste; in an agreement with the
Beast ; ch. 17 : 16 ; ch. 18, - - - 1833
" The last raging of Antichrist ; which
continues about three common years
and a half, 1832—1836
" Conflict of the Beast out of the Bottom-
less Pit ivith the people of God ; and
his overthroio at the appearing of the
Lord ; ch. 19 : 11-21, - - 18 June, 1836
" Thousand years' binding of Satan ; ch.
20 : 1—3, 1836—2836
" Loosing of Satan for ' a little time '
(,«(xgoi' ZQovoi'), a period of 111^
years ; ch. 20 : 3, .... 2836—2947
" Thousand years' reign of the saints in
heaven ; ch. 20 : 4, - - - - 2836—3836
" End of the world, and Judgment, 3836."
Speaking of the result of these calculations, he says
(7^.., pp. 293. 4) :
" Should the year 183G pass away without any such
THE EPOCH OF A. D. 183G. 53
remarkable change in public aflfairs as I have anticipated,
some fundamental mistake in the arrangement of my sys-
tem must be sought after. Should even my exposition of
the prophetic periods in general be ultimatel}' found erro-
neous, still my practical apjdication of the matters of those
periods "will stand good and be serviceable ; and not less
valuable in its place will be found, I trust, my exhibition
of the structure of the Apocalypse : indeed, I cannot help
thinking that the two inquiries, namely, into the structure
of the subject-matters, and into the determination of the
periods, serve materially to illustrate each other. And my
province is not so much to declare future events, as to dis-
play the relative bearings of the Apocalyptical system.
Perhaps I could tell the world more plainly than I am dis-
posed to do in what manner a variety of future events will
turn out ; yes, how they will shape themselves in the course
of the next century ; as also how they will succeed one
another. But men have warnings adequate to all necessary
purposes ; quite as adequate as if the events were rightly
computed to an exact period or year.
" I have watched the condition of our times, and am con-
vinced that the art of political government is forming more
and more methodically into a system from which all holy
fear concerning the judgment of God is meant to be care-
fully excluded. And here, indeed, we outdo the ancients.
Their governments had their religions, however false.
Among ourselves also prevail sins, which the prophet com-
plains of respecting Sodom ; namely, pride, luxury, indo-
lence, and contempt of inferiors. Those of lower ranks,
Avho can by any means keep pace with the higher, are per-
mitted to come up with them ; and this permission is imag-
ined to atone for everything else. Surely we cannot feel at
home in such a world as we now find it ; at best it is but as
an inn upon the road : and the summons ' Arise, and depart,
for this is not your rest, because it is polluted,' surely can-
not be unwelcome when it comes. For folly is practised
exceedingly in our own days : because it is taken for granted
that we can know nothing about futurity, and because, to
superficial beholders of God's providence, all is at present
uncertainty and suspense ; but when the great breaking up
5*
54 THE TIME OF THE END.
shall begin, what things are there of an awful and import-
ant kind that may not be expected to follow one another in
quick succession ! " — lb., pp. 316, 317.
As mystical as these calculations were, they had a great
effect in calling the attention of Christians to the study of
the prophecies, and were adopted by many distinguished
divines. Among these we instance the name of
John Wesley.
This celebrated founder of Methodism was born in Eng-
land in 1703. In 1754 he published his Notes on the
New Testament; and, in interpreting the prophetic peri-
ods, he mainly followed Bengel. His conclusions may be
very simply stated. In commenting on the text in Rev.
10 : 6, which he renders "There shall be no more a time,"
he says :
' ' That is, a time, a chronos, shall not expire before that
mystery is fulfilled. A chronos (1111 years) will nearly
pass before then, but not quite. The period, then, which
we may term a non-chronos (not a whole time) must be a
little, and not much shorter than this. The non-chronos
here mentioned seems to begin in the year 800 (when
Charles the Great instituted in the west a new line of em-
perors or of many kings), to end in the year 1836 ; and to
contain, among other things, the short time of the third woe,
the three times and a half of the woman in the wilderness,
and the duration of the beast."
Of the periods in the 12th chapter of Rev. he says :
" All the countries in which Christianity was settled, be-
tween the beginning of the one thousand two hundred and
sixty days and the imprisonment of the dragon, may be
understood by the wilderness, and by her place in particular.
This place contained many countries, so that Christianity
now reached, in an uninterrupted tract, from the eastern to
the western empire. And both the emperors noAV lent their
wings to the woman, and provided a safe abode for her ;
where she is fed — by God rather than man, having little
human help — /o;- a thne, and times, and half a time.
The length of the several periods here mentioned seems to
be nearly thus :
THE EPOCH OF A. D. 183G. 55
1. The non-chronos contains less than - - - 1111 years.
2. The little time, 888
3. The time, times, and half a time, ... 777
4. The time of the beast, 6GG
"And, comparing the prophecy and history together, they
seem to begin and end nearly thus :
1. The non-chronos extends from about - - 800 to 1836
2. The 12G0 days of the woman, - - - from 847 to lo24
3. The little time, from 947 to 183G
4. The time, times, and half a time, - - from 1058 to 183G
5. The time of the beast is between the beginning and end of
the three times and a half.
" In the year 1058, the empires had a good understanding
witli each other, and both protected the Avoman ; the Bishops
of Rome likewise, particularly Victor II., were duly subor-
dinate to the emperor. We may observe the one thousand
two hundred and sixty days of the woman, from 847 to
1524, and the three times and a half, refer to the same wil-
derness. But in the former part of the one thousand two
hundred and sixty days, before the three times and a half
began, namely, from the year 847 to 1058, she was fed by
others, being little able to help herself; whereas, from 1058
to 1524, she is both fed by others and has food herself.
To this the sciences, transplanted into the west from the
eastern countries, much contributed ; the Scriptures in the
original tongues, brought into the west of Europe by the
Jews and Greeks, much more ; and most of all, the Reform-
ation grounded on those Scriptures.
^^But the earth helped the woman. — The powers of the
earth ; and, indeed, she needed help through this whole
period. The time was from 1058 to 1280 ; during which
the Turkish flood ran higher and higher, though frequently
repressed by the emperors, or their generals, helping the
voman. The (two) times were from 1280 to 1725. Dur-
ing these, likewise, the Turkfsh power flowed far and wide.
But still, from time to time, the princes of the earth helped
the woman, that she was not carried away by it. The half-
time is from 1725 to 1836."
On the 17th chapter he remarks as follows :
56 IKE TIMK OF THE END.
" Perhaps the times hitherto mentioned might be fixed
thus :
" 1058 Wings are given to the woman.
1077 The beast ascends out of the sea.
1143 The forty-two months begin.
1810 The forty-two months end.
1832 The beast ascends out of the bottomless pit.
1836 The beast finally overthrown."
And on the closing page of his Notes he assigns to the
year 183G :
" The end of the non-chronos, and of the many kings ; the ful-
filling of the word, and of the mystery of God ; the repent-
ance of the survivors in the great city ; and the end of the
little time, and of the three times and a half; the destruction
of the beast ; the imprisonment of Satan, chap. 19, 20.
" The loosing of Satan for a small time ; the beginning of the
one thousand years' reign of the saints ; the end of the small
time, chap. 20.
" The end of the world ; all things new, chap. 20-22."
THE EPOCH OF A. D. 1843-4.
The simple argument for this epoch was based on a sup-
posed connection of the seventy weeks of the 9th of Daniel
with the 2300 days of the 8th, reckoning them from a
common date. Ben-inninfj them w^ith the decree of Artaxerxes
Longimanus, in the seventh year of his reign (see Ezra
7th), the seventy weeks would terminate in A. D. 33^;
and, commencing the 2300 prophetic days at the same epoch,
they would extend to 1843-4.
Hans Wood, Esq.
Says the Rev. Wm. Hales, D. D., the learned chronologer :
" This simple and ingenious adjustment of the chronology of
the seventy weeks, considered as forming a part of the 2300
days, was originally due to the sagacity of Hans Wood, Esq.,
of Rossmead, in the county of Westmeath, Ireland, and pub-
lished by him in an anonymous commentary on the
Revelation of St. John : London, 1787, Payne, 8vo.
THE EPOCH OF 1843-4. 07
Whence I republished it in the Inspecio?^ 8vo, 1799. And
aftenvards in the Orihodox Cluirrhmaii's Moffazme,
1803; and now, more correctly, 1809," — in his "New
Analysis of Chronology," vol. ii., p. 564.
William Miller.
This was the epoch to ^Yhich the late Wm. Miller, of Low
Hampton, New York, looked as that which should witness
the second advent of Christ. The argument which ]\Ir.
Miller used in support of tliis point was based upon the lit-
eral meaning of the Hebrew word, which, in our version of
Daniel 9 : 24, is rendered " determined," — cut off^ or cnt
out, — and the circumstances in which Gabriel appeared to
Daniel, as stated in the ninth chapter, with the instruction
given.
In the 8th chapter of Daniel is recorded a vision which
was to extend to the cleansing of the sanctuary, and to con-
tinue 2800 days. Daniel had '' sought for the meaning "
of that vision, and a voice said : " Gabriel, make this man
to understand the vision." Gabriel said to Daniel: "I
will make thee know what shall be in the last end of
the indignation ; for, at the time appointed, the end shall
be ; " and then proceeded to explain the symbols, but
said nothing of their duration. At the close of the expla-
nation Daniel fainted, and was sick certain days ; and he
says he "was astonished at the vision, but none under-
stood it.".
Three years subsequent to that vision, Daniel — under-
standing "by books the number of the years whereof the
word of the Lord came to Jeremiah the prophet, that he
would accomplish seventy years in the desolations of Jerusa-
salem " — set his face unto the Lord to seek by prayer and
supplications, with fasting, and sackcloth, and ashes. He
proceeded to confess his own sins and the sins of his people,
and to supplicate the Lord's fiivor on the sanctuary that was
desolate. While he was thus speaking, Daniel says :
" Gabriel, whom I had seen in t/ic visioi/ at the beginning,
being caused to Hy swiftly, touched me about the time of the
evening oblation ; and he informed me, and talked with me,
and said : ' Daniel, I am now come forth to give thee skill
58 THE TIME OF THE END.
and understanding. At the beginning of thy supplications
the comuiandment came forth, and I am come to show thee; for
thou art greatly beloved ; therefoie understand the matter
and consider the vision. Seventy weeks -ax^ determined^ "
&c., "from the going forth of the decree to restore and to
build Jerusalem unto Messiah the Prince : '* — after which
Jerusalem was to be made desolate '^ until the consummation."
— Dan. 9 : 20—27.
Dr. Gill, a distinguished divine and scholar, rendered the
word " determined " cut ojf^ and is sustained by good
scholars.
Hengstenberg, who enters into a critical examination of
the original text, says: "But the very use of the word,
which does not elsewhere occur, while others, much more
frequently used, were at hand, if Daniel had wished to ex-
press the idea of determination, and of which he has else-
where, and even in this portion, availed himself, seems to
argue that the word stands from regard to its original
meaning, and represents the seventy weeks, in contrast Avith
a determination of time (en jjlf^tel'), as a period cut off
from suhscque)tt duration and accnratfJy limited.''' —
Christology of the Old Test.., vol. 2, p. 301. Washington,
1839.
Gesenius, in his Hebrew Lexicon, gives cut off us the defini-
tion of the word, and many others of the first standing as to
learning and research, and several versions have thus rendered
it.
Such being the meaning of the word, and such the cir-
cumstances under which the prophecy of the seventy weeks
was given, Mr. Miller claimed that the vision which Daniel
was called on to consider, and respecting which Gabriel was
to give him skill and understanding, was the vision of the
8th chapter ; of which Daniel sought the meaning, which
Gabriel was commanded to make him understand, but
which, after Gabriel's explanation, none understood ; and
that the seventy weeks of years — that is, four hundred
and ninety that were cut q^— were cut off from the
2300 days of that vision ; and, consequently, that those
two periods must be dated from the same epoch, and the
longer extend 1810 years after the termination of the
shorter.
TUE ErOCII OF 1S47. 59
Mr. Miller also determined the 1335 days of DanieM2th
at the same epoch, commencing tiiem in A. D. 508, when he
claimed the last of the ten kings was converted to Chris-
tianity.
William Cuninghame, Esq.
The ATncrablo William Cuninghame, Esq., an English
gentleman and scholar. Avithout any knowledge of Mr. Mil-
ler, had also arrived at the same, conclusion from like
premises.
Matthew Habershon.
The same view was advocated by several Engli.sh writers.
Mr. M. Habershon says : "In this conclusion I am happy
in agreeing with Mr. Cuninghame, who says, ' I am not
aware of any more probable era which can be selected for
the commencement of the 2300 years than that which has
been chosen by some recent writers, who supposed this
period to have begun at the same time with the seventy
weeks of Daniel, or in the year B. c. 457, and consecjuently
that it will terminate in the year 1843.' " — Hist. Dls.. p.
307.
THE EPOCH A. D. 1847.
The argument in support of this date varied from that
for 1843, in the commencement of the 2300 days and
seventy weeks. Instead of reckoning them from the 7th year
of the reign of Artaxerxes, the advocates of this epoch fol-
lowed the chronology of Archbishop Usher, who varied
from the canon of Ptolemy in the commencement of the
reign of Artaxerxes Longimanus. He puts the death of
Xerxes and the connnenceiiient of the reign of Arta.xerxes
nine years previous to that given in the canon. And, to
harmonize it, he '"takes nine j'cars from the reign of
Xerxes, and adds them to the reijrn of Artaxerxes Longi-
manus, his son, contracting the former to twelve years, and
enlarging the latter to fifty." (/M Pridcau.r, Hist, of
the Jens.) Therefore, instead of commencing the reign
of the latter in B. C. 4(34. he commenced it in B. C. 473 ;
and so he reckoned the seventy weeks, not from the 7th,
60 THE TIME OF THE END.
butfwm the 20tli year of Artaxerxes (see Neli. 2d), which
he synchronized with B. C. 454. Commencing the seventy
weeks with that date, they would end Avith A. D. 36-7:
Usher placing the crucifixion in A. D. 33, in the midst of
the last week. Admitting the correctness of Usher's com-
mencement of the seventy weeks, and commencing the
2300 days at the same epoch, they would terminate in A.
D. 1846-7.
The Rev. R. C. Shimeall.
Tlie Rev. R. C. Shimeall, Presbyter of the Prot. Epis.
Church in the Diocese of New York, in his " Age of the
World," &c., published in 1842, says :
" It will be seen that our deductions, as founded upon
Sacred Historic chronology, furnish an aggregate number
of 3679 years, from the Creation, down to the commence-
ment of the 70 prophetic weeks of Daniel. Of prophetic
chronology, the numbers upon Avhich we are dependent to
complete the 6000th year, as the period within which all
God's purposes in relation to this world will be accom-
plished, are the following:
Daniel's 70 weeks, or 490 years, from -wliicli deduct A. D. 37, . . . 453
Commencement of 1260 days, in A. D., 533
The 1260 days of Daniel and St. John, 1260
Excess of 1290 days of Dan. xii. over 1260, 30
Excess of 1335 of Dan. xii. over 1290, 45
Total 2321
Add the historical years as above 3679
6000
From 2321
Deduct 453
And it gives you 1868
as the period when, in the time of the 7th angel, Rev. 16 :
17, who pours out the last vial of judgment into the air,
' a great voice out of the temple of Heaven, from the
throne,' will be heard, saying ' IT IS DONE ! '
From 1868
Deduct 1842
Which leaves . 26
THE EPOCH OF 1847. 61
" In 26 short years, therefore, if the above prophetic num-
bers can be demonstrated to have their support in Scripture,
that blessed period, the consummation of the devout believ-
er's faith and hope, will have arrived, when he who is ' the
Alpha and Omega ' from his high and holy throne will
proclaim, ' Bi' HOLD, I make all things new.'*
" But these prophetic numbers, if viewed in their relation
to the events with which they stand connected, past, pres-
oit^ and future, all conspire to admonish us ' upon whom
the ends of the world are come,'f that THE GREAT
DAY OF CRISIS, both to the Church and to the world, is
'just at hand.' No, we are not to calculate upon 26
years' additional probation, under the present existing econ-
omy of the Gospel ! Look to 1847 ! May Heaven pre-
pare us all to meet undismayed the terrors, and to share
triumphantly in the f/hrics, of ' that day ! 'J
" Perhaps, however, some one will ask if, upon n pcjad-
ventvre, an error in the department of historic chronology
as above should have escaped observation, what then
becomes of all these deductions ? To this I reply, that, con-
fident as I feel in the correctness of the historico-chrono-
logical department of my work, as herein exhibited, if the
great Head of the Church has sent forth the Spirit of his
grace, to reveal to the faithful a knowledge of Propheti-
cal numbers, ■§) and these prophetical numbers, as interpreted
in the sequel, are in accordance with ' Holy Scripture ;'
then, I ask but a single admission, in order to demonstrate
that, independently of immutable accuracy in giving the
length of each link in the first half of our golden chain,
the crisis in A. D. 1847, and the ' finishing of the mys-
tery of God," II in A. D. 1868, is established upon grounds
of equal certainty. Prophecy points out to us the things
that shall be hereafter,^ even to the last act of the
Almighty's government and providence over the world.**
The admission that I ask is, that the present is the year
of our Lord 1842 from the Nativity." — pp. 221-4.
His argument is this :
* Rev. 21 : 5. 1 1 Cor. 10 : 11.
t Thess. 5 : 1—4 ; 2 Pet. 3 : 10 ; Rev. 3 : B ; IG : 15.
§ See pp. 142— 1.51. II Kcv. 10 : 7.
IT Rev. 1:10. **Isa. 28 : 21, 22.
6
62 THE TIME OF TUE END.
" We proceed, therefore, to observe, that the death of
the Saviour at the termination of liis three and a half years'
ministry on the one hand, and the conversion of Corne-
hus after the three and a half years of the apostolic min-
istry among the Jews on the other, together make up the
'one,' or last of the 70 pi-ophetic weeks; and, added to
the 30 years of Christ's age when he commenced his min-
istry, it demonstrates that the 70 weeks closed A. D. 37.
Now, carry back the 70 weeks, or 490 years, from A. D.
37 to the era B. C, and you have the date of 'the com-
mand to restore and to build Jerusalem,' B. C. 458, or A.
M. 3679. Then, the 2300 years beginning at the same
time, Ave ascertain their termination merely by deducting the
years before the incarnation, Avhich brings us down to A.
D. 1847.
" But by what event is the close of 2300 years to be sig-
nalized ? Answer : The cleansing of the sanctuary, the
accomplishment of the vision, the last end of the indigna-
tion. Dan. 8: 14—19; 23—27. In other words, that
in A. T>. 1847 the Lord Jehovah will appear for the resto-
ration and reestablishment in Palestine of the seed of Abra-
ham, which he sware unto their fathers.
" Thus have we disposed of the first prophetical number of
453, from the commencement of Daniel's 70 weeks to the
nativity ; or 490, by the addition thereto of A. D. 37, to
the conversion of Cornelius, as having a common commence-
ment with the 2300 years. But, as we have seen, the year
A. D. 1847, as the terminating point of the 2300 years,
when added to A. M. 4132 from the creation, still leaves
21 years, minus the 6000. There are, however, three other
numbers of the 'more sure word of prophecy,' which, as
in the other instance, calculating the present as A. D. 1842,
defines the period when ' the mystery OF God' in Prov-
idence and Redemption shall be ' finished.' These are
the three following numbers of Daniel 12 : 7, 11, 12, viz.,
'a time, times, and a half,' or 1260 years, — 1290 years, —
and 1335 years." — pp. 241-2.
"Now, as the 1260 years refers to the duration of the Papal
dominion in its consolidated form, and 1793 marks the
period of the commencement of its overthrow ; so, counting
the 1335 years from A. D. 533, it brings us down to
THE EPOCH OF 1847. G3
A. I). 1868, the time of the commencement of millennial
blessedness as portrayed by Daniel 12: 12, 13; as the
period of consummated ruin to the confederated Papal. Infi-
del, and despotic Anti-Christian power. But, this inter-
vening 75 years from A. D. 1793 to A. D. 18G8 being
divided, as above, into tico periods of 30 and 45 years, the
first term of 30 years terminated A. D. 1822, which was
signalized by the following remarkable events, viz., — the
declaration of independence by the Greeks, and their conse-
quent separation from Turkey, which resulted in the resto-
ration of the seat of the third empire to political power;
the pouring out of the sixth, vial, and the preaching of the
second advent. The second term of 45 years is that inter-
val during which the great 'day of the Lord,' the day of
'the end," is signalized by 'the breaking up of the visible
gentile kingdoms and churches (lie v. 16 : 19), on account
of their apostasy and wickedness, by a series of desolating
judgments foretold distinctly in Dan. 2 : 34, 35,' and in
the seven Apocalyptic thunders (Rev. 10 : 1— -4) which St.
John was commanded to ' seal up.' Both in Daniel and
St. John these and similar predictions are explicitly inter-
preted by the angel as pointing out Christ's kingdom
breaking in. pieces all the previous kingdoms, and which
will stand forever.
" Here, then, is the complete overthrow of Popery, Ma-
HOMETANiSM, INFIDELITY, and EVERY Opposing kingdom.
This is the time of trouble., such as never was since there
was a nation to this time; NO, NOR EVER SHALL be.
Heaven prepare us for, and preserve us during our expos-
ure to, the days of calamity which await us !" — pp. 270-1.
Joseph Wolff.
Joseph AVolif, the Missionary, gives in his Journal a
letter, dated in 1833, from a Mussulman of distinction, who
says :
" I have received your second epistle, and perused its
contents. You say that it is mentioned in the 8th chapter
of Daniel, that Christ would descend upon earth, after two
thousand three hundred years from the time of Daniel,
"which was 453 years before Christ ; that, having deducted
64 THE TIME OF THE END.
453 from 2300, there remained 1847 ; and the present
year is 1833, from which the hitter sum having been
deducted, there remained 14 years, which is the period of
Christ's coming." — Missionury Labors^ pp. 258-9.
In a letter dated April 20th, 1829, Mr. Wolff wrote :
" I proclaimed for two months to the Jews the great
truth, first, that Jesus OF Nazaueth came the first time
on earth, despised and rejected of men, to die for poor sin-
ners ; and secondly, that he will come again with glory and
majesty ; and, glorious in his apparel, and travelling in
the greatness of his strength, he will come the Son op
Man, in the year 1847, in the clouds of heaven, and
gather all the tribes of Israel, and govern in person as man
and God in the literal city of Jerusalem, with his saints,
and be adored in the temple, which Avill be rebuilt, and thus
he shall govern a thousand years ; and I. Joseph Wolff,
shall see, with my own eyes, Al)raham, Isaac, and Jacob,
in their bodies, in their glorified bodies ; and I shall see
thee, Elijah, and thee, Isaiah, and thee, Jeremiah, and thee,
David, whose songs have guided me to Jesus of Naza-
reth. I shall see you all here at Jerusalem, where I am
writing these lines.
' ' These were the topics upon which I spoke, not only
with Jews, but likewise with some Mussulmans.'"
{Signed) " JOSEPH WOLFF,
"Missionary to the Jews in Palestine and Persia."
— Jones on the Apoc, p. 487.
Rev. Frederic; Sander.
The Rev. Frederic Sander, pastor of Wiclilengshausen, in
his work entitled '-An Attempt at Exposition of the Rev.
of St. John" (Stuttg., pub. by J. F. Slunkopf, 1829),
briefly states his opinion that the number GQ^ of Rev. 13 :
18 are so many years, and mark the duration of the Papal
power, commencing A. D. 1177, when the title of Pope
xilexander III. was generally acknowledged, and ending
Avith A. D. 1843. He then argues "that the millennial
kingdom may be expected to commence in A. D. 1847, and
not before." — Memoirs of Bcngel^ p. 350.
The next date which has been defended by any semblance
of argument is
THE EPOCH OF A. D. 1866. 65
THE EPOCH OF A. D. 1864-6.
Those vrho argue for this date arrive at it mainly by
commencing the 12G0 days of Daniel and John with the
decree of Phocas in A. D. 606. The former number added
to this would amount to 1866.
David CnYTRiEus, D. D.
One of the earliest expositors who referred to this date
was David Chytrreus, D. D., who published an Apocalyptic
Exposition at Wittenburg in A. D. 1571. lie said of the
1260 days, " If numbered from A. D. 412, when Alaric
took Rome and overthrew its empire, the end will be in
1672 ; or if from the time of Phocas, A. D. 606, when the
Pope's supremacy began, then the end may be expected
A. D. 1866."
Foxc, the Martyrologist, according to Mr. Elliott, quotes
Arctius of Berne, who died in 1574, as advancing the
same idea. — Horce Apoc, v. 4, p. 450.
David Pareus.
In the " Commentary " of David Pareus, which was the
substance of lectures delivered in 1608 to the Academy of
Heidelberg, over which he presided, and published in 1615,
the 1260 days of the Gentiles treading the Holy City he
inclines to reckon as 1260 j^ears, beginning from Boniface's
grant of the title of universal Bishop to the Roman Pope,
A. D. 606, a period ending, says he, A. D. 1866. But
he " leaves the decision of this point with God."
Rev. William Whiston, A. M.
Prof Whiston, the successor of Sir Isaac Newton in the
Mathematical Professorship at Cambridge, Eng., in an
essay published in 1706, according to Mr. Elliott, also dates
the Papal supremacy from Phocas' decree in 606 ; and
he quotes Archbishop Laud as affirming the same.
Rev. Thomas Scott, D. D.
Dr. Scott, the commentator, born in England in 1747,
was a post-millcnnialist, but looked for the temporal millen-
nium to commence at the end of the 1260 years. He says :
6*
66 THE TIME OF THE END.
" The beginning of these twelve hundred and sixty years
must be placed subsequent to the four first trumpets, on the
subversion of the western empire, which Avas completed A.
D. 566. This made way for the Pope, in process of time,
to acquire a vast accession of ecclesiastical dominion. He
became universal Bishop A. D. 606, and was fully estab-
lished as a temporal prince A. D. 756. Did we know
exactly at Avhat time to begin the twelve hundred and sixty
years, wc might show with certainty when they Avould
terminate ; but this would not consist with that wise obscur-
ity which always in some respects rests on prophecies
before they are fulfilled. Till the event, therefore, shall
explain this matter, it must be left undetermined ; but per-
haps the beginning of the rise and of the fall of this anti-
christian tyranny, and the completion of them, may both
be at the distance of twelve hundred and sixty years from
each other, as in more than one way the Babylonish cap-
tivity lasted seventy years. The beginning, however, of
these years, cannot well be fixed sooner than A. D. 606,
or later than A. D. 756." 1260 years from the first date
would end in 1866. — Com. on Rev. 11: 1, 2.
Eev. William Cogswell, D. D.
The late Dr. Cogswell, Secretary of the American
Education Society, in his "Manual" published in 1836, in
answer to the question, " When will the Millennium com-
mence?" says :
"J. Whenever the means of grace are enjoyed and
rendered eifectual throughout the world. The particular
day or year cannot, perhaps, be ascertained. Probably it
will begin before the seventh thousand years of the world
commence. The prophecies of Daniel and of John the
Divine lead to this conclusion. According to these predic-
tions, the church is to be oppressed by Papal superstition
and Mohammedan delusion 1260 years. These are to com-
mence, continue, and close together. The Papal supersti-
tion, most probably, commenced in 606, when Phocas con-
stituted the Bishop of Rome universal Bishop, and Mo-
hammed began his infamous reign the same year. Add 1260
to 606 and it makes 1866, the probable time for the com-
THE EPOCH OF A. D. 18CG. 67
mencement of the release of the church, and of the de-
struction of her enemies. About this time the Jews and
the Gentiles will be converted, and unite together in one
body under Christ, their spiritual head. Then will com-
mence the latter day glory of the church, the season of
millennial blessedness. This is agreeable to the opinion of
the most able and learned modern writers on the proph-
ecies." — pp. 187-8.
Rev. Alfred Bryant,
The pastor of the First Presbyterian Church in Niles,
jMichigan, sa3'^s :
"The chronological data which the prophecies give fur-
nish intimations that the time is short when all that is pre-
dicted shall come to pass.
" One of the most prominent periods fixed for the term-
ination of the 12(30 3^cars. so repeatedly brought to view
in the prophecies of Daniel and John, is 18G6. This clearly
does not mark the time of the coming of the Son of man,
for that time none can know ; but according to prophecy,
within the limits of some four years from that time, preced-
ing or succeeding, may be expected a great crisis in the
political affairs of the nations, and great revolutions, which
may dissolve the relation between church and state in Eu-
rope, and have a most important bearing upon the Jewish
people, in preparing the way for their ultimate restoration
in part to their own land.
" Precisely what course these political events are to take,
it would be hazardous to state, for it is not revealed ; but
there is clear intimation in prophecy that Russia is yet to
gain an entire ascendency over continental Europe, and
have all the powers thereof under its control, in accomplish-
ing its vast schemes of ambition and war. And in its fully-
developed form Russia will probably constitute the great
Gog of Scripture — Gog the prince of Rosh of Meshech and
Tubal, who is described by Ezekiel, and who will be de-
stroyed in the great battle of Armageddon as predicted.
The present aspect of things in Europe looks suspiciously in
this direction. But, whatever may be true in I'cspect to
these things, there can be no doubt that, according to proph-
ecy, we are on the eve of vast political revolutions, in
68 TUE TIME OF THE END.
•\vhicli probably blood will flow, as described in Apocalyptic
vision. But these things, as they come to pass, will only
hasten on the day of deliverance and salvation.
" The very general expectation upon the minds of most
persons, that we are approaching some great crisis, is an
indication of the coming Saviour." — Views of Mlllenna-
rianism, pp. 224, 225,
Rev. George Stanley Faber, B. D.
Mr. Faber, Rector of Long-Newton, in the county of
Durham, in his celebrated "Dissertation on the Prophe-
cies," says of the commencement of the 1260 days :
"It will be difficult to pitch upon any era for the date
of this sufficiently conspicuous act e.xcept the year 606 :
for in this and in the following year tlie saints were form-
ally given into the hand of the little horn ; and the apos-
tasy of individuals became the embodied and established
apostasy of a spiritual catholic emj)ire^ over which the
man of sin presided.
" When a spiritual universal tyrant then was set up in
the church, and when idolatry was (immediately upon his
being thus set up) openly authorized and established by him
the afflicted w^oman, the true church, seems to have fled
into the wilderness from the pollution of the holy city by
the new gentilism of Popery, and the icitnesses appear to
have begun to prophesy in sackcloth, or to profess the fun-
damental truths of the Gospel in a depressed and afflicted
state. Accordingly, as Bishop Newton well observes, and
afterwards satisflxctorily proves, ' there have constantly been
S2ich witnesses from the seventh century ' (the century in
which the apostasy, considered as the open act of a com-
munity under its proper head, commenced) ' down to
the Reformation, during the most flourishing period of
Popery.'
" Thus it appears that the tyrannical reign of the fourth
beasfs little horn, and consequently the prophetic period
of 1260 days, are most probably to be computed from the
year 606, and will therefore, upon such a supposition, term-
inate in the year 1866. Let us next turn towards the
East, and see whether we cannot discover, in this same
year 606, any marks of the completion of that desolating
1
THE EPOCH OF A. D. 1866. 69
oriental revolt^ which, when completed and connected with
the 1ie-(joaC s Utile honi^ is to continue during the same
period of 12G0 prophetic days.
'• As the idolatrous apostasy had long commenced indi-
vidiially, before it was comi>lefedhy receiving an open estab-
lishment in the West, so likewise the Eastern revolt had,
in its main principle, taken place individually, before it was
completed by being adopted as the foundation of a religion
avoAvcdly hostile to Christianity. The divinity of our Lord
had been impugned by more than one sect of speculative
heretics, and Mohammed himself had conversed with the
apostate Nestorian monk Scrgins, before he began to prop-
agate that imposture which so well merits the name of a
desolating revolt ; but it was in the year GOG that he re-
tired to the cave of Ilera to complete the aj)ostasy of
Antitrinitari((nism, and to fabricate the false religion,
which soon after darkened the whole oriental world, llav-
ing fully digested his plan in the solitude of the desert, he
began, yet only in private, to preach his lieterogeneous sys-
tem of theology about the year G08 or G09. Mecca was
the theatre of his first labors ; and his earliest converts
Avere his. wife, his servant, his pupil, and his friend. At
length, by the persuasion of Abubeker, ten of the most
respectable citizens of Mecca were introduced to the private
lessons of the Islam ; the prophet persevered ten years in the
now more public exercise of his mission ; and the religion,
which has since overspread so large a portion of the globe,
advanced with a slow and painful progress within the walls
of his native town.
" Here, then, avc behold the desolating revolt of the East
completed at the very time Avhen we Avere taught by proph-
ecy to expect that it nould be completed, namely, at the
heijlnninrj of the 12G0 days. , Small as it was at its com-
pletion by being adopted as the foundation of a ncAV reli-
gion, and small as it Avas at its first appearance in the qual-
ity of a little horn, rising oat of the ruins of the Syrian
horn of the he-goat, it soon Avaxed exceeding great ; and
in a very short space of time succeeded in completely pol-
luting the spiritual sanctuary of the Eastern church. The
exact resemblance betAvcen this desolating revolt and the
religion of Mohammed, in all other respects as Avell as in
70 TUE TIME OF THE END.
their chronological correspondence with each other, shall pres-
ently be shown : I shall first, however, try to ascertain the
era from which the 2200, 2300, or 2400 days, mentioned
in the prophecy of tlce ram and the he-(joat, are to be
computed ; and thus likewise to ascertain the proper read-
ing of the number."— Vol. i., pp. 281, 284.
" Now, if I be right in computing tJie 1260 days from
the year 606, the year in which t]i.e Mohammedan abom-
ination commenced, the year in which tJte Roman beast
revived, the year in which the saints were given into the
hand of the Papal little horn, the 1260 days will expire in
tJie year 1866. These 1260 days, as we have already seen,
synchronize with the last 1260 days of the 2200, 2300, or
2400 days, whichever of these numbers be the proper
reading ; because, as we are expressly informed by the two
interpreting angels, the 2200, 2300, or 2400 days, and tlie
1260 days, both equally bring us down to the time of the
end, and consequently terminate together. Such being
the case, we have only to compute backward 2200, 2300,
and 2400 years from the year of onr Lord 1866 ; and,
according to the epoch to which they respectively lead us, we
shall be able to decide, with some degree of probability,
both irhich of those three numbers is the true reading,
and likewise at what era we are to date the commencement
of the vision of the ram and the h,e-rjont.
" Boniface the Third was created Pope on tlie loth of
February, in the year 606. His accession took place in
the midst of a quarrel between the emperor Phocas and
the Patriarch of Constantinople ; the result of which Avas,
that Phocas forbade the Patriarch to style himself Universal
Bishop, and conferred that name exclusively on the Eoman
Pontiff". By computing, therefore, 1260 ye«rs forward from
the spring of the year 606, we shall arrive at the spring
of the year 1866. This operation being performed, if we
next compute 2200 years backward from the spring
of tlie year 1866, we shall arrive at the spring of the
year A. C. 335 ; if 2300 years from the same era, at the
sjyring of the year A. C. 435 ; and if lastly 2400 years,
at tJie spring of the year A. C. 535. In making our
choice among these three dates, we must be guided by cir-
cumstances.
1
THE EPOCH OF A. D. 1866. 71
" Both the year A. C. 335 and the year A. C. 435, to
■which we are led by adopting the readings of Jerome and
the Hebrew, are far too late for the proper date of the vis-
ion. They are each sxihscniicnt to the only period of
Medo-Persian victories which can be made to correspond
with the piishings of the rran. Hence it is plain that they
would exclude those pushings, and likewise the previous
quiescent state of the ram. Consecjucntly they would
exclude a part of the vision ; because Daniel first saw the
ram stand, and afterwards saw him push. Therefore a
period which comprehends the vholc of the vision, a period
which is the assif/ucd Ic/tf/th of the vision, cannot properly
be computed from either of those years ; but must be com-
puted from some prior era.
" On the other hand, the spring of the year A. C. 535,
to which we are led by adopting the reading of the LXX or
2400 days. will, if I mistake not. be found an unobjectionable
date in every point of view. It synchronizes either with
the latter end of the first year of Cyrus or with the begin-
ning of his second year, according to the precise time of
his accession to undivided empire ; that is to say, it syn-
chronizes with the period in which the ram,, now having
tuo hoj'ns, was beginning to rest from his previous victo-
ries, and to stand in a quiescent state of peaceful settled
government. Nor is this all. I have already observed
that the greater period mentioned in the vision of the
ram and the he-goat, and the smaller period of 1260
days, plainly terminate together ; and I have likewise
stated, that, according to the most natural interpretation of
another prophecy of Daniel, the Jews will begin to be re-
stored at the end of the 1260 duys, and consequently at
the end of the larger period likewise. Now, the reading of
the LXX, or 2400 days, computed as / have made the
computation, will bring us into the very midst of the restor-
atio)i of the Jews from Babylon. For in the second year
of their return, and within a few months after their arrival
in their own country, they laid the foundations of the tem-
ple in the second month fjar, which corresponds with the
latter end of April and the beginning of jNIay. Conse-
quently, since they began to return in the year A. C. 536,
this must have happened in the spring of the year A. C.
72 THE TIME OF THE END.
535. Tluis. unless I be entirely mistaken, 2400 years,
the length of the ■whole vision of the rmji and the he-goat,
is also the space ^^'hich ^vill intervene between the two re-
storations of the Jews. About the commencement of this
period, they began to return from Babylon ; and exactly
at its commencement, they laid the foundations of the
temple ; at the end of it, they will begin to be restored
from all the difiEerent countries of their present dispersion.
On these grounds, I much incline to think that the memor-
able event of the laybifj the foundations of the second
temple., at the close of the first or at the beginning of the
second year of Cyrus, afibrds us the true date of the vis-
ion; and consequently that the number 2400 is the
genuine reading.
" The sum of what has been said respecting the date
of the 1260 years amounts, then, to this : since the deso-
lating revolt of Mohammedism is to flourish 1260
years, since the saints are to be delivered into the hand
of the Papal little horn for the space of 1260 years, since
the Roman beast is to practise prosperously in his revived
state during the same space of 42 prophetic months, and
since the two horns and the beast are all to perish together
at the time of the end, which commences at the termi-
nation of the 1260 years ; it seems necessarily to follow,
that the date of those years can only be an era marked by
the following triple coincidence : — the co7npletion of the
eastern revolt by the 7'ise of Mohammedism ; — the com-
mencement of the Papal little horn^s spiritual imiversal
JSmpire ; and the revival of the Roman beast by confer-
ring upon his little horn that spiritual universal empire,
or, in the language of prophecy., by giving the saints into
his hand. If therefore we pitch upon any era not marked
by this triple coincidence, we shall have reason to suspect
that it cannot be the true date of the 1260 years ; because,
since the 1260 years of Mohammedis7n, the 126.0 yeai^s
of the Papal horn, and the 1260 years of the revived
Roman beast, all apparently terminate together at the time
of the end, they must in that case all necessarily begin
together.
" This, however, is not the only test which the prophet has
given us to ascertain the true date of the 1260 years. He
THE ErOCII OF A. D. 1866. 73
has checked (if I may use the expression) this period by
another hirger period, which comprehends it, and ^vhicll
terminates along with it. This hirger period is stated by
three different readings to he il200. 2300, or 2400 ycirs.
"Thus it appears, that, after we have discovered an era
for the date of the 1 200 years marked by tlie triple coin-
cidence of the rise of Mohnynmcdism, the giving up of the
sfti/its into the hand of the Papal little horir, and the
revival of the Roman beast by thiis giving np the saints.
we must next examine whether a computation deduced from
this era will make the larger period of 2200. 2300, or
2400 years, and the smaller pe/iod of 12G0 years,
rightly correspond together. This must be done by first
computing forward 1200 years from the date which we
have pitched upon, and afterwards by computing backward
2200, 2300, and 2400 years from the era to which the first
computation brought us down : for, since this era is equally
the supposed termination of both the periods, it is evident
that, it" we compute backAvard from it the number of years
which compose the larger period, we shall arrive at the
beginning of that period. Three different numbers of years,
however, are assigned by three different readings to the
larger period. If. then, the second computation backward
from the era to which the first computation forAvard brought
us doAvn bring us, through the medium of any one of the
three numbers mentioned by the three different readings, to
an era from which the vision of the ram and the he-goat may
be reasonably dated, we shall have attained to a very high de-
gree of probability, both that that reading is the true one, and
that we have pitched upon the right date of the 1200 years,
because the two periods, larger and smaller, are found upon
trial exactly to check each other. But if, on the contrary,
the second computation backward from the era to which
the first computation forward brought us down do not bring
us, througli the medium of any one of the three numbers
mentioned by the three different readings, to an era from
which the vision of the ram and the hc-goat may be rea-
sonably dated, we may then be morally certain that wo
have not pitched upon the right date of the 1200 years,
because the two periods, larger and smaller, are not found
upon trial to check each other.
7
74 THE TIME OF THE END.
" Now, I am strongly inclined to believe that the year
of our Lord 606 is the only era which answers to both
these tests. It was in this year that the Eastern revolt
was completed by the rise of Mohammed) sm ; and it was in
this year that the Roman beast revived by giving the
sai/its into the hand of the little Papal horn. Moreover,
if we first compute forward 1260 years from the sprinj of
this year, Ave shall arrive at the spring of the year
1866, the supposed termination both of the larger and
of the smaller period. And, if we next compute back-
ward 2-100 years from the spring of the year 1866, in
order to arrive at the commencement of the larger period,
the computation will bring us to the spring of tlie year A.
C. 535, which is perhaps as probable a date as could have
been assigned even a ijriori to the larger period; for the
spring of that year synchronizes either with the latter end
o^tJie first year of Cyrus or with the beginning of his second
year, when the Persian ram now having two horns began
to stand in a settled state previous to his pushings under
Darius, and when the foundations of the second temple were
laid by the Jews within a few months after the commence-
ment of their restoration from the Babylonian captivity.
" The propriety of fixing upon the year 606 as the date
of the 1260 years will be yet further manifest, if it be
shown that, to all appearance at least, no other era what-
soever can answer to the tests furnished by the prophet.
Mr. Mede supposes that the 1260 years ought to be com-
puted from the year 455 or 456, Avhen the power of Rome
was completely broken by the Vandals, though the name of
Emperor was yet continued. Independent, however, of
this opinion's having been confuted by the event, the erro-
neousness of it might easily have been detected even when it
was first advanced. The year 456 was neither marked by
the rise of any power which can be said to have completed
the desolating revolt of the East and which answers to
the description of the he-goafs little horn, nor by any
formal giving up of the saints into the hand of the Papal
horn ; nor yet, when it is checked by the larger period,
according to any one of its three readings, Avill it bring us
to an era from which the vision of the ram and the he-goat
can be reasonably computed. Bishop Newton seems to
THE EPOCH OP A. D. 18GG. 75
hesitate betAveen the year 727, when the Pope and the
Romans finally broke their connection with the Eastern
Emperor ; the year 155, when the Pope obtained the Exar-
chate of liaveima ; the year 774, when he acquired by the
assistance of Charlemagne the greatest part of the kinfjdom,
of Lomhardy ; and the year 787, when the worship of
images was fully established, and the supremacy of the
Pope acknowledged by the second council of Nice : of
these different dates, however, he is inclined to prefer tlio
first. Now, upon examination, not one of thera will be
found to answer to the tests furnished by the prophet. In
none of these years, except the last, were the saints given
into the hand of tlie Papal horn ; and, as for the acknowl-
edgment made by the council of Nice, it was only a repe-
tition of the grant already made by the sixth head of the
beast : in none of tbcm was any Eastern revolt completed,
that was in any way connected with a little horn of the he-
goat : and none of them will bear to be checked by the
larger number according to any one of its three readings.
There is yet another date fixed upon by Mr. ]Mann, which
])rima facie was more probaljle that any of the preceding
ones. About the year 533 or 534, the Emperor Justinian
declared the Pope to be Head of all the churches. Hence
it seemed not unlikely that the 1260 years ougbt to be
computed from that era ; because the saints might be consid-
ered as having been then formally given into the hand of the
little horn. That such a title was conferred upon the Pope
about that time, may be very true ; but I am much inclined
to think that Mr. Mann has greatly mistaken the nature of
Justinian's grant, and that no authority was then given to
the Bishop of Rome which at all corresponds with the idea
of universal episcopacy. Phocas declared the Pope to be
at once Head of all the churches, which is a title of prece-
dence and dignity, and sole universal Bishop, which is a
title of authority, because he forbade all the other Patriarchs
to assume it : whereas, although Justinian conferred upon
him the first of these titles, yet at the very same time he
styled the Patriarch of Constantinople Head of all the
other churches. A comparison is accordingly drawn very
judiciously by Brightman between the grant of Justinian and
the grant of Phocas ; in which he states that the former
76 THE TIME OF THE END.
merely gave the Pope precedence of all his episcopal breth-
ren, but that the latter exclusively constituted him univer-
sal JVisho])^ assigning to him the -syhole world for his dio-
cese. That this was really the case7 any person may satisfy
himself by consulting the NoccUai.'^ — II)., pp. 287-300.
Rev. John Cumjiing, D.D.
The eloquent Dr. Camming, minister of the Scottish
National Church, Crown Court, Covent Garden, London,
says of the Second Advent:*
"I know not the times and the seasons; he comes at an
hour men think not. The periods of prophetic chronology
are all rapidly converging. The great epochs of Daniel,
the grand eras of the Apocalypse, as has been shown, all
terminate about the year 1864. Reader, do not take up
the idea that we assert that Christ comes in that year. All
we allege is, that the great prophetic epochs converge just
about that time; and, according to Clinton's chronology, in
his 'Fasti Hellenici,' the most able adjustment of the chro-
nology of the world that has issued from the pen of any,
he demonstrates, not guesses, that the six thousand years of
the world terminate about 1863 ; and then, that 186-4 or
1865 begins the seventh millenary of the world. N*w,
the Jews looked to the seventh thousandth year of the
world as the great aixr]rl; \inna tij s^Soitr. Tovro Xiyn,
oTuv i/.6wv 6 Ylos uvtov, yai yaTuoyi^net rur yatnov urouov, y.ui x'jirci
Tof? aaciiiig, xcti a'/J.a'lii lov i^i.iov, xui T);v ai}.>p}jv, xai rovg aonoag, tors
xa?.(iig xaranuvotrai tv rtj i^ufofj Ti; i^doui}. c. 15.
2. Irenceus, 'Oaaig ijinouig tytrcro o xonuog, rociovToig /iXiovraai
avmf.eiTui. Kai Sia rovro (pr^Oiv i; YQtx(pi;, Kai avvirt'Aiadi^aav o ovourog
xai i; yi], xai nag 6 xoa^iog avrmv xai avvtrt'/.eoiv o ©jo? (v rti ifii'jq Tn
g' ra ^Q'/a avrov u siroiyjos, xai xartntxvoiv 6 0eog tr tij i^uiQrt Tii ^' ano
Trarrviv rwv cnymv avrov. Tovro 6' lari rwv Tiooycyororwy (Jiiy/j/aic, xui ruiv
taouivwv TTQoiptjrtia: ij yaq i,uiQa Kvotov cog xi^ta jt»;. Adv. Hter. v.
ad fin.
3. Qu(Est. et Respons., which go under the name of Justin Martyr,
No. 71: Eriari dia noXXwr yoaq'ixLov (fiurvyr riyur^Quo&ai a?.tr,6sviv rovg
?.tyorrag s^axiaj(i?.ia trtj itvui rov y^novov rijg jraQovatjg tou xoauov
auoransuig.
4. Cyprian. "Ut primi in dispositione divina septem dies, annorum
septem millia continentes." De Exh. Mart. 11.
5. Lactantius. " Quoniam sex diebus cuncta Dei opera perfecta sunt,
per secula sex, id est annoi'um sex millia, manere in hoc statu mundum
necesse est. . . Et rursus, quoniam perfectis operibus requievit die sep-
timo, eumque benedixit, necesse est ut in fine sexti millesimi anni malitia
omnis aboleatur e terra, et regnct per annos mille justitia." vii. 14.
6. Ambrose. " Quia cum septimo die requieverit Dens ab omnibus
opeiibus suis, post hebdomadam istius mundi quies diuturna promittitur. "
In Luc. viii. 2'6.
For notices to the same effect from Jerome and Augustine, see my Vol.
i., p. 371. Besides the passage there cited, Augustine speaks of it also in
his C. D. XX. 7. 1. Feuardeiitius, in his Note on the passage quoted
above from Irenteus, adds Hilary on Matt, xviii.
It is to be observed that the anti-premilleuarian fathers of the fourth
and fifth centuries explained the sabbatical seventli day as typical, not of
a seventh sabbatical .Millennium of rest, but an eternal sabbath: — a
view generally adopted afterwards. In the pseudo-Barnabas' view (ibid.),
it seems to have been rather the Christian sabbath on the "eighth" day
that typified the saints' eternal rest; the Jetvish seventh-day sabbath the
millennial.
IN THE PROPHETIC CALENDAR.
105
present age, dated from Adam's creation, and ichen the ter-
mination of its sixth millcnanj. Nor is there wanting
the evidence rei^uisite for our attaining a near approxima-
tion to this notable epoch. Mr. Fynes Clinton, in his
Essay on Hebrew Chronology, a{)pended to the third
volume of his late learned work, entitled Fasti Hellcnici,
has greatly elucidated the subject. Setting aside the many
mundane chronologies, such as Hales has enumerated,
based (if such a word may be used) on the baseless founda-
tion of authorities that altogether lack authority, our only
real appeal is to Scripture. And here,* on the great pri-
* The following tabular schemes exhibit the v.iiMations : the numbers
expressing the parent's age at the son's birth, except in the cases of Noah
and Shcm; and Abraham's birth being assigned t« Terah's 130th year,
the true date. (See Note t p- -oG infra. )
Antcdihivian Patriarchs.
Adam . . .
Selh . . . .
i^rios . . .
Cainan . .
Mabalalcel
Jared . . .
Enoch . . ,
Methuselah
Lantech . .
10. JVoah (at the flood)
130
105
90
70
Go
1G2
G5
187
182
600
130
105
90
70
05
G2
65
67
53
GOO
I-XX.
230
205
190
170
165
162
165
187
188
GOO
Josephus.
230
205
190
170
165
162
(1)65*
187
182
GOO
* 165 is doubtless )
the correct reading. )
Total
1G56
1307
2262
2256
Postdiluvian Patriarchs.
11.
1-2.
[C;
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Sheni (aged 100 at the
Flood)
Arphaxad
linau spurious
Salah
Hebcr
Pclcj
Reu
Serug
J^i'uhor
Terah (Gen. 11: 32, 12: 4)
So to Abraham
2
35
30
34
30
82
30
29
130
Samaritan.
2
135
130
134
130
132
130
79
130
2
135
130
130
134
130
132
130
79
130
Josephus.
12
135
-]
130
134
130
130
132
120
130
352
1002
1002
1053
106 OUR PRESENT POSITION
mary disputed question of the Patriarchal chronologies^
and whether it be the Hebreto text with its shorter chronol-
ogy, that has by fraud been robbed of elevva centuries, or
the Sej)tuacjiiit witli its longer, that has had them fraudu-
lently added (for that the diftereuce is the result of design
is a thing evident, and long since noted by Augustine*),
the answer seems on every account to be in favor of the
Hebrew text: — considering, first the superior reverence
and almost superstitious care, with Avhich the Hebrew text
was watched over, as compared with the Septuagint ; f —
next, the wonderful uniformity of the numerals of the He-
brew text, in all its multitudes of manuscripts existing in
diflferent parts of the world, contrasted with the varieties
and uncertainty of the numerals in the Septuagint and
Samaritan: J — considering, /w;-i?/ie/", the general agreement
Jerom (Vol. ii., p. 573), in his Letter to Evaugelius about Melchisedek,
thus gives and reasons on tlie numerals :
They say that Shem was 31)0 years when Alarain was born. For
Shem at 100 begat Arphaxad, and lived 100 years after.
Salem.
Eber.
Phaleg.
Rehu.
Saleg.
Nahor.
Abram, Nahor, and Hai'an.
Therefore Shem overlived him 35 years.
* In the Antediluvian Table (wdiere the question is between the Hebrew
and Josephus), the years before ihc son^s birth and the residues agree in
all cases with the totals of the lives; except that in the Samaritan the
residues in tlie sixth, eighth, and ninth are shortened, to adapt them to
the shorter period between Jared and the Hood. TlnTs,
in tlic Hebrew and Samaritan ^dam has 130 -|- 800 = 930.
.... Septuagint and .Josephus 230 -j- 700 = 930.
Again in the Hebrew and Samaria Seih has 105 -[- 807 = 912.
.... Septuagint and Josephus 205 + 707 = 912.
This can only have been by design. So Augustine Civ. Dei. xv. 13. 1 :
" Videtur habere quamdam, si dici potest, error ipse constantiam; nee
casum redolet sed industriam." And so Mr. Clinton,
t The Jews even counted the letters of their Bible.
t Professor Bauivjarten, of Halle, in his Remai'ks on Universal His-
tory, observes : " Botli the Samaritan copy and the Greek'version abound
in various readings, with respect to their difterent clironologies, and fre-
quently contradict tliemselves : whereas the Hebrew is uniform and con-
sistent in all its copies." And Mr. Kennedy, in his Chronology of the
World, says, that in examining the Hebrew text, he "was not able to
discover one various reading in that multitude of numeral words and let-
ters which constitute the scriptural series of years from the Creation to
the death of Nebuchadnezzar."
Arphaxad .
35
Salem . . .
30
Eber
34
Phaleg. ..
30
Rehu
32
Saleg ....
30
Nahor . . .
70
Abraham d
ed at 175
IN THE PROPHETIC CALENDAR. 107
of the Samaritan with the Hebrew in the chronology of
the antcdilitiian patriarchs,* and its thus fixing the fraud
in that table at least, and by probable consequence in the
jwstdiluvian table also, on the Scptuagint : — considering
moreover the better agreement of historical fact with the
Hebrew than Avith the Septuagintjf and the more easily
I quote this from a paper on the subject in the Christian Observer for
May, 1802, p. 'J87; and, in further illustration of the uniformity of the
Hebrew copies in respect of their numerals, may add from it tliat the
Chalikc Paraphrase of Onkclos, written probably near about the time of
Christ, ngrecs Avlth the Hebrew chronologies, and that the same are
recognized in the two Talmmh; — also that Dr. Wolff informs me that
" in the ancient manuscripts which he saw at Bokhara the chronological
notices of the length of lives, both of the antediluvian and the postdilu-
vian patriarchs, were exactly according to the received Hebrew text,
though the letters of the manuscripts resembled Samaritan."
As reg.inls the Samaritan, it is to be observed that the manuscript
from which our Samaritan Pentateuch was published, being written
about A. D. 1100, was consequently not nearly so old as many Hebrew
manuscripts. And in earlier existing copies of it we know that there
were certain variations to the numerals, more accordant with the Hebrew.
So the English Universal History, referred to in the Christian Observer.
See Note ' infra.
Of the errors of the Scptiiaf/int numerals, in many copies, a notable
example is given by Augustine, C. D. xv. 11. For it seems that in almost
all the copies then extant .^fcthuselah wsis made to have begotten Lamech
at the age of 107, and to have lived 802 years af\er : that is, fourteen
years after the flood, according to the Septungint chronology itself;
though we know tiiat no man but Noah, and his three sons Shem, Ham
and Japhet, were preserved alive through it !
* Nameh', in the cases of all but the sixth, eighth, and ninth Patri-
archs. Here the Samaritan residues are shortened to adapt them to the
shorter period, made by the shorter (jenealogies corresponding between
Jared and the flood; to the intent that these Patriarchs might not be
thought to have been involvetl in it. But we are told by Jerome (so the
compilers of our English Universal History have remarkofl) that in his
time there were some Samaritan copies which made Methuselah's and
Lamech' s .age^, at the birth of their sons, the same as the Hebrew.
t On the two points alleged in their own favor by the advocates of the
Septuagint Chronology, ^Ir. Clinton quite turns the tables against them.
1st. as to the age of the nuK'^nyutiu, which these writers have placed after
the lapse of one third of life, Mr. C. says that it appears from Scripture
to have been in the Patriarchal ago as early as it is now; Judah being at
fortj' -eight a grejit-grandfitlier, — Beni.miin having, under thirty, ten
sons, &c. 2. As to the Di^perfion at liabel, which the Soptuagintarians
say implies a mundane pojiulation such as could not have been according
to the Hebrew postdiluvian chronology, Mr. C. answers, that under
favorable circumstances, even now, it lins been calculated that population
may be doubled in ten years; that cases are known where it has doubled
for short periods in less than thirteen years; and that in the older case of
the Israelites in Egypt, and later of certain parts of the North American
108 OUR PRESENT TOSITION
supposablc object* with the Septuagint translators than
with the keepers of the Hebrew text, as well as better op-
portunity f for falsifying in the matter. This point settled, J
colonies, the population doubled itself in ^/ or that by St. Paul, in Acts 13 : 18 —
22, at about 580. || Mr. Clinton, not without reason, as it
early chronolog3' of Greece. The uncertainty is one ari.sing from two
dilicrent distinct testimonies. We have only to decide which is tlie genu-
ine and authentic copy. Either the space before ihejiood was 1C5G ye.ars,
or it was 'J'2;'H). Either the period from the flood to the call of Abraham
was 352 years, or it was 1002. " Tlicse periods could not be greater than
the highest of these numbers, or less than the lowest."
* This period is that comjirohcndcd in Josh. 24 : 31 : "And Israel
served the Lord all the days of Joshua, and all the days of the elders tliat
overlived Joshua, and which had known all the works of the Lord that he
had done for Israel."
t Compare Judg. 15 : 20; IG : 31, and 1 Sam. 4 : 1 ; 7 : 13 ; 12 : 2.
t Mr. Brooks, in the preface to his late history of the Jews, p. xiii.,
argues that tlie interval from jNIoscs' death to Joshua's must probably
have been longer, because of Joshua being called -|y3 a young man in
Exod. 33 : 11, and Numb. 11 : 28, with reference to the second year
after the Exodus. But this Hebrew word is used to designate servants
also (compare Gen. 22: 3, &c.); and Joshua is so called in the places
above cited as the servant of Moses. (So Kimchi explains this appella-
tive of Joslnia in Zech. 2 : 7; and so, I may add, Ambrose comments on
Gen. 24 : 2; " Etiam sonioris astatis servuli piieri dicantur a doniinis.")
Thus the appellation can no more be argued from than the French word
garcon or English ;)o,s<6oi/. Moreover, at tlie time of the division of the
land, seven j'cars after Moses' death (.Josh 14 : 10), Joshua is said (ibid.
13: 1) to have been "old and stricken in years." Thus Mr. Clinton
seems fairly to have estimated Joshua's age, at the time of the spies, at
about forty; it being the then age of his associate Caleb, also, who over-
lived him. See Judges 1: 1, U — 12. If so, as Josjiua was 110 years at his
death (see Josh 24 : 2'.)), the interval must have been 110 — (38-4-40)
=32.
§ 1 Kings 6 : 1. — "It came to pass in the 480th year after the children
of Israel were come out of tlie land of Egypt, in the fourth year of Solo-
mon's reign over Israel, that he began to build the house of the Lord."
II Acts 13:18. — " Forty years suifered he their mannei-s in the wildei'-
nes3 : and when he had destroyed seven nations in Canaan, he divided
10
110
OUR PRESENT POSITION
seems to inc, prefers the latter.* And thus, completing his
table, he makes the date of the Creation to be about 4138
their land to them by lot : and after that, he gaye unto them judges about
the space of four hundred and fifty years, until Samuel the prophet.
And aftenvards they desired a king : and God gave them Saul."
* Because the servitudcx must be included in the periods of rest, on the
shorter system ; which inclusion seems directly contrary to the tenor of
the Scripture statements. (Cut for this the Hebrew might reasonably be
deemed of the greater weight; and St. Paul's 450 years be explained
cither, as AVhitby prefers, by reference to the then current Septuagint chro-
nology ; or possibly, not probably, as Usher, by supposing it the measure of
the time from Abraham to the division of the lauds, not from the division of
the lands to Samuel. )t A chronological table of this pei-iod, formed from
the express declarations in the Book of Judges, is given below : — it being
premised that Chushan's oppression followed (Judg. 3: 7) on IsracVs first
apostasy to the worship of Baalim, on the death of the elders that over-
lived Joshua.
Servitudes.
Y'rs.
Rests and Judges.
Yr's.
1st. Chushan (Judges
3:8.)
8
1st. Rest (Judg. 3 : 11.)
40
2nd. Eglon (3 : U.) .
18
2nd. " " (3 : 30.)
80
3rd. Jabin (4:3.) . •
20
3rd. " " (5 : 31.)
40
4th. Midian (6 : 1.). .
7
4th. ("the days of Gideon," 8 : 28.)
40
Abimelech's judging, (9 : 22.) . . .
3
Tola's do. (10:2.) . . .
23
Jair's do. (10:3.) . . .
22
5th. Ammon (10 : 8.) .
18
.Jephthah do. (12:7.) . . .
6
Ibzan, Elon, Abdon, (12 : 8—14.) .
25
6th. Philistines (13:1.)
40
[Samson 20 years, and Eli.]
111
279
This last Philistinian servitude of forty years appears to have included
the judgeships of both Samson and Eli : the former being said (15 : 20 ;
t So too Calmet, quoted to that effect by Dr. A. Clarke. In order to this construction
of the passage from near the beginning of verse 17, to the end of verse 19, in Acts xiii.,
must be construed parenthetically thus :
'O Gioc roll '/MQV TuvTov loqariX i%fy.tzaxo Tovg naxiQag ijiu>v, (Kai Tov
Xaov vxlJvwev iv t» naooixin tv yii yliyvmw, xai fitra ^Qayjorog viptjXov
t^tivuvtr avroi'g t J uvtjjs. Kui tog TiaatouxovrutTt] )rQovo%' cTQ07TO(poQy}aiv
avrovg tv Ti) lOtjuio. Kut xa6i?.u)v t6vt; inra tvyvi Xaruav, y.uTey.f.riQoroftt]-
aiv avToig Tf;»- yyjv atTiDv.) Kai utra rut'Tu, log trtot Titnuxoaioig xai
ntvTtjy.ovTa, dvixt xntrug scic ^auonrp. tot TTQotpijTov,
In order to make out the 450 years on this view, the chronological epoch of God's
IN THE PROPHETIC CALENDAR.
Ill
B. C. ; and consequently the end of tlie 6000 years of the
world, and opening of the seventh INIillonniuui, by opproxi-
matioii. about A. D. 1862: — the same year, very nearly,
that we before fixed on as the epoch of the consummation,
on quite different data.* — I cannot but add that this con-
IC) : 31) to have .imlgcd Israel " in the days of the Philistines:''^ and the
latter to liavc died from _a;rief at tlieir detwvt of Israel, and capture of the
ark. Their supremaey continued until Samuel's defeat of them near
Mizpeh, of which the stone Ebenezer was the record (1 Sam. 7: V2):
after which Israel had rest "all the days of Samuel" (ihid. 13); until
he was old (8 : 1 ; 12 : 2), and anointed Saul king.
Thus the lime of the Judijes, exclusive of Joshua and Samuel, appears
from these numbers to have Viceu 3".i0 years: and if we add oi) years for
Joshua and the Efrypt-born elders that over-lived Joshua, reckoned from
after the time of the conquest and division of CaniiJin (about seven years
having intervened between that event and iMoscs' death), and 30 years
more for Samuel's judgeship after the Philistines' defeat, it exactly makes
up St. Paul's "about the space of 450 years." Add 7 for the conquest
of Canaan, 40 for the wilderness, 40 for Saul, and 40 for David : and then
the 4th year of Solomon comes to be about the 580th year from the Exude ;
instead of tlic 480th, as the Hebrew text dclines it in 1 Kings G : 1. And
therefore the only solution of the dilliculty, that I sec, is by supposing a
mistaken reading in our Hebrew copies of 480 for 580.
D. C.
A. M.
Ye.irs.
4138
Adam ....
2482
2130
1656
2008
The Deluge t
Birth of Abraham
1656
352
2055
2083
The Call ....
75
1025
2513
The Exode
430
1585
2553
Death of Moses
40
1558
1128
2580
3010
First Servitude (by conjecture) .
Death of Eli
27
430
lOOG
1056
3042
3082
Election of Saul (by conjecture)
David . ■ .
32
40
1016
3122
Solomon ....
40
076
3162
Rehoboam ....
40
587
3551
Zedekiah's Captivity
380
choosing tho fiithors of tlio .Tc'wish people, referred to iu verse 17, is fixed at the birth of
Isuiic ; from which to the division of tlie liiml Iiy lot is by some chroi)olo);ists (not by Mr.
Clinton) maile 452 years. But it seems to nie that the necessity of datini; from Isaac's
birth, instead of Abraliara's call, in order on any chronolojrical system to make out the
time from the " choosin}; of the fathers" to the division of Canaan not more than 450
years, constitutes a strong objection to this solution of the passajre. Besides that the
fifTit TitiiTK, after tlir.ie tliinyD, in the plural, seems to make it almost imperative on us
that we should date the 450 years from the end of tlic succession of rvrnt.i that the
apostle had just been particularizin);, not from the one event of the ciioicc of the fathers
first mentioned.
t I am informed by the Uev. Mr. Squire, who w.ns some time in China, that there is on
two imjuirUmt epochs of early nnindane chronolotry a considerable correspondence
between the Chinese and the Scriptural Chronology; uamely, that of Ihc Deluye and the
112 OUR PRESENT POSITION
elusion by Mr. Clinton as to the Avorld's age, from purely
literary data, agrees remarkably with the celebrated Cuvier's
from (jeolofjical data : for he thence infers that the date of
our earth's last great physical revolution cannot go back
much further than 5000 or GOOO years.*
On the fiy-leaf is appended a Tabular Scheme of this Scripture Chro-
nology, with the scriptural authorities in brief, drawn up by the Rev. C.
Bowen.t [Instead of giving the " tly-leaf," we have given I^Ir. Bowen's
scheme, in a Chro. Table of our own. — See Note on page 158. — Amer-
ican Editor.
* I cite from the Roman Catholic Bishop AViseman's 6th interesting
seven years of general famine under Joseph. The Chinese dates the Deluge A. M.
1713, and the seven years of famine B. C. 1729. So, he says, in ilorison's View of
China, and a work by Professor Kidd. — As to the seven years of famine, many of my
reailers may liave seen the very iuterestiiifr apparent reference to it in one of the ancient
Ilamyarltic inscrijitions on tlie rocks of the Southern Arab coast, beyond Aden, as
exi)lainelr. Forster, in his Uistorical Geography of Arabia. On which see my
Note 2, Vol. i., p. 419.
t In the Jewish Calendar, as lately edited by Sir. Lindo (a publication replete with
Jewish learning, and sanctioned by the Chief Rabbi in London, Solomon Hirschell), there
appear several most material variations from the above Chronological Table ; involving a
difference from Mr. Clinton's in the iEra of the World altogether of 340 years. The fol-
lowing are tlie points of variation :
1. Agreeing with Mr. C- in dating the Deluge A. M. 1656, it makes the birth, and
consequently the call too, of Abraham sixty years earlier. This arises from the supposi-
tion of Abraham's being the eldest of Terah's three sons, born when Terah was seventy
years old. Gen. 11 : 26 ; — a supposition quite unnecessary : as Abraham's first mention
among the three sons no more implies his primogeniture than Solomon's last mention
among Bathsheba's four sons, 1 Chron. 3: 5, his being the youngest ; or Shcm^s first
mention. Gen. 10 : 1, among Noah's three sons, his being eldest (for Jajihet is in Gen.
10 : 21 expressly declared eldest) : and which is directly contradicted by the statement,
Gen. 12 : 4, that Abraham was lb years old when he left Ilaran ; compared with Acts
1 : 4, which says that it was at Terah's death that Abraham left that country, and
with Gen. 11 : 32, which says that Terah died in Ilaran, at the age of 20.5 years. — 2.
There is in it the further difference of 100 years less between this event and Solomon's
completion of the Temple ; a difference grounded mainly on the circumstance of the
Jews calculating liy the Chronological stiitemeut in 1 Kings 6 : 1, noted by me in the
text. — 3. The Jewish Calendar shortens the inter\al between Solomon and Zedekiab's
captivity 15 years : — and, 4thly, that between Zedekiah and the Christian iEra yet 165
years. By the latter most gross and extraordinary falsification of a period as well
ascertained as that between our Richard the First and the time now present, the Jew-
ish Rabbis make the interval between the first destruction of Jerusalem by the
Babylonians and second by the Romans just about 490 j'ears. — Thus there is nothing
in the Jewish nmndane chronology to affect the accuracy of Mr. Clinton's.
Let me add that the early reformers noticed, and were struck with, the last men-
tioned strange error in the Jewish chronology ; and referretl it to the Jews' identification
of Darius Hystnspis (father to Xerxes) with the last Darius conquered by Alexander,
and obliteration from tliiir calendar of all the Persian kings intervening. So Melanc-
tAoJi on l)aii. 9 : " Ila-c series (that is of the Persian kings) nota est eraditis omnibus j
et inscitia Judaeorum recentium vituperanda est, qui fingunt non plures fuissc reges Per-
sicos qui'iui quatuor, et propter banc inscitiam omittunt ex serie annorum mundi centum
annus." And Osiander, De Ult. Tempor. ch. 1 : " Qu6d autem Judsei ab orbe condito
ad Cliristnm 200 annis fere minus numerant quam nos, in causa sunt, cum alii multi
errores, ti'ini ver(i ille omnium maximus quod iJarium Ilystaspis, sub quo tcmiilum
sediiicatuni est, et Uarium ab Alexandro devictum pro eodem haheant, ac sex tantum
annis regnasse putent : cum ah initio regni unius (Darii) us((ue ad finem ulterius, etiam
secundiim Ptolenia.'um, 192 anni intercesserint." — But why this abbreviation ? I have
nowhere seen a reason stated. It is curious, however, that by it the interval between
the first destruction of the Temple and the second is reduced, as before observed, to
about 490 years ; the precise eciuivalent to the seventy ivee/cs of Daniel : and is (as I
learn from a Jew) so stated by the Jews, l)y a kind of memoria technica. I suspect
therefore that to make those periods con-espond may have been the abbreviator's object.
IN THE PROPHETIC CALENDAR.
113
o
o
o
p^
o
CO
:^
o
EH
Cunning-
hame.
Hales.
JarTis.
Usher.
Bowen.
rt o CI I- ^ CO :o 00 CO o 0^ :o ^7 ^5 CO rt r3 I- -t ?3 .* (N -y r.^ oo
OtOOO*J5W*ftl^r10N»AOO*^*Ot^OCS»000<00> CD OOOXO
rH l-li-IO
0»rtOO*ft'N^Ot-.MO«*000-^OC-10CltrtrHOCDC-1 O COOOO
.- g,^
loooi-coeococccco co cocortr3coc*or2.i* co «)
i-l r-n-iO
OOOOkft'M«Ot-C^OW»000-tO'MOC5 00t^O O OOOOOO
coocai-coocDGOooo CO coror5«co
O»'5OOOC'1u0»-.C-lO'MU0OO-J< o o o
.a - - -
114
OUR PRESENT POSITION.
CiinT-.:t.^ O O I- O CO re -M ■» O I- O CO O O O 71 O O O l^ O rH O -^ rH -O O Ci
haiiie.
-M ■M o to <3>
r-1 O I-) pH C^
Hales. "=^"^ ^ =^''
> -f Zl r-l -* •* -f i-l •*!»
_ _ > rH C-l <£> <0 0>
Til (M 1-1 >0 IHI-I «
00^-OCOCO'^laDO^-000000«^000^- COrHiOOOrHOOOSt-I'MfOOOS
Usher.
-Sl-Je^M i-l T)< (N.^TJi-^iH -J<« a CI lOrlrllN
Clinton.
Ot^OrOre'MCOOt-OCOOOOOOOOt— COTH«OcOrHJ'r-l •*?) .^c^ lOr1l-le^
C>-5<^ C1r-j«2^|g^,c^gi
2 to o S
"1 i-l C-1 c-i
IN THE PROPHETIC CALENDAR.
115
Yi-ars of Ptolemy'3 Canon.
U5C>r-(0rt001t-
c ^ „c 1
3
S^'S = ;:J = St;^'-'-^-'-=» = r,:;35?3^-"-'-3S??§Sa^§gS?J
d
2
>0 M " r-lM 1-1 C3 (N .* fH .* !M rH C^ n C^ r-1 r< » C^ » ?< 7<
s
3
§
!
Ycurs of Ptolemy's Canon.
to n ri t-i 71
From Cyrus' decree to birth ChrUt 536 years.
gCQC<««C»
5, .5
• 5 a - »r 2
J= "S b" 3 i£ sJ
^ |||.||.^?S-
3
"5 *
-S
J3
■M
."3
"5 .
. c .
• s *
• tS
a •
^illlj
II
:
- si b
ct .C — ^ — ^ S "^ ■— t-
"^"^^^^-^p'iZG"^ eS tn "
".„
" 3 i
'=:'3
t
t|;S
116 OUR PRESENT POSITION
I must not leave this subject without a Avord, in passing,
on yet another more dubious, but verjr interesting prophetic
period. I allude to Ilia sewn I'nnes of Ncbiirh.(uhiezzars
insanity and stale of bcstialisin.* These, calculated after
the year-da}/ system, upon the hypothesis of the Babylon-
ish king's insanity figuring that of the great empires which
he then headed, in their state of heathen aberration from God
(an hypothesis on the truth of which I do not myself enter-
tain much doubt), terminate — if dated from the time B.
C. 727, when the Assyrians under Shalmanezer first acted
the u-ild beast's part against Israel f — about the year 1793 ;
that is, at the epoch of the French Revolution, and the
coincident going forth of the Gospel message to evangelize
the heathen. This seems to me a remarkable synchronism :
especially considering that the bisecting point of these seven
times is then x\.. D. 533 ; the very commencing epoch, with
Justinian's Decree, of the t/i?'ee and a half times of the
Papal Antichrist. — Of course they might be calculated,
yet more naturally, from Nebuchadnezzar's own accession
and invasion of Judah, B. C. 606. Considering, however,
not merely the long and intimate connection of Babylon
and Assyria (a connection recognized alike by ancient classic
Lecture on the connection between science and religion; vol. i., p. 354
(3rd Ed.).
"It is, in fact," Cuvier says, " one of the most certain, though least
expected, results of sound geological pursuits, that the last revolution
■which disturbed the surface of the globe is not very ancient." And in
another place he adds: "I think, therefore, with jMM. Deluc and Dolo-
mieu, that if there be anything demonstrated in geology, it is that the
surfice of our globe has been the victim of a great and sudden revolution,
of wliich the date cannot go back much further than five or six thousand
years." (Discours, pp. 139, 282.) "And allow me to observe," adds
Dr. Wiseman, " that Cuvier intimates, with sufficient clearness, that in his
researches he has not allowed himself to be swayed by any wish to vindi-
cate the Mosaic history." (lb., p. 352.)
* Dan. iv. — If not symbolic, wherefore the so expressly noted band to
the tree's stump of iron and brass ? The figure is somewhat otherwise
applied by Cowj^er to the wretchedness and ruined hopes of a prisoner :
" Like the visionary emblem seen
By him of Babylon, life stands a stump;
And fiUetted about ■with hoops of brass
Still lives, though all his pleasant boughs are gone."
t Jer. 50 : 17. " Israel is a scattered sheep; the lions have driven him
away : first the King of Assyria hath devoured him; last this Nebuchad-
nezzar, King of Babylon, hath broken his bones."
IN THE PROPUETIC CALENDAR. 117
and ancient Christian authors),* but yet more the Assyrian
character of Daniers symbol of the whigcd lion, f designa-
tive of the first of the four great empires, that is, the Baby-
lonish, it seems to me that the earlier Assyrian reference
and date are admissible. J
* So e. g. Tticitiii!, Hist. V. 8. — *' Dum jfssi/rios penes, Medosque et
Persas, oriens fuit/' Again, the Christijin expositor Thcodorct on Dan.
ii. sa3-s : " The licad of gold is not Nebuchadnezzar himself, but the
entire kingdom of the Jlssyrians or Babylonians."
/ t See Layard's engraving.
X Mr. Bickersteth and Mr. Birks have supposed another prophetic
synclironism with tlic epoch of consummation above specified to arise out
of the yiuivt,; i,vy. toud fii in Apoc. 10: 7; as if meaning, ".i year shall
not elapse ere the consummation." For they explain this as a prophetic
year, whether of 3(30 or 3Go natural years. Admitting which, the term-
ination of this period also will fall on our chronological line yet but a
little dist4ince further, and there mark the bounding limit, — the ne plus ul-
tra, if I maj' sti call it, of our present mundane chronology, — at A. D. 1877
or 1882. TheAngel's use of the word, however, /ooioc, not y.aiouc, seems
to nie fatal to it : this latter being the word always used in the Septuagint
and Apocalypse of the mystical periods of the time, times, and half a
time. See my Vol. ii., p. l'2o.
The want of the article is the point most in fovor of Mr. Birk's view :
but the passage is simply and satisfactorily explainable, as I liave shown,
otherwise. It is curious that on one occasion, according to his Table Talk,
Luther expressed an opinion that perhaps the world might last yet 300
j-ears more, before the consummation. But this, however, was contrary
alike to his earlier anticipations and latest aspirations. See Vol. ii., p.
132—130.
I cannot but suspect wc have a truer ne plus ultra in our Lord's cele-
brated saying, " Tliis generation shall not pass away till all be fulfilled,"
&c., Luke 21 : 32 ; — by supposing the saying to have a double reference :
1st, to the fulfilment of the judgments on Jerusalem, ere the generation
then alive should have past away; 2nd, to the final judgment of the con-
summation, Qra the generation should have wholly past away, //irt< icit-
nessed the sii/ns in the sun and moon, &c. (verse 23, &c.), which signs I
suppose to have begun at the French Revolution. See my Vol. iii., p. 301,
Note : also my paper in the Investigator, Vol. iv., p. 341.
It is to be oijserved that the word «' n,, this, in the clause 1, yti *« m'rj;,
needs not necessarily to be aspirated : as there were no aspirates in the
uncial cliaractcrs of tlie older MSS. And if without the aspirate, thcu
ai'ii; would mean //u(/, — "that generation shall not have passed awaj',
&c.;" with ivforence distinctly to the generation that was alive at the
time of the signs in the sun and moon, &c., appearing. But the view I
advocate Yith the other various evidence that has hcen
detailed before (and more might yet be added),* is it likely
that "\ve can be mistaken in so construing thcni ? Does
there not seem to be in them before our eyes that buddinc/
of the Jig-ti-ee vihich. our Lord spoke of ; f and respecting
Bhall have rolled away, in the prov)
when "the principles which animated society were the best
and noblest and soundest; "|| when the church, " like the all-
embracing vault of heaven," H with its pure faith sheltered
and shed kindly influence on all ; and the Papal power,
founded on and adapted for unity, after having grown up
towards the end of this era to unprecedented greatness,
used this great power only so as to preserve Christianity
from being lost in a multitude of sects : ** in all which he
thinks to mark the presence and operation of God's aiii-
* ii. 117.
t Ibitl. — So does Schlcgel iu one sentence adopt the throe Apocalyptic
images of a tempest and au inundation, wlicreby to sj'mbolize the great
Germanic irruption, and a new Christian firmament, in place of the old
Pagan political firmament. See Apoc. 6: 14; 7: 1, 2 ; 12 : 15; also
Vol. i. p. 2o8, anii Vol. iii. Note i, p. 56.
X Lecture xiii., p. 137. lie particularizes the reigns of Charlemagne,
Alfred, and tlie lirst Saxon kings and emperors of Oermanj', " as exhibit-
ing the paramount inllucuce of religion on public life, and constituting the
hrtpi)iest era, the truly golden period of our annals : " and he exemplifies,
among other things, in the earlier " spiritual chivalry of the Templars
and Kniglits of St. .lohn, consecrated to warfare in the cause of God,"
!in, he calls the earlier
middle age " thoroughly Christian." Gregory the Seventh, too (p. 14G),
is (lie special subject of his eulogy.
§ Ibid. 124, 125. II Ibid. 153.
IT Ibid. 115, 116. ** Lect. xiv., p. 183.
128 OUR PRESENT POSITION
mating Spirit, as well as kindlij providence.* — On the
other hand, he traces the contemporary operation of the Evil
Spirit (the ^'Spirit of iivie,'^ as he calls it) from after
the era of the overthrow of the Pagan Empire that it had
previously ruled in and animated,! — I say, he traces
the Evil Spirit's operation through the same period in a
beguiling sectarian spirit, and the religious schisms of
Christendom ; including not alone the Arian schism, and
the Mahommedan schism (for he places Mahommedanism in
the same category), J but also the iconoclastic proceedings
of certain of the Greek emperors (proceedings which he
lauds Gregory the Second for resisting), § and the conse-
quent schism between the Eastern and Western Churches.
In his sketch of the later Juilf of the middle age, reaching
from the l'2th century to the Reformation, he admits the
general religious deterioration of Western Christendom :
particularizing the essentially false scholastic philosophy
then in vogue, and the internal feuds, and contests between
Church and State : || and traces the kindly operation of the
Divine Spirit (•' the Paraclete promised to the Church by
its divine Founder"),^ whereby Christianity was preserved,
in the rise and institution of the ecclesiastical mendicant
orders, as men of the most perfect evangelical humility,
* Ibid. 184.
t " Christianity is tlie emancipation of the human race from the bond-
age of that inimical Spirit, who denies God ; and, as far as in him lies,
leads all created intelligences astray. Hence the Scripture styles him
' the Prince of this world : ' and so he was in fact, but in ancient his-
tory only ; when among all the nations of the earth, amid the pomp of
martial gloi'y, and splendor of Pagan life, he had establislied the throne
of his domination. Since this divine era in the history of man, . . he can
no longer be called the Prince of this world ; but the Spirit of time: "
that is, as regarding " temporal interests," above " the thoughts and faith
of eternity." Lect. xvi. ad fin. ii. 333.
t Ibid. p. 333.
§ " The rigid prohibition of the religious use of images was pi'oper in
those cases only where the use of them was not confined to a mere devo-
tional respect, but was likely to degenerate into a real adoration and idol-
atry ; and where a strict separation from Pagan nations, and their rites,
Wiis a matter of primary importance. . . But now that the Mahommedan
pro.scription of all holy emblems and images of devotion arose from a
decidedly antichristian spirit, . . this Byzantine furious war against im-
ages, and all symbols of piety, can be regarded only as a mad contagion of
the moral disease of the age." Ibid. lOG.
II Ibid. 173, 176, 333.
IT Ibid. 184.
IN THE PROPHETIC CALENDAR. 129
poverty, and self-denial : * at the same time reprobating
the doctrines of the then popular opposers of the church,
namely, the Waldenses, Albigenses, and also Wickliffe and
Huss after them, as fraught with the germs of heresy.f —
So arrived at the Reformation^ he speaks of it as mani-
fested to be a hiiinaii, not a divine reformation, — by its
claim of full freedom of faith. J its rejection of the tradi-
tions of the past,*§» its destruction of the dignity of the
priesthood, and endangering of the very foundations of
religion, through a denial of the holy sacramental mys-
teries, || its adoption finally of a faith of mere negation (so
he designates it), and severing of its Protestant constituents
from the sacred centre of faith and religion, that is, from
llome.U
Such is Schlegel's philosophic vicAV of the history of
Christendom down to the Reformation. After which he
notices the reli(jious indifferent ism of spirit, and false
illuminism of the seventeeinth and eighteenth centuries, —
* Lect. xiv., pp. 184, 186. t Ibid. 187.
X Lect. xviii., p. 334.
§ " The total rejection of the traditions of the p.ost (here was the capi-
tal vice and error of this revolution) rendoreil this evil [the unhappy ex-
isting confusion of doctrines] incurable ; and even for biblical learning,
the true Ivcy of interpretation, which sacred tradition alone can furnish,
was irretrievably lost," Lect. xv., p. 215. — So also at p. 228, iu a pas-
sage quoted Note IT below.
II "The hostility of the German Reformers to the church was of a
si)iritual nature. It was the religious dignity of the priesthood which
was more particularly the object of their destructive eftbrts. The priest-
hood sUvmls or falls with fiith in the sacred mysteries : " and (these hav-
ing been by the Protestant body^gencrally rejected) " it was not difficult
to foresee that, together with faith in them, respect for the clerg;^ must
sooner or later be destroyed." Moreover "that great mystery of
religion on which the whole dignity of the Christian priesthood depends,
forms the simple but very deep internal keystone of .all Christian doctrine :
and thus the rejection or even infringement of this dogma shakes the
foundations of religion, and le.ads to its total overthrow." Ibid. p. 218.
IT " Had it been," he says, p. 228, a " divine reformation, it would at
no time, and under no condition, have severed itself from the sacred
centre and venerable basis of Christian tradition ; in order, reckless of
all legitimate decisions, preceding sus well as actual, to perpetuate discord,
and seek in negation itself a new and peculiar basis for the edifice of
schismatic opinion."
He speaks with high approval, p. 222, of the institution of the Jesuits:
as a religious order wholly dependent on the cliurcli ; and so, and from
their opposition to Protestantism, as answering to ike yrcut want of the
age.
130 OUR PRESENT POSITION
ascribing them very much to the influence of the Protestant
principle,* — until the tremendous political outbreak of this
infidel illuminism in the French Kevolution. Then, after
a notice of the Revolution and its twenty-five years' war
"of irreligion," — "a convulsive crisis of the world which
has cx'eated a mighty chasm, and thrown up a wall of sepa-
ration between the present age and the eighteenth century, "f
— he speaks of the late progressing revival o^ Roman Catlto-
licis/n, as a revival oi' /■cli(/ioi/, more especially in the coun-
tries of France and Germany. And lie finally expresses
his hope of a true and complete regeneration of the age,
at no great distance of time (though not till after a total
temporary triumph of some antichristian spirit of evil |), as
the fit conclusion to the philosophy of history : *^ — its essence
to consist in a thorough Christianization alike of the state
and of science; || — liiforni to be somewhat like the per-
fecting of the noble but imperfect Christian Empire of
Charlemagne ; H — its introduction to be preceded by a dis-
play of fearful divine judgments,** and indeed attended by
Christ's own coming and intervention : ff — and, with this
*" Those negative and destructive principles, — those maxims of
liberalism and irreligion, wliicli were almost exclusively prevalent in
European literature during tlie eighteenth century; — in a word, Profexf-
antisiii, iu the comprehensive signification of that term." Lcct. xviii., p.
285. — So, too, p. 1^9-3; tliough he there allows that tlie English Protestant-
ism of philosophj' is to be distinguished from tlie French revolutionary
atheism. For tliat " though, by its opposition to all spiritual ideas, it is
of a negative character, yet most of its partisans contrive to malie some
sort of capitulation with divine faith, and to preserve a kind of belief in
moral feeling." So, too, p. 3o4. t ii-, 271.
t Lect. XV., Vol. ii. p. TJU.
§ Lect. xviii., p. 323.
II Ibid. 320, 322, 33G.
IT Tliis is spoken of at p. 320 as a magnificent ground-work for a truly
Christian structure of government, which then indeed remained un-
finished, but is to be the object of our hope for the future. See tlie next
Note.
** " This exalted religious hope, — this high historical expectation, —
must be coupled with great appreliension as to the full display of divine
juatice in the world. For how is such a religious regeneration possible,
until ever}- s])ocics, form, and denomination of political idolatry be . . en-
tirelj' extirpateil from the earth? " pp. 318, 311).
tt "As every human soul is conducted to the realms above by the gentle
hand of its divine guardian, so the Saviour himself has announced to all
mankind, in many prophetic passages, that when the period of the disso-
lution of the world sliall approach, he himself will return to the earth,
will renovate the face of all things, and bring them to a close." So ii., 20.
IN THE PROPHETIC CALENDAR. 131
divine reformation, and its accompanying complete victory
of truth, "that Jiiimaii reformation, which till now hath
existed, to sink to the ground, and disappear from the
world." *
Now turn we to the philosophy of the same history of
Christendom, as traced out to the evangelist iSt. John, in
the divinely pictured visions of the Apncahji>se : and oh !
how different is its jiurport ! — a difference based in foct on
a fundamentally different view from Schlegcls, alike as to
C7iris('s true rclifjion. and as to Christ's true rlnircli !
After a i-apid prefiguration in its six first picturings of the
chief eras and vicissitudes of the Roman Pagan empire,
thenceforward successively to occur (not without distinct
notice of its persecuting cruelty, and the Christian martyr's
fiiith and constancy), even until its total overthrow and dis-
solution before the power of Christianity, — there was then
next presented in the sealing vision a ]>rimary graphic
sketch of the Christian body, such as it would present itself
to the all-seeing eye of God's Spirit, and to the eye too of
him who Avas taught of the Spirit, after the great revolution
should have been completed, and a new and favoring politi-
cal heaven overshadow it. And what the nature and pur-
port of the sketch? That of tempests of judgment im-
pending; as if the Christian body so delivered, so exalted,
and so extended, was verging to a])Ostasy. such as to call
down those judgments : and, connectedly, that of an election
and sealing by Christ of so small a number out of the pro-
fessing church, or mystic Israel, as to confirm the imin-es-
sion that apostasy was seen to be beginning in Christen-
dom : — at the same time that the very significant figura-
tions of the prophetic sketch with reference to the sealed
— Propliccy shows, lie .-xilds, that luankiuil had " to traverse many cen-
turies, before the promise was to he fuHilled, the final and universal tri-
umph of Christianity throughout the earth to be accomplished, and all
mankind irU^ down even to the consummation. On the
one hand there was depicted the body of fdlse professors,
multiplied so as to form the main and dominant constituency
of apostate Christendom, as developing more and more a
religion not christian but antichristian, it ])eing ]):ised on
human traditions (the same that figure so high in Sehlcgel's
estimate), not on (jrod"s word : * and, after falling away to
the Avorship of departed saints and martyrs as mediators, in
place of Christ,! as alike in its ireslcrn and its eastern
division judicially visited and desolated by the divine aveng-
ing judgments of emblematic tempests, scorpion locusts, and
horsemen from the Euphrates; in other words, of the Goths,
Saracens, and Turks : J then as, in its wcstcni division,
rising up again from the primary desolating judgments of
Cothic invasion, in the new form of an ecclesiastical eni-
])ire (the same that Schlegel eulogizes as Christ's true
church), enthroned on the seven hills of ancient Rome:
its secret contriver being the very Dragon, or Satanic Spirit,
that had ruled ojienly before in the Pagan Empire ; its
ruling head proud, persecuting, blasphemous, and self-ex-
alting against God, even beyond his Pagan precursors ; §
its constituency and priesthood, throughout Schlogers
boasted middle ages, characterized by " unrcpented idola-
tries (such is God's representation of the Romish image
worship so strangely patronized by the German philoso-
pher), || and fornications too, thefts, murders, and sorceries :"1I
in fine, as continuing unchanged unchangeable in its apos-
t;\sy, notAvithstanding the repeated checks of woes and
judgments from heaven, even until the end ; and therefore
* Compare Apoc. 12 : 17.
t Apoc. 8 : 3. See Vol. i. pp. 307 — 318.
% Apoc. 8, 0. § Apoc. 12, 13.
II See the quotation from Schlegel about the iconoclastic Greek emperors
in note 5, p. 128, supra.
Mr. Sibthorp, it is said by Mr. Faber, went over to the Church of
Rome under the belief that it did not require idolatrous worship of the
Virijjin Mary ; and that he has left it and rejoined the Eng;Hsh Church,
on lindins that this was in very truth required of him. But did it need
that he should enter the Romish Church for evidence on such a point?
IT Apoc. 9 : 20, 21. See my chapter on it. Part iii. cb. 1.
12
134 OUR PRESENT POSITION
then at length in its impenitencj to be utterly abandoned
to jiulgracnt, and, like another Sodom, made an example of
the vengeance of everlasting fire : * this beiny in fact the
grand essential preli?7iinarj/ to the icoi'lds intended and
blessed rcfjoieratinn.
On the other hand, with regard to Christ'' s true churchy
tlie election of grace, consisting of such as should hold to
Christ as their head, and keep the "word of God and testi-
mony of Jesus, the Apocalyptic prophecy represented them
as almost at once entering on a great and long tribulation ;
yet though in number fewer and fewer, and reduced soon to
a state spiritually destitute and desolate, like that of the
wilderness, so as to constitute them a church invisible rather
than visible, as still secretly preserved by their Lord.f A
revelation of God's doctrines of grace (doctrines directly
antagonistic to those of the incipient apostasy) being it
seemed vouchsafed, the result of a direct ;7r//?/«/-y interven-
tion from heaven at this crisis of time, with a view to their
spiritual preservation and life ; which revelation, singularly
acted out before St. John in the light-bearing visions of the
sealing and the palm-bearers, just befoi*e the burst of the
emblematic tempests, was in Augustine's history and teach-
ing, teaching never altogether forgotten afterwards, per-
fectly realized and illustrated. ij: It then depicted the ac-
tual loitnesses for Christ^ s canse and truth, from out of
this little body, and protestors against the reigning apostasy
(witnesses verified historically afterwards in the histoiy of
those whom Schlegel would make heretics, the Waldenscs
more especially, and Wicklif, and Huss, and their follow-
ers). § as made war on by Rome's revived empire, soon after
the completion of their testimony against the several chief
doctrines of its apostasy, and the Pope's full establishment
of his power, like as by a beast from the abyss of hell ; and
so being at length conquered, and apparently exterminated :
with the added figuration however of their sudden and most
extraordinary revival and exaltation almost instantly after,
*Apoc. 18.
t Apoc. 12. See my Vol. iii. pp. 58—63.
X See the 4th section of my chapter on the Sealing Vision ; Vol. i. pp.
277—297.
§ See my Part iii. chap. 7.
IN THE PROPHETIC CALENDAR. 135
in the presence of their enemies ;* a revelation from heaven
introducing and accompanying it yet more glorious than the
former one, even of Clirist as the Sun of Rigliteousness :f
and a great political revolution attending, or following,
under which the tenth part of the ten-kingdomed ecclesiasti-
cal empire would fall. All this the prophecy figured as the
result of God's second great intervention for his church ;
and all this we saw, on irrefragable evidence, to have been
fulfilled in the great RrfDrnutlion of the IGth century.
The discovery introducing it of the doctrine of justification
simply by faith in Christ Jesus ; and the downfall following
it of the tenth part of the Popedom in Papal England.
Thus was this Protestant Reformation distinctly figured in
the Apocalypse as a glorious divine act. not human, so as
Schlegel would have it : its excommunication of the Ro-
man Papal church, with all its false rites and traditions
(by Schlegel so fondly cherished), and its national estab-
lishment too in Northern Germany, England, and elsewhere,
being further depicted as acts directed from heaven :J and
its fiiith, instead of being (so as he would call it) a mere
negation, represented to have its very origin in the positive
recognition of Christ as the Sun of Righteousness, and only
source of man's justification, light, and life. As to the
subsequent " indiffcrcntisni in rclirjion^'' as Schlegel truly
designates it, which followed afterwards in the seventeenth
and eighteenth centuries, even in the states and churches
of Protestantism, it was not unforcshown in the further devel-
opments of the Apocalypse. But what the cause assigned?
Recause, amidst all the rejoicings of states and cliurches on
the establishment of a purer religion, it would still be but
the 144,000, the election of grace, a church icithin a
church, that would really understand and appreciate the
essential princi[)le of that "new song" of the Reformation;
still that alone which would be really the xm^/k-//^ ikkIijitiu,
the Lord's church. § Yet it seemed also preintimated how
(as if from some gracious revival of religion in God's still
favored Protestantism) there would afterwards speed forth in
* Apoc. 11:7; Part iii. chap. 8.
t Apoc. 10 : 1, Vol. ii. pp. W—U, and 01—07.
i Apoc. 11 : 2. See Vol. ii. pp. 179—193.
§ Apoc. 14 : 1. Sec P.art iv. Chap. 10 ; Vol. iii. p. 289, &c.
136 OUR PRESENT POSITION
the latter times three missionary angels, flying through mid-
heaven, with voices of faithful Gospel-preaching tiiroughout
the length and breadtli of the world, of Avarning against
Papal Rome, and denunciation of jts quickly-coming judg-
ment :* (a contemporary energetic revival, and going forth
of the spirit of Poj)cry,-f conjunctively with otlier kindred
and allied spirits of Par/an-Uke hijidel'dy and pseudo-
Christian priestcraft^ being but the last putting forth of
its bravery, to hasten the final ci-isis, and constitute the
precursive and justification of its fall :) acts these that
would be nearly the last public ones promoted, or mingled
in, by the little body of Chrst's faithful ones on earth.
For it was foreshown how that Christ's advent would speed-
ily follow ; and contemporarily therewith, and with tlie mys-
tic Babylon's destruction by fire, his witnessing saints and
all that fear him, small and great.J have the reward given
them of an entrance into the everlasting kingdom of their
Lord. And that so, and then (not before, or otherwise),
the promised regeneration of all things (the Christian's
great object of hope§) should have its accomplishment, in
Christ's OAvn reign with his saints ; and therewith, at length,
the true and only complete evangelization of the world.
Such is the Apocalyptic nioral philosophy of the history
of Christendom: such its contrast Avith Schlegel's-H Its
rule of faitJt not tradition, hnt the Bible, its church of
the promises that alone of true believers in Jesus ; and
God's glory in Christ the grand and final object ever set
forth in it. The review will well prepare us for applying
to ourselves, in conclusion, the moral lessons of the whole ;
* Apoc. 14 : 6, &c. See Vol. iii. p. 430—432, 443, &c.
t The same tiiat Sclilegel boasts of as tlio glorious characteristic of
these, our own days.
t Apoc. H : 18.
§ On this point Schlegel, in his fifth Lecture, beautifully contrasts the
religion of the ancient .Jews (to which Christianity has succeeded) with
that of all the other Asiatic nations. In the traditions of these latter, he
observes, regret was the prominent feeling expressed for what man had
lost; in the Hebrew religion, lio])e for tlie future. "The whole existence
of this peo])le turned on the ]nvot of hope ; and the keystone of its moral
life projected its shadows far into futurity." i. 183.
II To its philosophy in the figurations of hisloric fact, the reader's at-
tention was directed in the introductory chapter of my work, Vol. i. pp.
105 — 107 ; as also in the first section of my present chapter.
IN THE PROPHETIC CALENDAR. 137
as we look to the probabilities — the awful and the hopeful
probabilities — of the fast-coming future.
As a nation, then, does it not, while pointing out how
and wherefore England has been raised to its present great-
ness, namely, in order to its being the great bulwark and
promulgator througliout the world of a Protestant evangelic
faith,* — solemnly warn us also against being seduced by
any spirit of mistaken expediency, false liberalism, relig-
ious indiffercntism,! or, I may add. party faction, to seek
nationally to itlentify ourselves with the Papal antichristian
religion, or any further to foster its power, either at home,
or in the colonies? Surely of toleration and civil privi-
lege the utmost has been granted to our Roman Catholic
fellow-subjects, consistent (to say the least) with our char-
acter as a Protestant state. Let us beware lest, in the vain
hope of thoroughly conciliating the Romish priesthood in
our land, — a thing which history and reason, as well as
prophecy, have shown to be impossible, — we abandon our
distinctive Protestant character :J and therewith, in the
great coming crisis, forfeit the high protectorate, hitherto
granted us. of heaven. § Nor, let me add, if in that crisis
(as prophecy seems to intimate) the evangelization of the
heathen, or the evangelization and restoration of the Jews,
prove in the issue to be the occasion of the great Romish
(and perhaps, too, Mahommedan) powers uniting together in
some hostile and opposing confederacy, let it be forgotten
which is the Lord's side :|| lest here too we act as an ally,
* See Vol. ii. pp. 4oo, 450, 467, 4G8 ; and Vol. ill. Part v. Chap. 8.
t A year or two before tlie Act of Roman Catholic Emancipation, Mr.
Gaily Knight, in an influential and able Pamphlet, pointed to the case of
the then Dutch and Belgian kingdom in proof of the possible thorough
union of Protestants and Catholics under a Protestant Government. The
very next year the Protestant Government there was overthrown by a
united Romish and Democratic insurrection.
As to the Irish Roman Catholic Emancipation Act, who, even of its most
sanguine advocates, has not confessed to disappointment in the results?
t For example by " the great meixsure," as some have called it, of pay-
ing the Irish Roman Catholic Priesthood from the national funds.
Since the publication of my first edition, we have to regret that our
national Protestant character should have been further compromised by
the Maynooth endowment ; — however patriotic the motives of the miuii
try that originated it.
§ Let me refer on this head to the illustrative historic sketch prefixed
by Dr. Croly, to his treatise on the Apocalypse.
II Sec pp. 122, 123.
12*
138 OUR PRESENT POSITION
if not constituent, of Babylon ; and become nationally a
partaker of her sins, and nationally, in God's coming judg-
ment on the nations, a partaker also of her tremendous pun-
ishment.
Further, has it not a voice to us as a cJinrch? I speak
of the church established by God"s gracious Providence in
this kingdom. IMay Ave not, from that holy prophecy that
\ic have been considering, infer it to be its paramount duty,
wisdom, and even safety, to hold fast the pure and scriptu-
ral doctrine on which it was founded at the Reformation :
and to eschew and repudiate, not the principles of direct
Popery only, or even of the modern Tractarian-semi-
Popery (Avhich is but in truth that earlier form of the
great apostasy revivified, to which in due time, as we
have seen, and through Satanic artifice, Rome did but fur-
nish the fitting headship*) ; but also of every modification
of the same, which may seek to make religion a thing
ecclesiastical, rather than a thing personal and spiritual ;
and to interpose the church, with its priesthood and services
and sacraments, between the soul and Christ,* instead of
asserting it as their one grand prerogative and ofiice to
direct the soul to Christ ? Surely it is a strange misnomer
to call this system, as with laudatory title, Hi(/h Church,
and decry the opposite system by the vituperatively-intended
title of Low Church. The true loiv churclvmen seem to
me they who fiishion their heau ideal of an ecclesiastical
system simply or chiefly with reference to an earthly
church, and its human administration and administrators.
The true hifjh cliurchrncn seem' to be they, the church of
whose chief affections and thoughts is the Jerusalem above
— that which has for its head, Christ; its home, heaven;
and this, our earth, as but the scene of its preparatory
formation and trial ; a scene whereon its members, scattered
everywhere through the visible church, and known to God,
though often unknown to men, are by the common principle
of union with Christ their invisible head, united verily and
in truth with each other, and united with those too of the
same body that may have already passed into Paradise. f It
*Apocl3: 2.
t Compare Eph. 3: 15, — "our Lord Jesus Christ, from whom the
whole family in heaven and on earth is named."
IN THE TROPHETIC CALENDAR. 139
is this church which St. Paul's glowing eloquence set forth
to the Ephesian Christians, as the church, the bride which
Christ loved, and purchased, and purposes " to present to
himself glorious, without spot or wrinkle ;"'* to the Gala-
tians as " the Jerusalem that is above, which is the mother
of us all :'"f and to the Hebrews, as " the church of the first
born. J whose names arc written in heaven." This, that of
which, in the Apocalyptic visions, St. John beheld the for-
tunes figured, througliout all its successive generations mil-
itant on earth ; even until the time of their perfected union,
number, and blessedness, as the Lamb's bride. New Jerusa-
lem. § And so, accordingly, the earlier confessoi-f, that
witnessed for Christ under I'agan Rome, recognized her as
tlm rhurcli. the mother church, and rejoiced in her as chil-
dren. || And when stealthily afterwards the earthly mixed
*Epl.. 5:25—27. t Gal. 4 : 26.
% txxkiaia nnu'ToToxwy' Hcb. 12 : 23.
§Apoc. 7:3, 4, &c.; 14: 1, &c.; 17: 14; 20: 4; 21 : 2, 10-12; 22:
8, 4, &c.
V Let me exemplify, as I have not dii-ectly done so before :
1. fynalius, in the heading of his letter to the church at Ephesus,
(a very striking and illustrative document, of chronology immediately
following the Apostolic time), speaks of it ns predestinated by God before
the world to glory : thereby distinctly defining the true spiritual church
at Ephesus as the object of his address, though in charity, supposing all
to belong to it of the members of the professini; church there constituted;
2)rofessing as they did under circumstances of trial and persecution, so
calculated to prevent the adhesion of any but true disciples. lyiuriog, h
y.ai GioifuQoc, rf] tLXoj'>;i(«ii; tv utytdct &iov JJuTooi xai nkfi)uf/(/f)'Kti»;i', tv 7Ta6n aXrfiirot, tr &t/.};iiaTi jov TfaTQog xai
Jr^auv XfJiOTov rov Gtov i,utar, t>/ txxXi,ain tj; aitoftaxuntaxoi TJi ovan tv
E(ftnci).
2. Tlie Epistle which contains the ~^cls of Polycarp^s Martyrdom is
addrest by " the church of God which sojourns at Smyrna, to that which
sojourns at Philomclium, and in all places where the Holy Catholic
church sojourns throughout the world :" thereby indicating necessarily,
I think, that spiritual and true church, of whioli the members feel and
live as pilgrims here, and with their home in heaven.
3. Justin Martyr, Dial, cum Tryph. p. 287, speaks of the church as
Christ's bride, prophesied of in Psalm 45 : which church we know from
other Scriptures to be that symbolized as the heavenly Jerusalem ; made
up only of the true and the saved.
4. Similarly Tertullian, de Baptismo, 100 : 15, says ; " Et una ecclesia
in calis ;"* and in his De Cor. lOO : 13, — " Sed tu peregrinus es mundi
* On which observes his Rnniish Kditnr P.imelius : " et in terris videtur dcsidcrari.
Ktsi antem a;?, «(/)' 6v tTcirov ol ty Trvevfiartyiig uxoXovdovatjg niTQag'
y.ai tni nuauv ri]y xonxvr>]v nttnav oiyodofitiTai o iy.yi.t^aiuarixog nag ?.oYog,
y.ai ij x«t' uinof 7lo?.iT(ia' ev iy.aorco yuo Tov te/£iw>', affinXy]QovvTu)V Ttjv
ftuyainoTara ?.oy;58. Mark, too, the pi'omiuence of tJiia
point in the examinations of Lord Cohhum and others of the later JVic-
lijfite.s, before the Romish tribunals ; and the " Credo unam esse sanctara
catholicara Ecclesiam," perpetuated as Huss's motto on his medal, given
at vol. ii. p. 442 ; also Luther's public recognition of this doctrine of
IIuss, vol. iii. p. 284, Note § ; and the same in the examination of Philpot
and other Anglican reformers of the Itjth century.
t I bog to call the reader's careful attention to this point, as one that
seems to me most important. There are two principles on wiiich an inter-
preter may attempt the explanation of the various eulogistic phrases,
such as the elect, the faithful, &c., addrest by the apostles to the churches
they write to. The one is that wiiich explains them of mere ecclesiastical
election, and prof est faith ; and consequently applies them to all the mem-
bers of the professing church indiscriminatelj', tlic true alike, and the
false. Tlie other is that Avhich regards tlie phrases as properly belonging
only to tlie true members, that is, the constituency of the spiritual church :
and consequently applies the terms generally only in the spirit of charity ;
hoping, where there exists no plain evidence to the contrary, in the sin-
cerity of men's profession. I feel deeply persuaded that the latter is the
only one tliat can be consistently ami satisfactorily carried out.
So Lciijhton, on 1 I'ct. 1 : 2. " The Apostle denominates all the Chris-
tians to whom he writes by the condition of /rj/c Z)c/u'rers; calling them
elect !V\\t\ sanctifieil, &c. And St. Paul writes in the same style in his
Epistle to the churches. . . Not that all in these churches were such in-
deed : but because they professed to be such, and by that their profession
and calling .as Christians were obligeir own clinvch since the publication of my first
edition, renders the right view of this liimous text, Jolin 18 : 30, " My
kingdom is not of tllis world " (i, ^um'/.du j, fi/i; nvx fnrir tx rov y.anitov
iw lot), more important tlian ever. Hence a brief discussion of it m.ay
be not inappropriate, especially as one connected with, and supplemental
to, my notice of Christ's kingdom, p. 18U, in the chapter on the Millen-
nium.
And with a view to this, it seems essential that we consider it iu the
light not only of its immediate context, but .also of that larger context of
Scripture (alike of the Old and New Testament), in which .Mvsxiah^s
kiny.lom, ciMc^l also the lci'i(;(lom of God or kingdom, of heaven,* is a
perpetually recurring topic.
Now, the Old Testament prophecies, .alike those of David, t Isaiah, t
Daniel, and others, foreshadowed tliis kingdom as one that would appear
under two distinct phases ; a primary one of imjierfection and opposition,
a. final one of triumphant and universal establishment over all error and
all opposition. More especially, for e.Kamiile, in Daniel's famous first
prophecy there were figured distinctively tiie regnnni lapidis and tiie
reynnm montis :^ — the /jri»i(n\i/ humbler state of Messiah's kingdom,
as a stone cut out without hands (the divine temple's destined corner-
stone) ;l| and its ullima'e triumphant state, after shivering the world's
great ini.age to pieces, and as a mountain (the mountain of the Lord's
*Iii St. Matthew we fiiul it generally called tlic khif/dom of heaven, in St. Mark and
St. Luke the kingdom of Goti.
t K. p. Ps. 2, h. t E. ff. Isa. 53.
^ Uaii. 2 : 34, 35. I use Mede's well known Latin dcsignatives.
U Matt. 21 : 42 ; Luke 20 : 17. In what our Lord adds, as n.corded both by St. Mat-
tliew and St. Luke, "On whomsoever it shall fall ).ixin:aii uiror," we have, I think,
a very interesting connectini; link between Dcii};nti is not exactly rendered in
our translation, " it shall ijrind him to powder.^* It should rather be, " it shall reduce
148 OUK PHESENT POSITION
unless my solution of the vision of Apoc. 10, 11 can be re-
futed, that the establishment of the Anglican, as well as of
house,* I suppose), filling with its glory the whole earth. So too this
twofold state aud phase of Jesus Christ's kingdom was prominently set
forth by Christ himself aud his apostles in the New Testament. The first
was set forth as having commencement from after the King's presentation
of himself in human form on earth, z-ejection by the master-builders in
Israel, and consequent judicial suti'ering, though only as man's redemp-
tion-price from out of the kingdom of darkness, with free and open en-
trance thenceforth into his own kingdom of light and holiness ;t then
absenting himself from earth for a while, with a view to receive from his
Father investiture of the kingdom ;t and to prepare his people for it, as
well as it for his people.§ AVhich preparatory state of the kingdom is
described as including its pi'oclamation over the world ; appointed her-
alds II being chai-ged with invitation from the King to all to enter it
(with the foreseen result, however, of a promiscuous gathering of bad
and good, false as well as true) : as in the seed- scattering and net-throw-
ing of the parable :*X and as including also among its characteristics a
provision fur the meet spiritual education, support, and nourishment of
all its true members ; while still sojourners, far away from the King and
kingdom of their hearts, in a world under the dominion of their King's
and their own great enemy, the Evil One.** The second state and phase
described is that of its manifestation in heavenly power and majesty, so
as prefigured at the transfiguration ;tt and establishment on the ruins of
Antichrist's kingdom,:}::}: aud of each other dominion allied with the
Prince of darkness. It is this latter for which Christ bids us i^ray inces-
santly, " Thy kingdom come ! " And it is to be ushered iu by the King's
own visible return in glory ; the retinue of all his faithful saints and sub-
jects of every age rising to attend him, in reflected lustre like as of the
sun, and to the exclusion of each and every one of the insincere and
false. §§ Not, however, in their prior mortal state ; the kingdom being
that which even the saints themselves in flesh and blood cannot inherit. II II
But, with a view to their entrance on which, the new robing of incorrup-
tion is provided for them, and the world itself to be made a new world
whei-ein dwelleth righteousness. IT IT
Conformably with all this, the text under discussion, " My kingdom is
not of this world," is, I conceive, to be explained as spoken by Christ
to Pilate : 1st, with reference to the principle of its constilulioa ; as
neither having for its object the grandeurs, dignities, or secular suprem-
him to dust, like as of winnowed chaff from the tlireshing-floor." The similarity of
which to Dan. 2 : 35 is so evident and stnkin<< that 1 canimt think it unintended : "The
Btone smote the image upon his feet of iron aud clay ; and tlien was tlie iron, the clay,
the brass, the silver, and the gold broken to jiieoes together, anl there shall be the new heaven and new
earth, spoken of by Isaiah and St. Petcr.lT
Supposing which explanation of the text correct, it seems, although what
might be called a decidedly spiritual explanation, yet to involve no pre-
cept or argument against a national establishment of the orthodox faith.
For the rich and nobles and kings are no more excluded from the offer of a
part in Christ's kingdom than the ignoblcand the poor. And in case of their
accepting the otter, and becoming members of it, they are surely as much
bouml as any others to promote the interests of tlie kingdom, by such
legitimate means as God may have put within their power : including
especially, on the part of Christian kings, the provision of a gospel min-
istry and an evangelic worship, throughout the countries ruleiritiial death, in the case of the prod-
igal, implied that his resurrection would be spiritual, — so
the literal death, in the case of the martyrs of Jesus,
implies that their resurrection must be literal and personal
too.
But there is yet another difficulty in the way of our
accepting his interpretation. He says this resurrection
means the resurrection of the spirit, that is, fearlessness of
death — fixed constancy — and victory over persecution of
the martyrs. Tliis seems unnatural, if we suppose, as he
does, the previous existence of a ^Millennium of perfect hap-
piness and unsuspcnded peace. Ilow shall there be martyrs
during the Millennium, when there will be no munlcrcrs ?
How shall ^ny one manifest the spirit of a martyr, when there
can be none to manifest the spirit or conduct of murderers?
How shall any sufl'er pain, when there is no one to indict it?
We are forced to conclude that the resurrection of the mar-
tyrs signifies, not that persons will be raised up who should
have the spirit but not die the death of the martyrs, but
that it implies the literal resurrection from the dead of those
among others that died and sealed their testimony with their
own blood. But an objection to this interpretation of ours
is deduced from the words, " I saw the souls of them that
were beheaded ;" from which it is argued that, as souls are
s])oken of, it cannot mean persons ; but every reader of the
Bible cannot but know that the " soul " is frequently used to
describe the whole man. '• Soul, take thine ease," is an
instance of this ; and in the 6th chapter of this book, it is
said, '•'■ the souls of those that were beneath the altar cried,
How long? "
I therefore conclude that the first resurrection is the
166 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
literal resurrection of the just or saints, and of them alone,
to reign personally with Christ throughout the thousand
years that follow. That Christ's advent, at which this res-
urrection is to take place, is to be pre-millennial, I think is
evident, from Matthew 13, alone, where we read as follows,
at ver. 24 : " Another parable put he forth unto them,
saying, The kingdom of heaven is likened unto a man which
sowed good seed in his field : but while men slept, his enemy
came and sowed tares among the Avheat, and went his way.
But when the blade was sprung up, and brought forth fruit,
then appeared the tares also. The servants of the house-
holder came and said unto him, Sir, didst thou not sow
good seed in thy field? from whence then hath it tares? He
said unto them, An enemy hath done this. The servants
said unto him, Wilt thou then that we go and gather them
up? But he said, Nay, lest while ye gather up the tares
ye root up the wheat also : let both grow together until the
harvest : and in the time of harvest I Avill say to the reap-
ers. Gather ye together first the tares and bind them in bun-
dles to burn them," — the desolation of Antichrist and all
his followers. — " but gather the wheat into my barn." Now,
1 infer from this, that the wheat, or true believers, and the
tares, or apostate and unrigliteous, will grow together until
the end of this dispensation come ; the tares are to be first
consumed, as I showed you in a previous lecture, the wheat
is then gathered into happiness — that is, the saints are raised
from the dead, and reign with Christ a thousand years.
The next evidence of this I will give you is from 2 Thess.
2 : 4, where we have the description of the man of sin, " who
opposeth and exalteth himself above all that is called God,
or that is worshipped ; so that he, as God, sitteth in the
temple of God, showing that he is God. Remember ye not,
that when I was yet with you, I told you these things?
And now ye know what withholdeth that he might be re-
vealed in his time. For the mystery of iniquity doth
already work : only he who now letteth will let, until he be
taken out of the way. And then shall that Wicked be re-
vealed, whom the Lord shall consume with the Spirit of his
mouth" — the wasting of Rome first, — "and destroy with
the brightness of his {.-laQovma'^ personal appearance." What
does this passage prove ? That the great apostasy predicted
TUE ADVENT PRE-MILLENNIAL. 167
by St. Paul is to prevail during the whole period from
Christ's first to his second advent, and that this hoary
apostasy is to be consumed and utterly destroyed only by
tlie personal advent and appearance of the Son of God.
At that very period, the apostle speaks of "a gathering
together unto Him,'" -which he calls by the expression
(f.Kui') «;(.);*,), " a collection together unto" Christ of the
risen saints, when he comes to consume and destroy the
great Papal apostasy by the brightness of his coming.
Then, in Luke 14 : 14, our Lord speaks of " the resur-
rection of the just," as if that resurrection were totally dis-
tinct from the general resurrection, and to take place at
Christ's pre-millonnial appearance. Then, in Matt. 19,
"Verily I say unto you, that ye Avhich have followed me. in
the regeneration, when the Son of man shall sit in the
throne of his glory, ye also shall sit upon twelve thrones,
judging the twelve tribes of Israel." We read in the Acts
of the Apostles, of Christ remaining in heaven " till the
restitution of all things," or "till He restore all things : " we
read in Rom. 8, " that all creation is groaning and travail-
ing in pain, waiting for the manifestation of the sons of God."
And respecting tliis manifestation of the sons of God,
we read in its definition, " waiting for the adoption, that is,
the resurrection of the body." And you recollect the apos-
tle says, in Phil. 3, "if by any means I might attain unto
the resurrection of the dead." On this last passage I may
observe, there is no doubt all will be raised at the last, or
attain a resurrection. In this sense, no man need uisk to
attain the resurrection of the dead, l)ecause it is a matter of
certainty that all will attain it. The apostle, therefore,
evidently had bclbre his eyes i\\e first resurrection, and the
peculiar phraseology he employs on this occasion proves it
to be so — " if by any means I might attain (^ti)i' litndaiuaiv
iSv ve/gSt') the resurrection from among the dead;" just
that resurrection of which it is said, " Blessed and holy is
he that hath part in the first resurrection."*
I might quote more texts, but it would probably weary
3'ou, and, besides, time will not permit me to do so : I must
state briefly the conclusion I have come to.
*Scbolz's reading is still more marked T»,'f i%aya(iTaaiv ri,v tx rtxn,r,v,
the resurrection, the one from among the dead.
168 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
I believe, from these and other reasons, that very soon
Christ uill come upon the clouds of heaven ; and that, when
he comes, the dead in Christ shall hear the sound of the
trumpet, and shall rise and meet him in the air, and that
they shall reign with him — whatever may be the special
nature of that reign and its details — a thousand years; and
after that shall be the general resurrection of the dead, when
the rest shall rise and be judged, "according to the deeds
done in the body."
On no other view can I explain the language of Scrip-
ture : "As it was in the days of Noah, so shall also the
coming of the Son of man be. For, as in the days that
Avere before the flood, they were eating and drinking, marry-
ing and giving in marriage, until the day that Noah entered
into the ark, and knew not until the flood came and took
them all away ; so shall also the coming of the Son of man
be." How truly in keeping with this is our Lord's own
statement, " Behold, I come as a thief" ' Hear also what
St. Peter says, in 2 Pet. 3 : 3, 4, — "Knowing this first, that
there shall come in the last days scoffers, walking after their
own lusts, and saying, Where is the promise of his coming?
for since the fathers fell asleep, all things continue as they
were from the beginning of the creation. For this they
willingly are ignorant of, that by the word of God the heav-
ens were of old, and the earth standing out of the Avater
and in the water : whereby the world that then was, being
overflowed with water, perished. But the heavens and the
earth, which are now, by the same word are kept in store, re-
served unto fire against the day of judgment and perdition
of ungodly men." On which verse I may note, that the ex-
pression "reserved unto fire" is literally translated "stored
with" or "having a treasure" of fire; and this criticism
leads me to remind you of what I told you last Sunday
evening, that the discovery of modern c;eolon;ists is. that this
earth was once liquid, like liquid lava : that it is only cooled
down upon its outer crust, and that the interior of the globe
is still an ocean of liquid or molten fire — the earthquakes
we feel, the concussions of its rolling waves — the volcanoes,
the safety-valves for its escape ; and so the last discovery of
science casts its light upon the statement of Scripture, and
gives, in this instance, but the earnest of that day when all
THE ADVENT PRE-MILLENNIAL. 169
science and all literature shall combine to testify "God's
word is true." "But the day of the Lord uill come as a
thief in the night, in which the heavens shall pass away with
a great noise, and the elements shall melt with fervent
heat, the earth also, and the works that are therein, shall be
burned up." And when Christ comes, how startling shall
be the hour of the advent ! The dead tiiat fell asleep in
Jesus, and have slept many thousand years, shall hear, when
He comes, the approach of His footfall, and recognize the
sound of Plis voice, and shall rise and meet Him in the air.
The living that are in Christ shall hear His approach, too,
and recognize the tones of His voice, and shall rise and meet
Him and the risen and quickened dead in the air, and reign
with Him a thousand years. Abraham, and Noah, and Job,
f^hall hear His voice in their silent sepulchres, and join Him
in the air. Paul, and Peter, and John, and Luther, and
Wilbcrforce, and Simeon of Cambridge, and Venn, and
Williams, and Chalmers, shall obey His summons from their
sequestered and separate tombs, and gather around their
glorious Lord. One grave shall cleave in twain, and its
buried tenantry shall rise and meet the Lord ; and the other
grave, that looks equally green beside it, shall fail to be
pierced by that sound, or its dead dust to be moved. The
cemeteries of stone and the monuments of bronze shall rend,
and the dead saints that are there shall come forth — its
sleeping dust shall be quickened in every sepulchre ; and
tiie stones of cathedrals, and the vaults of churches, and the
green turf, and the marble mausoleum, shall alike explode,
and pour forth into the air their troops of awakened dead.
Nor less startling will be the scenes that occur amons: the
living ; some lamilics shall be met together speaking of the
things of this world ; in an instant, and without warning,
one shall hear a sound significant to his heart of glory, and
rise as upon the lightning's wing, and with its splendor, and
leave without a farewell the rest, that know not Christ, and
remain astonished behind. ! great day of sepai-ation of
families — of dislocation of households — of severance of
the dead — of removal of the living — of astonishment to
the Avorld — of glory to the Lord Jesus — of happiness to
the saints ! But, you ask, what shall become of those that
are left behind ? The earth, having given up the silent
170 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
dust of the saints that sleep beneath it, — and every living
saint that lives upon the earth having heard His voice, and
responded to its call, — then the fire that is treasured up,
as I explained to you, in the very centre of the earth, shall
burst forth at ten thousand crevices, — "the elements shall
melt as with fervent heat," — the solid rocks shall blaze as
if they "were wax, and the rivers as if they were oil : and
the weary old earth, having undergone the ordeal of the last
fire, shall regain its pristine purity, and become fit for the
immediate presence of the descending Saviour and His risen
saints. The earth shall be made new, its soil restored —
paradise regained. The deep-toned miserere of humanity,
that has risen for six thousand years, shall be lost in the
everlasting jubilee. There will be no tears, no sighs, no
crying, no storms shall disturb its calm ; there Avill be no
decay in its verdure, no serpent's trail amid its flowers, but
happiness and love, and joy and peace, for a thousand years,
in the presence of Christ and his saints.
Some say, will not this be an earthly heaven ? My dear
friends, earth is not essentially corrupt : there is nothing
sinful in the clods of the valley, nor inherently polluted in
a rose, or in a tree, or in a stone. I have seen spots upon
the earth so beautiful, that if no clouds of Avinter would
overtake them, nor the sin of man blast them, I could wish
to live amid them forever. Take sin from the earth — the
fever that incessantly disturbs it — the cold, freezing shadow
that creeps over it ; let my Lord and my Saviour plant his
throne upon the earth, and his hand Avave its consecration,
and make it the presence of Christ, and Avhere can there
exist a lovelier spot ? what fairer land can man desire to
live on ? Would it not be joy unspeakable and full of glory ?
To me it is heaven Avhere Christ is, whether He be throned
upon earth, or reigning amid the splendors of the sky ; if I
am Avith Him, and He Avith me, I must enjoy unsullied and
perpetual happiness.
I have thus, then, given you, not an elaborate exposition
of the tAventicth chapter, but a short, and. as I conceive to
be, a fair and honest outline of its predicted events. It
does not become me to attempt to play the prophet. We
are only fallible expositors of the Avord of God. I may
have formed Avrong conceptions of its symbols. I may, per-
THE ADVENT PRE-MILLENXIAL. 171
haps, have rashly intruded Avhere angels fear to tread. I
do not ask you to take my opinion because it seems to be
plausible, but to study that blessed book, on the very thresh-
old and vestibule of which are Avritten the inspired and
inviting uords, '• Blessed is he that readeth and understand-
eth the things that arc written in this book." If it be true
that the Jews are soon to be restored, — uithin, as I think, a
very few years;'' if it be true, as I have likewise indicated,
that twenty years more will introduce some of the last start-
ling phenomena to which I have alluded — for it is remark-
able that most propbetic interpreters take the nearest time
of the first resurrection to be A. D. 1804. and the remotest
time to be A. D. 1885; take the nearest or the remot-
est, I conclude that, between those bounding periods, the
dead saints w ho are in their graves shall hear the peal of the
resurrection trumpet, and the living saints that are on earth
shall hear it too. and their hearts shall leap for joy ; and
the dead in Christ, and they that are alive in Christ, shall
meet the Lord in the air, and reign with Ilim a thousand
years. Great and solemn crisis. I cannot but again exclaim !
One in a family shall be taken, and the other shall bo left;
the mother will be snatched up to the Lord, her son
will be left to perish in the flames ! The husband will be
left, and the wife will be taken. My dear friends, our sepa-
rations now are l)ut dim shadows of that last terrible one.
! fithcrs, mothers, sisters, brothers, in this assembly, if
you desire your ciicles upon earth to be happy, how should
you pray tliat you may be happy together throughout eter-
nity ! Mothers ! if you wish to meet your babes in glory,
teach them to love their Saviour now ! Sons and daugliters !
if you wish to see the gray hairs of your parents amid the
throng that surrounds the Lord Jesus pray for them now !
Sunday-school teachers ! if you Avould take those children
to heaven with you, and have them for the jewels in your
diadem, teach them to love and know their Saviour now !
Masters, you are responsible for your servants — servants,
for your masters — children, for your parents — parents,
for your children — each for his neighbor. Let each pray
and strive, and spend and be spent, that each may meet the
other where there shall be no separation, no pain, no sorrow,
but all shall be one forever with the Lord.
172 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
I ask you again, each individually, as before God. are
you a Christian ? My dear friends, here is your unhappy
misapprehension. When I bid you be religious, you fancy
I am urging you to take some nauseous and unpalatable
drug, necessary in order that you may be saved, but uhich
you would rather postpone to the very last moment. In
beseeching you to be Christians, I bid you be happy : in
inviting you to come to Christ, I invite you to be a partaker
of a joy and peace ■svhich you have never tasted before. In
l)idding yovi be holy, I bid you cease to be miserable, and learu
Avhat it is to be instantly and unspeakably happy. I ask you
are you the children of God ? Are you Christians indeed ?
Do not leave the question unsettled. It can be settled.
You need not leave it in uncertainty. The man whose heart
is changed, and he alone, has settled it. The man whose
trust is on the Rock of ages knows that he is so. Examine
yourselves. Judge ye. I speak as unto reasonable men.
"If any man be in Christ he is a new creature : old things
are passed away, behold all things are become new.''
" If any man belie veth not on him, the Avrath of God abid-
cth on him." God, grant that at that day, and that hour,
which I have attempted thus darkly to describe, we may be
found having our lamps burning and our loins girt, and
ready to obey the Saviour's voice, and to rise and reign with
Ilim in glory. He cometh with clouds, and every eye shall
sec Him.
" The Lord shall come, the earth shall quake,
The mountains to their centre shake,
And, -withering from the vault of night,
The stars shall pale their feeble light.
Can this be lie who wont to stray
A pilgrim on the world's highway.
Oppressed by power, .and mocked by pride,
The Nazarene ! Tlie Crucified ? —
While sinners in despair shall call,
Rocks, hide us ! — mountains, on us fall !
The saints, ascending from the tomb.
Shall joyful sing. The Lord is come."
THE SIGNS OF THE SECOND ADVENT. 173
THE SIGNS OF THE SECOND ADVENT.
" Behold, I come as a thief. Blessed is ho that watcheth, and kecpeth
his garuieuts, lest he walk naked, and they see his shame." — Rev. IG: 15.
I THINK I liave proved there can be no ]\Iillenniuni upon
earth nntil there Inirst upon it first a revelation of the liglit
of tlic Sun of Righteousness. I showed, I think, by te.xts
that are conclusive, that the IMillennium is to succeed, not
to precede, the Redeemer's second personal coming, and thus
to be the reiicction of the shining light of the manifested
Sun of Righteousness. I adduced the parable which describes
the present dispensation of the church as being a mixture
of the tares and tiie wheat together, and showed tiiat this
condition of the visible church is to remain till the great
harvest-man shall come to sever the tares from the wheat ;
to preserve the one, and to cast away and everlastingly con-
sume the other. I proved that the advent of Christ, from
the chronological views which we have endeavored to establish
in expounding the Apocalypse, must be very near ; and 1
showed you the nature of that advent, lie will come, like
the lightning, unexpected on a world that looks not for him.
"As it was in the days of Noah, so shall it be also in the
day when the Son of man cometh. They were eating and
drinking, marrying and giving in marriage, until the day
that Noah entered into the ark, and knew not until the
flood came and took them all away." And again, it is
written, " When the Son of man cometh, shall he find faith
on the earth ? " And again, " I come as a thief ;" denot-
ing the unexpected and sudden nature of his advent. Now,
putting a fair construction upon these passages, I cannot
come to the conclusion that there y\i\\ be first a thousand
years of millennial peace, and that at the close of this Mil-
lennium Christ shall come and sit upon his throne and
judge the world. On the contrary, I am driven to the con-
clusion, which I have endeavored already to express, that
the second advent of Christ is the great hope of the Chris-
tian church for the future ; and as the blessings of the
Gospel flow from faith in a personal Christ, so all the splen-
dors of the jMillennium day shall be reflected fi'om a present
personal Christ.
15*
174 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
I think I see throughout Scripture clearly enunciated
two resurrections. These tAvo are stated in the 20th chap-
ter of this book ; and that the literal meaning is the true, I
think will appear, if you notice a peculiarity in the language
of the Apocalypse, which I omitted to refer to, namely,
that invariably, after St. John had stated some great symbol,
he introduces a parenthetic explanation of it, which is of
necessity literal. Thus, when he sees seven candlesticks,
he appends the explanation of it; the seven candlesticks,
that is, the symbols, are seven churches. The statement,
they "are seven churches," is a literal explanation of the
symbol, " seven candlesticks;" so here, when he states that
those that had not the mark of the beast shall rise and
reign with Christ a thousand years, he adds the explanatory
remark, exactly parallel with those cases I have quoted,
"This is the first resurrection."' This last expression is
not a symbol to be further explained by some literal fulfil-
ment, but it is an historical or explanatory statement of a
symbol which literally describes the literal fact. But this
distinction in the resurrection of the dead is not at all pecu-
liar to the Apocalypse. I find the apostle Paul, as I have
stated, saying, " If by any means I might attain unto the
resurrection of the dead." Now, on looking at the English
translation, we do not precisely understand the hope of the
apostle ; for all will attain the resurrection of the dead ; the
just and the unjust must rise from the dead. Then, how could
this resurrection be an object of glorious hope to the apos-
tle, as distinct and separate from the hope of the rest of the
■world ? Every scholar, or rather every one that under-
stands the rudiments of the Greek tongue, has only to open
his Ne-\y Testament, and he will find the apostle's language
is peculiar and distinct. His words are not n^v drduTaait'
TO))' vfx.ps>', but ^■l]^' l^uiuuiauiv eyciSv I'fx-QSv — whicli mcans
literally, " if by any means I may attain to the resurrec-
tion," not rsv vi-y.g5iv "of the dead," but that marked, pe-
culiar, and well-known resurrection, that great one, "from
among the dead." It is the most expressive combination
of words to describe the first resurrection ; and shows that
the apostle understood that there was a resurrection pecu-
liar to the people of God, and distinct from the resurrection
of the unjust. Our Lord also speaks of this first resurrection,
THE SIGNS OF THE SECOND ADVENT. 175
in language that plainly implies its distinction from the last,
or second. In Luke 20 : 35, the very same expression,
T7|5 dtdirTitunui ri",s £x. jair vfy.(^cbi' " that resurrcction. that
one from among, or of the number of, the dead." Thus it
seems to me that John refers to this resurrection as one
•well known and universally admitted, as if he said, " This
hope Avhich Paul cherished in his trials — this ^\•hicil is the
subject of the Saviours promise — tliis which is the hope
and ardent expectation of iiis saints; this is not a strange,
a figurative, or symbolic hope, but a substantial and a real
one" — " this is that resurrection, that great one, from
among the dead."
I have showed you what will take place at that resurrec-
tion, when Christ shall come, " wlio is the resurrection and
the life." The moment that the cloud shall waft him on its
winjis from the tiirone on which he now sits, and brinir him
within the range and the attraction of the orb on which we
now stand, that instant every grave that has a saint beneath
it, though the ocean's pressure or the Alpine hills and ava-
lanches be upon it, shall split asunder, and its awakened
dead shall come forth; and every grave that contains the dust
of an unrenewed and unconverted man, — let it be covered
with a beautiful tablet, or inscribed with holy epitaph, — let
it be a cathedral vault, or marble mausoleum, — be it what
it may, the summons will be unheard, and the dead dust
that is there will lie as still and as quiet as the dead in the
church-yard were you or I to say to them "Come forth."
You will see emerge from one grave a cloud of saints that
have heard the sound of their Saviour's voice in its inmost
caverns, and rise to reign with Christ a thousand years;
and you will see the graves of the dead who are not in
Christ remain still and motionless as if the wind only swept
over them. But tiie living, — what is to be their case ?
"The dead in Christ shall rise first," says the apostle; "then
we, which are alive and remain, shall be caught up to meet
the Lord in the air." What a sublime spectacle that will
be ! ^Yhat awful and startling severances ! I look into
that home. One rises, as he hears a mysterious bidding,
and ascends under a mysterious attraction, and meets the
Lord in the air. The mother is taken, the daughter is
left ; or two rise, and the rest remain. Suppose that the
hour that is rushing by were this evening the close of this
176 LECTURES OF DS- GUMMING.
dispensation. Suppose that dread sound were to reverberate
tlirough Exeter Hall, — what would follow ? Men and
brethren, what spectacle shall we anticipate? Where and
what shall we be ? Shall I say a thousand or two thousand
will rise, as on eagles' wings, and unmoved thousands remain
behind ? God knows. Now be at peace with God. Now
lay doAvn the weapons of rebellion. If one soul shall be
found that day unawakened, in his stirring home, or in
his silent grave, by that royal sound, that soul will have
for his portion the worm that never dies, and the fire that
is never quenched ; and feel he will forever what he will
utter in his endless agony, " I did it all myself: I neglected
the Gospel, and perished in my sins ; I loved the world more
than I loved my Lord, and all this ill is the result of my
own doing, and of nothino; else."
Such, then, shall be the awful severance that will take
place Avhen Christ shall come. They that sleep in Christ
shall rise, and only they; and they that are alive and live
in Christ, and only they, shall join them ; and the dead
whose souls are not united to the Saviour, resting in their
graves, shall remain. The living, whose hearts are not
renewed by the Holy Ghost, and with the Saviour, shall
remain also. The instant that this earth has been thus
consigned to be the habitation of the dead in soul, and the
dead in body, the fire, which I told you geologists have
admitted, and which the Scripture confirms, to be a large
ocean of restless and of liquid lava, that rolls and heaves in
the innermost recesses of the earth, of which our volcanoes
are but the safety-valves, and our earthquakes as the rever-
berations of its ceaseless Avaves lashing its desolate and
dreary shores, shall burst forth at a thousand orifices ; the
gases that compose our atmosphere shall ignite, and "the
heaven and the earth," meaning this visible economy around
us, " shall melt," in the language of the apostle, " as if with
fervent heat : " Christ's people in the air — the people that
are not Christ's on the earth — the living punished on it —
the dead buried beneath it.
Such is the solemn finale ; and when this has taken
place, this purified earth shall be the residence of the saints
of God. Indeed, the impression has struck me that the
twenty-first and twenty-second chapters of the Apocalypse,
THE SIGNS OF THE SECOND ADVENT. 177
— on -which I cannot enter in this hall, but some of the
points of which I shall have occasion to allude to in a sec-
ond series. — it strikes me that those two chapters contain a
description, not of the church in everlasting glory, but of
the church upon this very world. I do not advocate a car-
nal or a sensuous heaven : a iioly and happy earth is not
carnal. There is nothing sinful in a stone. There is
nothing naturally tainted and impure in the grass that grows,
or in tlie trees that bloom, or in the waters in the ocean, or
in the streams, or in the rivers that flow toward the l)oundless
main. It may be restored and purified by fire, consecrated
by the descending footsteps of our descended God — the earth
may be made the vestibule of glory, the twilight of a day
in whose splendors we shall live and glow forever.
After this resurrection has taken place, the Millennium
will begin ; for a thousand years Satan will be chained ; all
the powers — the Satanic powers — that have tempted man-
kind will be repressed during the lapse of a thousand years,
and tlie earth shall be the holy platform, the consecrated
temple — the altar-ground on which congregated saints, in
their resurrection bodies, free from all sin, shall worship and
adore the Lord. Every flower that decks the earth shall
reflect the splendor, and send up as incense the fragrance,
of the Sun of Righteousness ; every sound in creation —
the clnme of Avaves, the breath of winds, the hum of bees,
the song of birds, the lowing of cattle — shall lose the minor
sound that now runs through them all. and, with Christ for
their key-note, shall be woven into the harmony of a happy
universe ; every mind shall be light, every heart love, and
every tongue shall be praise.
Such is the Millennium, as it is described in Scripture ;
but one difficult point remains. It may be my own delu-
sion, but it docs strike me that I have found the explanation
of a universally perplexing point — a confes.sed difficulty :
if there is to be a Millennium of a thousand years with
Christ and his own people, in the midst of the earth, how is
it that when Satan shall be loosed, that there shall be found
a people in the four corners of the earth called Gog and
Magog, Avho shall be gathered together in battle, and war
against the saints of God in the resurrection body ? Now,
I admit there is great difficulty about this; but observe.
178 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
the difficulty that occurs to the mind and theory of a pre-
millennialist is not greater than tlie difficulty that occurs to
the tlieory and exposition of a post-niillennialist. I will give
what I think the probable solution of an admitted and pei-plex-
ing difficulty. Do you perceive that it is here stated, that
■when the dead in Christ have risen and ascended to the Lord,
the rest of the de;id lived not till the thousand years were fin-
ished? I suppose, then, that " the rest of the dead," that is,
the unconverted, are raised from their graves just at the mo-
ment that the thousand years are completely closed: and that
" the rest of the dead," raised in their bodies, are those ene-
mies who make Avar with the saints in their resurrection
bodies. The unjust shall arise as well as the just ; the one
shall have their bodies restored as well as the other ; the im-
primatur of etei'nity stamped upon the one — the imprimatur
of eternity stamped upon the other ; the one an eternal
capacity of woe — the other, of bliss. I suppose — and I
believe it is the true solution of the difficulty — that the ene-
mies that come from the four corners of the earth are just
" the rest of the dead," raised at the close of the Millennium,
and then, and there, with all their vices unextirpated, their
natures unregenerated, their hearts in the gall of bitterness,
they shall be headed by the archangel's energy, and the arch-
fiend's hate, and shall make one last, dying, and desperate
attack upon the saints of God that dwell in the New Jeru-
salem, and who there magnify and worship the Lamb. Now,
the cause of the difficulty has generally been, that at the
eleventh verse of chapter twentieth it is stated, "I saw a
great white throne, and him that sat on it, from -whose face
the earth and the heaven fled away; and there was found no
place for them. And I saw the dead, small and great, stand
before God : and the books were opened : and another book
Avas opened, which is the book of life : and the dead were
judged out of those things that were written in the books,
according to their works." I think this will confirm my
exposition. It is not said, Avhen the statement is given
about the great white throne, that the rest of the dead then
rose. It is remarkable that in the commencement of the
chapter it is said, "the rest of the dead lived not till the
thousand years Avere finished ; " and Avhen the great white
throne is set, it is not said that the rest of the dead Avere
THE SIGNS OF THE SECOND ADVENT. 179
summoned from their graves ; but it presupposes that they
had ah-cady arisen, and perhaps impHes an interval, during
which interval they make their last attack. It is stated that
all liad risen at the end of the thousand years, and they
stood before the great white throne, to receive judgment
according to the deeds done in the body ; " and as many of
them as were not found written in the Lamb's book of life,
were cast into the lake that burneth with fire and brim-
stone.''
It is thus, then, that I attempt the solution of a difficulty
so perplexing. I only ask you to study it. If you sec
reasons for rejecting this view, do so. If you see the con-
firmation of it, you should be thankful that you find the
solution of a difficulty that has perplexed almost every com-
mentator on the Apocalypse, and which I submit as a
thought that has occurred to my own mind, as probably
the true and just solution of a great and acknowledged diffi-
culty.
jS'ow, having gone thus far in stating the nature of the
[Millennium, I know that many ({ucstions will be asked, such
as have been asked before, to which no answers are given in
Scripture, and to which I profess to be able and willing to
give none. If it be asked, "What shall be the nature of
the personal manifestation of the Lord of glory ? — shall we
sec the traces of the nails in his hands ? — shall we sec the
mark of the crown of thorns about his brow? — where will
he be throned ? — in what portion of the earth will he be
seen? — how will he talk or walk in the midst of us?" — to
such questions Scripture has given no answer ; and where
God's word is silent, it is not for me to speak. Again, the
question will be asked, "What will be the nature of the
resurrection body of the saints ? — what will be its employ-
ments, its physical characteristics?" To these, and a
thousand kindred questions, the Bible gives no reply, and I
attempt to give none. I look for no sensuous jNIillennium
— no Pagan Elysium. On the contrary, I would not have
a Millennium without Christ, but rather Christ without a
^iillonnium. The believer's safety is in Christ; the believ-
er's heaven is in Christ; and wherever Christ is, — in the
firmament above, or in the earth below, it matters not, —
there I desire to be, and there perfect happiness will be.
180 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
But I believe this high happiness will be realized upon earth,
— restored and regenerated earth. "We shall enjoy a
felicity, and a glory, and a peace, on this orb, in its resur-
rection state, which poet's imagination never dreamed of,
and which painter's pencil would attempt in vain to embody.
I believe that the groans of this wearied world shall close ;
that the cry of sorrow that has risen perpetually from its
inhabitants shall be stilled forever ; that it shall cease to
be an aceldama of the living, or a charnel-house of the
dead. I believe that the simoom shall no more sweep its
soil, nor the earthquake upheave it, nor the lightning's flash
rend its trees any more. This earth shall put off its ashen
garments, and doff its raiment of sackcloth. All creation
shall cast aside from its eyes the dark shroud of sorrow that
has dimmed them, and we shall see, amid the glorious Apoc-
alypse, the sun that shall rise to set no more. '• Come,
Lord Jesus, — even so, come quickly ! " I believe that our
poets shall lay aside their mourning garments, and put on
their priestly robes ; and philosophy shall be the handmaid
ministering at the altar of the Gospel ; and all literature,
and all science, and all knowledge, shall become instinct
with glorious inspiration, and shall blend their voices in
deep-toned and perpetual harmony, ' ' Blessing, and glory,
and honor, and thanksgiving unto God, and to the Lamb
who was slain, for ever and ever."
But I dwell too much on scenes on which imajiina-
tion would love to expatiate — scenes, nevertheless, which,
if before our eyes more continually, would make all that is
in the world grow very pale and dim. A man that can
anticipate a crown in glory, would see fainter charms in a
crown on earth. That man who has not an acre below, but
who has an inheritance incorruptible in reversion, would
have less desire for the lands and houses of this world.
Just as the sun, shining on the brightest fire, puts that fire
out, so a handful of the beams that come from the central
sun of that millennial morn would extinguish all that
dazzles men's eyes, and captivates men's minds, and rivets
man as a slave and a drudge to a miserable and a dying
world.
But I pass on to notice the signs of his advent. I will
quote first a very few texts which allude to it. His advent
THE SIGNS OF THE SECOND ADVENT. 181
is attended with "times of refreshing from the presence of
the Lord," and ^vith "the time of the restitution of all
things." The appearing of Christ is called "the Revela-
tion of Christ; " "looking for that blessed hope, the glori-
ous appearing of our groat God and Saviour." In Matt.
24: 80, it is written, "And they shall see the Son of man
coming in the clouds of heaven with power and great glory."
In 2 Thcss. 1 : 7, 8. we read, " AVhen the Lord Jesus shall
be revealed from heaven with his mighty angels, in flaming
fire, taking vengeance on them that know not God." In
Acts 1 : 11, it is declared, " This same Jesus, who is taken
up from you into heaven, shall so come in like manner as
ye have seen him go into heaven." In INIark 13: 35,
" Watch ye, tiicrefore ; for 3^0 know not when the master of
the house comcth, — at even, or at midnglit, or at cock-
crowing, or in the morning : lest, coming suddenly, he find
you sleeping." In 1 Thess. 5: 2, "The day of the Lord
cometh as a thief in the night;" that is, unexpectedly, sud-
denly. Matt. 21: 27, " For as the lightning cometh out
of the cast, and shineth even unto the west," — the light-
ning gives no premonition of its approach, — "so shall also
tlie coming of the Son of man be." And what shall take
place when he comes? " In that day the heavens shall pass
away with a great noise, and the elements shall melt with
fervent heat. The earth, also, and the works that are there-
in, shall be burned up." In 1 Thess. 4: 16, 17, "The
Lord himself shall descend from heaven with a shout, with
the voice of the archangel, and with the trump of God, and
the dead in Christ shall rise first : then we which are alive
and remain shall be caught up together with them in the
clouds, to meet the Lord in the air ; and so shall we ever be
with the Lord." Can there be plainer language than that
of Isaiah 24: 23? — "The Lord of hosts shall reign in
]\Iount Zion, and in Jerusalem, and before his ancients glo-
riously." Dan. 7 : 14, "And there was given him domin-
ion, and glory, and a kingdom, that all people, nations, and
languages, should serve him. His dominion is an everlast-
ing dominion, which shall not pass away; and his kingdom
that which shall not be destroyed."
Then Ave read what is the character of the saints in refer-
ence to it — " waiting for that blessed hope ; " " waiting for
16
182 LECTURES OF DIl. GUMMING.
the coming of the Lord." The Lord Jesus promises that
we shall reign with him; that we "shall appear with him
in glory." No sooner had Jesus left the earth at the ascen-
sion, than the cry was instantly raised, " Come, Lord Jesus."
The bride is not satisfied with the home and the fortune ;
it is for the bridegroom that she longs. No earthly substi-
tute can satisfy the church. He only can who is her Lord.
A paradise without ihe tree of life Avould have no attraction.
The Millennium without Christ — a Millennium of glory
and beauty without Christ — would have no charms for a
Christian. It would be like a tune without a key-note ; it
would be tangled harmony ; it would be worse — it would
be intolerable discord. It is a personal Christ on which the
believer trusts below. It is for a personal Christ that the
believer looks. Faith rests not upon a dogma, even justi-
fication by faith : it rests upon a living, personal Christ —
the Lord our Highteousness. Hope expects not a mere
Millennium ; it expects the Lord of the Millennium. The
disciple who wrote the Apocalypse, and who leaned upon
the Saviour's bosom (and he was neither sensual nor carnal),
the instant that the Saviour said, "Behold, I come quick-
ly," added the deep-toned Amen, which rose from the very
depth of his soul, "Even so, come. Lord Jesus, come
quickly." The night cometh first, and then the morn. I
see the shadows of a dark night already forecast upon the
world. I see dark and ominous shadows creeping, like
birds of night, from every point of the horizon, all giving
tokens of an approaching storm that will rend and split
Europe into fragments. We may very speedily have to
witness men's souls looking with fear for the things that are
coming upon the earth ; and thinking men, like Arnold and
others, who did not study prophecy, but who looked at facts,
phenomena, and science, felt their hearts, as I shall show
by a quotation, by and by, fainting because of what they
saw coming upon the world. But the darkest night has its
morn. The cloud that is blackest has a rainbow gilding
it. That night shall pass away before the rise of a glorious
sun ; and the instant that sun rises on a benighted world,
the morn of the millennial day shall overspread the earth
with a new and glorious aurora — a zone of bright splendor
' — an atmosphere of beauty unparalleled.
THE SIGNS OF THE SECOND ADVENT. 183
Let me notice, however, some of the
CLEAR SIGNS WHICH INDICATE THE APPKOACH OF
THAT PERIOD.
I described, in the course of a recent lecture, the unclean
spirits that go out to deceive the nations of the earth under the
si.xth vial; and I showed you, by incontestable proofs, that
those unclean spirits are at work ni the midst of our people.
The first, I showed you, was Infidelity, the spirit of the drag-
on. I told you tliat it consisted not simply in antagonism to
Christianit}'; but that it consisted, likewise, in the absence
of Christianity. I believe that one half of the professors
of the Gospel are nothing better than practical infidels. My
dear friends, if our hearts had God's light and love in them,
the very statement of the Gospel would persuade us to em-
brace it. I need no evidence of the corruption, the desper-
ate corruption, of man's nature, but just this, that he can
hear truths that electrify the redeemed in glory, for one
sound of which the lost in hell would give a thousand
worlds, and he has no sooner heard them, than he goes
forth, one to his farm, and another to his field, and another
to his merchandise, and lives retaining all iiis responsibility,
— for of that he cannot divest himself, — but without one
portion of holiness, or loyalty, or prospect of peace. We
are told that tlie last age will be characterized by selfishness;
and this is a predominant characteristic of the present state
of our world. Let any man take his station on any of our
great thoroughfares, as, for instance, near St. Paul's, and let
him look along the living mass that pours down Cheapside ;
it seems as if every man were so absorbed in himself, that
if the man who runs before him were to fall, he Avould just
make him a stepping-stone from which he would take a
greater leap, that he might the sooner reach the E.xchange.
So truly selfish does human nature show itself — so selfish
has human nature become ! What do you do for the cause
of Christ? What do you give ? You give, perhaps, some
£10 a year for wine and spirits, both probably useless.
You give for other luxuries and gratifications of sense other
£10 a year. How much do you give to the cause of Christ ?
— a guinea a year, and you think you have thus acquitted
yourself of all responsibility before God. What a contrast
are wo to those in that day " who rejoiced that they were
184 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
counted worthy to suffer for his name's sake," and gave up
riches and home, and all that they had, as the choicest gifts
they could lay upon the altar of their Lord ! Hear Avhat men
shall be, and let the people of London sit for the contrast.
Hear the inspired sketch, look to the living men, and see if
there be not a perfect coincidence. In the last days men
shall be, first, "lovers of their own selves;" secondly,
"covetous;" thirdly, "boasters;" fourthly, "proud;"
fifthly, " blasphemers; " sixthly, " disobedient to parents; "
that beautiful, that musical sound, father, is being banished
from England's homes, and that horrible importation from
France, "our governor," is being substituted in its place.
Men shall be "unthankful;" what evidence of this in our
churches, in our Exchange, in the streets of our city !
"unholy, without natural affection."
An awful and terrible characteristic of those days is, the
increase and spread of Popery. If I look around me, I
see on every side Popery pluming its wings ; and that great
religious maniac, for that is his true name, who has reigned
at Kome for eighteen centuries, whose lunacy and madness
the apostle foresaw when he says, " the mystery of iniquity
doth already work," putting forth new and too successful
efforts. His madness once rose to such a height that the
kings and sovereigns of the earth conspired together to drag
him from his throne for the sake of their own safety. Eng-
land had felt him to l)e so intolerable a curse, that she raised
walls high and thick between herself and all contact and
communion with him. This maniac has now made honest
Englishmen believe that he is a liberal Pontiff; that he is
anxious for liberty and freedom, and all good things ; but
you may depend upon it, it is but the cunning of the maniac,
seeking to find scope for the development of his terrible
passions. See whether I am a prophet of truth or a prophet
of error when I state that that power, so unsuspected by
the generous, and open, and unsuspecting hearts of Britons,
will yet obtain a grasp of our country, if we court him, so
terrible, that the throne and the altar will rock and real be-
neath it ; and you will mourn the day when you despised
the predictions of the prophet, and trusted to the conclu-
sions of the "march of intellect," or the philosophers and
savans of the day.
THE SIGNS OF THE SECOND ADVENT. 185
I need not give you proofs of the spread of that terrible
system. I can only say that its basilisk eye is riveted on
all that is dear and precious to us. Tractarianism is just
the smoke that arises from it, and conceals from the eyes of
the masses the unclean locusts of the spiritual Egypt. I
believe that these Tractarians are just the backwoodsmen
of Popery — its pioneers, making room for it — caterers to
the Pope ; some of them his acknowledged servants. And
there is no class or description of his janissaries on whom
Pope Pius IX. looks with more consummate complacency
than on those who sign nobly Protestant articles, and at the
same time preach thoroughly Popish doctrine ; who take
bread left for Protestant ends, and cat it, while they propa-
gate the very errors against which they have sworn solemnly
to protest.
I see, then, in the spread of Popery, and in the spread
of that which I have called Popery without a Pope, the
evidence that we are at the close of the sixth vial, or pass-
ing from under it to the seventh, and that the Lord is at
hand. I may mention another characteristic of these latter
times here — and I wish to state it without expressing any
particle of political preference : it is the utter dislocation
of parties. There is no such thing as party now. The old
names that used to be the watchwords of the different par-
tics in the state are no more. It seems as if some explosive
force had entered the hearts of all political parties, and split
them into a thousand splinters. What does this indicate?
It is a law in nature, that, when a disintegration of particles
has taken place, it is always preparatory to new combina-
tions. The same law holds good in morals and in politics ;
it seems as if, when all parties are thus dislocated, and dis-
integrated, and broken up, it Avere the preparation for that
tremendous conspiracy against God, and against man, which
is the perfect and full development of Antichrist, on whom
the judgments of God shall descend, and who shall be cast,
with all that bear his mark, into the lake that burneth for
ever and ever. There is just one thing on which almost all
statesmen of the present day are agreed — they differ on
almost every topic but this, namely, that the chains wound
around the Romish priesthood shall be taken off. I am not
in flivor of penalties in these matters, if it be possible to
16*
186 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
dispense Avith them : but is it not fair, when great statesmen
are convinced tlitit the time is come for removing from the
statute-book all restrictions from the Church of Rome, that
Ave should ask for, at least, a recognition of our generosity,
bj requesting the Pope to remove all pains, and curses, and
penalties, against us from his statute-book? In vain wc
ask him to do so. Pius IX. boasts of his liberality, and
calls upon us to remove all pains and penalties that were
directed against him for our defence ; but he tells you he
Avould as soon remove from the Vatican itself as remove
from his statute-book one exterminating bull, or expunge
one decree that consigns us, from our noble Queen upon her
throne to the meanest of her subjects, to destruction of soul
and body in time and in eternity, because of our opposition
to him, and our refusal to submit to his authority ; and yet,
strange it is that we should expect any other treatment
from this quarter!
Another sign of the last times, besides the increase of
Popery and Infidelity, and this dislocation and disintegra-
tion of parties, is the increased interest, as I have told you,
which is felt in the Jews. This is one of the startling phe-
nomena of the age, one of the premonitory signs of closing
cycles, and of a coming Lord. As I told you in the morn-
ing, there is not a nation on the continent of Europe that is
not more or less agitated about the state and position of the
Jews. This excitement is the more strange, inasmuch as
those Jews are not troublesome political disturbers ; their
power as a party is nothing, and, as for themselves, give
them twenty per cent, and they will feel contempt for all
the political privileges which you can bestow upon them ;
yet, is it not a fact, that every state seems afraid lest it
should be suspected for a moment that it withholds one
political privilege from the Jew? Poor, weary-footed wan-
derer ! give him, for a little, a home in your land — let
him, for a few days, have the possibility of it in the midst
of you — I will promise he will not trouble you long ; he is
the denizen of a nobler clime — his heart leans toward
Jerusalem, as the needle to the pole. Amid the debris of
every dynasty, his eye rests upon Salem, and his heart
beats and pants for the coming of the great Messiah — the
true Solomon — the hope of Israel. When I look upon a
THE SIGNS OF THE SECOND ADVENT. 187
Jew, he reminds me of some discrowned monarch, swept
from his throne for some gi-eat offence, cast into the midst
of a strange land : his very looks indicate a consciousness
of some dread crime, by which he is haunted everywhere.
The Jews are a national phenomenon, which nothing can
explain but the gospel — a phenomenon that shall play a
part in the history of Europe the grandest and the most
momentous in all the records of the past.
I may notice, also, as a prelude to our Lord's advent, the
great efforts that are made in every portion of the globe at
self-perfection, or rather, as it has been called, self-regenera-
tion. Do I not see, throughout the length and breadth of
society, the most strenuous, and in their place the most com-
mendable, efforts to add to the perfection of our nature, to
expedite the full development of all we are capable of — in
short, if possible, to bring on a millennium of happiness
without Christ, in the midst of our earth. For instance, our
sanitary improvements, the most proper and the most lauda-
ble, are pointed to by some as if they could bid defiance to
the judgments of God, and even to death itself; and hy-
dropathy, and homoeopathy, and successive pathies, concocted
by the talent of man, arc set forth, one after another, as the
true elixir of human life. Men seem to feel that they ought
to live forever ; and, recollecting their original glory, they
seek to grasp anything which will promise to enable them
to do so.
Chemistry writes its books and pursues its brilliant discov-
eries, as if persuaded that a world that groans beneath the
curse has in it the germ or secret of millennial blessedness.
Education is the great demand of the day. Men are not
agreed in what they should be educated. Some say they
must be educated in the absence of all religion, which is just
as absurd as that it is enough to cultivate the intellect, and
dwarf the heart — to teach the young the knowledge of the
creature, but not of the Creator. But if men are not agreed
what must be taught, they are all perfectly agreed that men
must be taught ; and science, and geology, and astronomy,
are constantly toiling and boasting of their discoveries, and
some of them are brilliant ; and scientific institutions, and
mechanics' institutions, and athenajums, are growing up on
all sides of us : all this is knowledge running to and fro, and
188 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
increased; and -Nvhat will be the result of it all? After the
most successful efiforts have been made in cultivatinif the
earth, till it is almost overspread with millennial crops —
after science, geology, astronomy, have done their utmost to
make man happy by making him wise and rich — man will feel
that he has failed to reach the happiness of which our nature
was made originally capable, and the cry will rise from the
still aching heart of disappointed humanity with more piercing
intensity, " Come, Lord Jesus;" and he will come and make
it happy forever.
Another feature of the times that will precede the last
day will be great activity on the part of Satan. That
activity shows itself now in a thousand shapes : sometimes
Satan appears as an angel of light, in all the splendors of
the archangel fallen; sometimes as he is. In all his efforts,
however, he combines the wisdom of the archangel with the
malignity of the arch-fiend. He seems now as if dreading
the everlasting fires in which he must soon live, and suffer ;
and is, therefore, anxious to attain a footing in some nook or
corner of the globe, where he may stave off, if not forever,
at least for a longer time, the great judgment which he
knows must ultimately overtake him.
We see another symbol of the last days in the rank
systems of error that grow up about us. Germany and
America are overrun with fanaticism of the most hideous
description. Even England is not without its fanatics; and,
as religion becomes more earnest in the hands of the few,
fanaticism Avill become rampant in the hearts of the many.
Men can never be without a religion. They must have a
religion of some sort.
We may expect also in the last days, and immediately
prior to the advent of Christ, great and awful judgments, as
our Lord himself has predicted, and tribulations such as
have not been even since the world began. The signs of
these loom in the distant horizon. I showed you some of
them in the pestilence that fell upon the vegetable world ;
in the crashing that sounded through the length and breadth
of our commercial system within the last few years, the
remains of which are now visiting the respectable tradesmen
of our country, like the mists that settle first on mountain
heights and then descend to the valleys that lie around
THE SIGNS OF THE SECOND ADVENT. 189
them : we see it in the state of things across the Channel —
all society fermenting and ill at ease. There is not a nation
of Europe that does not deprecate war ; but there is not a
nation of Europe that does not place its hand upon its SAvord-
hilt, and hold itself ready for war. Preparation for it is laid
down as a duty. " Mens hearts failing them for fear of the
things that are coming on the earth,"' is literally true.
Hence that profound tliinker, whose biography has improved
so many — i)r. Arnold — made this remark, and it is strik-
ini; as cominji from so severe and disciplined a mind as his :
'• My sense of the evils of the times that are coming, and of
the prosi)ects to which I am bringing up my poor children,
is overwhelming ; times are coming in which the devil will
fight his best, and that in good earnest." lie was no fanatic
who said this, but a man of a calm and rellective mind.
Another sign of the near approach of the advent of
Christ will be the spread of knowledge. Daniel gives us
this indication when lie says, "Many shall run to and fro,
and knowledge shall be mcreased."' Do we not see the
signs of this around us ? A century ago, if a man made a
discovery in science and art, it was likely to be his fortune ;
but now, if one makes a discovery in chemistry, in science,
or in any department of knowledge, on which one would
have staked a fortune in former times, he will find that a
discovery made in 1848 is superseded by a more brilliant
one before the year has closed. We see steam running and
executing the errand of man, and carrying five hundred at
onee, at the rate of fifty miles an hour ! Man has made
the greatest approach to the power, though he has not made
a correspondent approach to the holiness, of God, when he
takes the lightnings and makes them carry his messages.
How true is it that many run to and fro, and knowledge is
increased ! We have explored the depths of the ocean, and
searched the caves of the Alps : the march of intellect is
the name with which the present age has christened itself.
Not that we Christians should fear. Let that chemist work
in his laboratory ; encourage that astronomer, who spends
the night in cataloguing groups of stars ; let that mathe-
matician pore over books, and waste the midnight oil; let
that schoolmaster prosecute his Avork ; let all men Avork
hard, and Avork constantly ; they are unconsciously under an
190 LECTURES OP DR. GUMMING.
impulse of which they see not the end. That impulse is a
divine one ; they are opening channels for the gospel ; they
are decking and dressing those handmaids that are to
accompany the bride Avhen she meets the Bridegroom ; they
are lighting new altar-candles, and polishing new gems for
his temple ; it is the rush of the waves of science, and
literature, and knowledge, that roll onward and upward to
the presence of the everlasting throne, there to reflect the
glory of Him that made them, and the riches of Him who
is throned upon the very riches of the universe itself; and
as if it were a forecast light of this blessed result, every
discovery made within the last few years has been a dis-
covery contributing to show the truth and the harmony of
the gospel with the facts of the universe. For instance,
"when we were told, in that very unphilosophical book, " Ves-
tiges of Creation," that there is in a certain part of the
firmament a mass of nebulous matter, and that this nebu-
lous matter gradually forms itself into a shape, till, fully
developed, it becomes a greater orb, a world in our plane-
tary system, Lord Rosse turned his telescope to the alleged
nebulous matter, which was said to be proof positive that
worlds were made without a maker, and he discovered that,
instead of being unmade embryo Avorlds, it consists of clus-
ters of stars, or worlds already made, and larger than our
own. Science is one of those which will outlast tlie
Millennium itself, as the interpreter of the book of nature.
When I look up into that spangled and illuminated sky —
when I look at those countless altar-fires that burn perpetu-
ally, and when by their light I see star beyond star, and
planet beyond planet, and wdien I have viewed by the most
powerful telescope the remotest stars of our system, and
when I find that those remotest stars are but the sentinels
and the outposts of that mighty host that lies scattered
throughout the plains of infinitude, silently hymning per-
petual praise around the throne of Him that made them,
and giving glory to Him that lighted them up with all their
splendor — 1 see in these the indisputable evidences of
Deity, and I am constrained to pity the man who can speak
of a creation without a Creator, as I am constrained to pity
the man who can think of such a revelation as that of the
Bible without the recoo-nition of God as its revealer.
THE SIGNS OP THE SECOND ADVENT. 191
Let me notice another evidence of the nearness of the
Saviour's approach in the present day, and that is, increased
missionary effort. I sliowcd you that the missionary enter-
prise began to be carried out during the outpouring of the
vials Avith augmented energy. All the great ^lissionary
Societies are the offspring of the last fitly years. Tiie
Baptist Society arose in 1702 ; then came in succession,
like mountain peaks, catching successively the rays of sun-
rise, the London ]Missionary, the Church Missionary, the
Church of Scotland schemes, and the Weslcyan INIissionary
Societies, all of which fulfilled that Apocalyptic picture of
the angel flying abroad Avith the everlasting gospel unto all
the nations of the earth : and uhat does Christ himself say?
"This gospel of the kingdom shall be preached unto all
nations; '"' for M"hat purpose? Is it said, to convert them,
and then shall the end come? Xo : " this gospel of the
kingdom shall be preached among all nations, for a witness ; "
and what then? and "then shall the end come." Now the
Bible has been translated into the tongue of every nation,
and the gospel has been preached to every jjeople. At
length, China, which stood out so long, has been storm'ed
by the soldiers of the gospel, and the Christian banner has
been unfolded in the midst of it. The event that follows
is the advent of Christ. •
Another sign of the approach of our Lord is the apathy
and unbelief that shall be felt with regard to it. One of
the signs that Christ is near is the fact that even Christians
will explain this nearness away. There is no one thing
stated more fully or more fro(|uently in the word of God
than this, that, in these last days, men shall say, "Where
is the promise of his coming? for since the fathers fell
asleep, all things continue as they were from the beginning
of the creation." " When they shall say. Peace and safety;
then sudden destruction cometh upon them." Is not this
what men are saying now? I doubt not some will retire
from this nail and say, " What folly and fanaticism we have
heard ! we cannot believe a word of what he has said."
Well, if you like, reject all my views of Apocalyptic chro-
nology — reject all my historical explanations; but at least
do not reject this, that Christ, who died upon the cross, will
come, and when ye think not, and reign, wearing his many
192 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
cro'v^Tis, and sit on his glorious throne. Look for him, and
the same Christ will come again, the Husband to the widow,
the Bridegroom to the bride.
When I think of what succeeds the time when he does
come, I can scarcely realize that glorious Sabbath which
will overspread the earth ! that noble song which will be
heard when the saints shall sing together, Holy, holy, holy,
is the Lord God of hosts ! Wliat a flood of beauty, magnifi-
cence, and glory, will roll over this now shattered orb, like
the countless waves of an illuminated ocean ; illuminated
by Christ, the great central Sun, around whom all systems
revolve, and from whom all beauty comes. And, my dear
friends, if there be the least probability in what I have said,
that Christ is at hand, is it not our duty to pause — to pon-
der, to search if it be so? When men heard that there
was a new star somewhere to bo detected in the firmament,
there were some thousands of telescopes every night directed
to the skies, and countless star-gazers searched, if, perad-
venture, they might discover it. My dear friends, a Star
comes, brighter and more beautiful than any other, "the
bright and morning Star," too long concealed by clouds
which are about to be chased away ; why should not our
hearts look for him ? why should not the believer, who has
ehared in the bitterness and in the blessings of his cross,
pray and pant for him, if, peradventure, he may share in
the splendors of his crown ? Is not the Lord welcome as
he is dear to us ? Crushed and bleeding humanity, under
the suffering of its thousand wrongs, cries, " Come, Lord
Jesus." The earth, weary with its groans and the sobs of
its childi-en, cries, " Come, Lord Jesus." The persecuted
saints in Tahiti and in Madeira, in the dens and caves and
solitary places of the earth, cry, " Come, Lord Jesus."
And, surely, many a heart in this hall, that has been
"warmed by his love, that has been refreshed by his peace,
and sanctified by his grace, shall likewise raise the same
cry, " Come, Lord Jesus;" and the sublime response will
descend from heaven like a wave from the ocean of love
overflowing men's hearts, " Behold, I come quickly." As
in some great and populous city the train comes thundering
along uninterrupted and unobstructed to its destination, so
I believe Christ will come in the chariot of the gospel;
THE SIGNS OF THE SECOND ADVENT. 193
right through all the traffic, and the arts, and the sciences,
and the literature of the -world ; all things giving it an im-
pulse, and none presenting an obstruction.
Brethren, I ^Yill this day close my lectures in Exeter
Hall. I thank this vast audience for the solemn silence
with \Yhich they have listened, and I praise God for the
striking effects of -which I have heard. I anticipate the
day when I shall meet some of you in "the first resur-
rection,"' and rejoice together with you in the presence of
God and of the Lamb. As I have told you, my delight in
the study, and my joy in preaching to you, have been more
than a compensation for all the toil I have gone through.
What I have preached to you were not lectures got up in a
day, but they have been, more or less, the gathering of
years tliat are passed. Tliese lectures, I know, have been
blessed to many : and, my dear friends, if there has been
any effect produced by what I have said, that effect has
arisen, first, from the weighty truths I have enunciated;
next, in that I have spoken just what I felt, and stated just
what I believed, and nothing more. And no man speaks
from the heart without reaching the heart. I have ad-
dressed all sorts of persons in this hall, from almost the
ver^^ highest in the land down to the very lowest. I have
heard of crowds of Episcopalians, Independents, Baptists,
"Wcsleyans, and numbers of our Free Church brethren ; I
have addressed all as forgetting and forgiving minor differ-
encea. and thinkin-]!; of that glorious cement that will bind
us perpetually in one. I have given offence to some ; it
was impossible to avoid it ; I never can consent to pas3
along like a footman, apologizing to every person that ho
touches for the trouble and inconvenience he inflicts : I
must go right on upon the rails that God has laid down : I
have no object but to speak the truth, and the whole truth ;
and whether you will hear, or Avhether you will forbear,
this only relieves me, He that judgeth me is God : it is a
light thing to be laughed at by some ; it is a lighter thing
to l)e scorned by others ; it is a glorious and a blessed thing
to know, that lie that judgeth me, and He that approveth,
is God.
And, my dear friends, think again that we must all ap-
pear, some in the first, and some in the second resurrection •.
17
194 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
oh, if these he realities, let me put it to you, why should
any one of you hesitate -ffhether you shall be in the first or in
the last resurrection ! Why is it, when precious atoning
hlood is offered, and a glorious Saviour is preached to you —
and an instant welcome addressed to the worst and the very
vilest of sinners — let me ask you — let me put it to you —
dear friends, bear with me for a moment while I put it to
you — why should you die ? why perish ? why not be
saved? When I bid you be Christians, I just bid you be
happy. My dear friends, you will allow me to speak from
experience. I know what the gospel is, because I have
tasted its sweetness ; and I am perfectly convinced that no
man can be happy, even in this world, who has not a
personal interest in the Son of God. It is only when you
can lift up your hearts and say, " The Rock of ages is my
trust — infinitude, with all its grandeur, is my home — eter-
nity, with its ceaseless ages, is my lifetime — the great God
my Father, the Lam1) upon the throne my Saviour; " that
you can add, " Come weal, come wo, come life, come death,
come revolution, and earthquake, and tumults of the people,
nothing can separate me from Christ." Oh ! with what an
elastic footstep will you walk the world ! with what courage
will you brave its surges, and its storms, and its trials, con-
scious that all things work together for good to them that
love God, and are called according to his purpose !
My dear friends, I say to many of you. Farewell ; and I
say that in a sense in which it is not often uttered. I say
it not lightly, but solemnly. May you fare well in the first
resurrection. May you fare well at the judgment-day.
May you fare well in time. May you fare well in eternity :
and at that day, when sighs and farewells shall cease, may
we meet before the throne of God and of the Lamb, and so
be for ever with the Lord ! Amen, and Amen.
Como, then, and, added to thy many crowns.
Receive yet one, tho crown of all the earth.
Thou who alone art worthy. —
Thy saints proclaim thee King; and in their hearts
Thy title is engraven with a pen
Dipt in tho fountain of eternal love.
Thy saints proclaim thee King; and thy delay
Gives courage to their foes, who, could they seo
The dawn of thy last advent, long desired.
Would creep into the bowels of the hills,
ABSTRACT OF LECTURES. 195
And flco for safety to the falling rocks.
The very spirit of tho world is tired
Of its own taunting ((iiestion, ask'd so long, —
" Where is the promise of your Lord's approach? "
ABSTRACT OF LECTURES.
[The following is Dr. Cutuming's abstract of his full course of twenty-
six lectures, which he gave iu Exeter Hall in 1818. It presents a summa-
ry of his views on the Apocalypse, .and its teachings respecting Christ's
secoiul advent — its nearness, and the nature of the Millennium that is to
follow. It is given in this place to call the attention of the reader to the
volume of his lectures. It is a work of rare merit, and should be read
entire]
" Behold, I como as a thief. Blessed is he that watcheth, and keepeth his
garments, lest ho walk naked, and they sec his shame." — Rev. 10: 15.
This evening, as I announced, my Lectures in Exeter
Hall on this most interesting book draw to a close. I can-
not help repeating that the weariness I have felt in my
researches, and the exhaustion which I have endured in the
delivery of them, have been more than compensated by the
delight I have experienced in study, and the positive profit
they have brought to my own heart. I have this day, on
this first Sabbath of another year, liaving addressed you on
the last Sabbath of the year that is closed, to remind you
that there will be a last darj as well as a last year, and that
last day is the day that we ought to anticipate, and realize
more than any other day in our whole biography. This is
tho last day on which I shall address you iiere : the first
Sabbath of a year that we have seen begin, but the close of
which who among us shall sec ? The youngest may die ;
the oldest must die soon : and there is not one in this vast
congregation that can insure his life for 1848. But there
is not one that may not insure a crown of glory that fadeth
not away, by taking into his heart the price and purchase
of it — the precious blood of the Sou of God.
But I have thought, my dear friends, that, as many of
those who regularly assembled in the morning did not hear
the evening lectures, it might not be unprofitable, if I avail
196 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
myself of a suggestion made to me by a member of my
own flock last Sabbath-day, and give something like a
resuini^ or a sketch of the leading points I have success-
ively brought before you. In the morning of each Sabbath,
as you are aware, I have preached on the distinctive char-
acteristics of the gospel of Jesus : * in the evenings of the
successive Sabbaths we have assembled in this hall during
nearly six months that are now closed, I have expounded to
you what I conceive to be the just and true meaning of the
Apocalypse ; and I think that it will not be uninstructive if
I slightly touch on the various .points to which I have turned
your attention, and bring, as it were, the whole Apocalyptic
drama in one bright vision, as shortly as I can, before your
minds.
My first lecture consisted of an exposition of the claims
of the Apocalypse to occupy its place in the sacred canon.
I showed you the incontestable evidence by which it is
proved to be divine. I laid before you, too, the various
links of evidence by which it is proved to be the composi-
tion of John, the beloved disciple who leaned upon the Sa-
viour's breast. I showed you the place of its composition,
Patmos ; the year of its composition, A. D. 96 ; and then
I stated what I conceived to be the duties of an impartial
commentator on the Apocalypse — to be careful not to
attempt to play the prophet whife discharging the humble
duty of an expositor of the Scripture. I urged, too, that
the failures of the past were no reasons why there should
be failures in the future. I showed you that every wreck
that lies in the channel has the buoy attached to it, by those
whose duty it is to attend to it, and by that wreck other
navies are preserved from destruction. In the same man-
ner, every failure to explain the Apocalypse is only a guide
to future expositors, and affords a stronger presumption that
the next attempt shall not fail. Eacli successive commenta-
tor casts light upon it, and brings forth truth from it ; and
as the day approaches when the great drama shall be closed,
and all its mysterious contents shall be made known, we
shall then wonder that we doubted where we ought to have
* I propose publishing a volume containing my Sabbath morning dis-
courses in Exeter Hall.
ABSTRACT OF LECTURES. 197
bclieveJ. and shrank from study where wo ought to have
prayerfully and patiently investigated.
In my next lecture I laid before you what I called "the
Gospel according to the Apocalypse," from the text, "Unto
Him that loved us, and washed us from our sins in his own
blood, and hath made us kings and priests to God and his
Father; to Him be glory for ever and ever." I showed the
distinction that seems to subsist between the Gospel according
to Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John, and the Gospel accord-
ing to the Apocalypse. In the first Christ is the priest, in
the second Christ is the priest and the king. In the Gospel
of St. John ho is exhibited with the cross ; in the Apoc-
alypse of St. John he is displayed with many crowns upon
his head. In the one, he has the suffering to undergo ; in
the other, he has the royalty to receive. In the one, he is
in the midst of his agony and bloody sweat ; in the other,
he is seated on his throne, and cherubim and seraphim adore
him. The one is the completion of the other — the Gospel
of St. John would have been incomplete without the Apoc-
alypse of St. John : each gives a profile, both give the full
face of him who is the "brightness of the Father's glory
— the express imago of His person."'
In my third lecture I endeavored to describe, or rather to
open, those symbols which are known and revealed in the
Apocalypse by the name of the Seals. I stated that God,
in revealing things that were future, made use of symbols,
for this reason : If there were no symbols, but marked pre-
dictions of the most inevitable events, man's agency, respon-
sibility, and free-will would be hampered. If, again, there
were no predictions of the future at all, in any shape, or in
any way intelligible, there would be nothing to cheer man
in the prospects of the future, or to confirm man in the
statements of God'g^holy word. He has, therefore, given
us syml)ol3 so dark that man's freedom and responsibility
may not be crushed, and yet so luminous that the patient
and prayerful inquirer will find light if he will only study
them. I explained that the chief of these symbols were
divided into three great divisions : first, seven Seals, denot-
ing seven successive historical conditions or states of the
great empire in which the Christian Church was to play so
prominent a ^art ; then seven Trumpets ; then seven Vials :
17*
198 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
the seventh Seal being an epitome of the seren Trumpets,
and the seventh Trumpet being a sketch in brief, or an
epitome, of the seven Vials ; and the whole twenty-one sym-
bols embracing a complete history of the future from the
year 96, when John was in Patmos, till the close of the
century that now is, when the mystery shall be complete,
and the great drama of mankind shall be wound, up.
The first seal, you will recollect, was thus stated : "I
beheld a white horse, and he that sat on him had a bow ;
and a crown was given unto liim : and he went forth con-
quering and to conquer." I showed you first, that the
horse is used in this book as the symbol of the Roman Em-
pire. The reason I gave you for it was very plain — the
horse was the national symbol of Rome. If you speak of
the thistle, you mean Scotland — if you speak of the sham-
rock, you allude to Ireland — if you speak of the rose, you
refer to England ; so, if you speak of the horse in the sym-
bolic sense, you make reference to Rome. Rome was called
the '•'•gens Mavortia'^ — the nation of Mars: the horse
was the animal consecrated, or sacred, to Mars; and on
certain Roman coins there is found upon the one side the
horse, and the word " Roma" over it, and upon the obverse
the portrait of the reigning Roman emperor.
In the first four seals, therefore, I showed you that as the
horse was the symbol of Rome, Rome must be the nation
referred to, and that the successive states, or phases, or
colors of the horse must denote the successive states of that
empire. White is the symbol of prosperity, and the em-
peror is represented as going forth conquering and to con-
quer. He is also represented as having a bow in his hand.
I showed you that the bow was the symbol of Crete, just as
the shamrock is the symbol of Ireland, the thistle of Scot-
land, or the rose of England. The A}>©calyptic symbol of
a Roman emperor with a bow in his hand would seem,
therefore, to convey an allusion, more or less remote, to
Crete ; and thus it turns out in history that Nerva was the
first emperor of Rome who was of a Cretan family, and he
commenced the Cretan dynasty ; the Apocalyptic symbol
pointing out the historic fact with perfect and minute accu-
racy. Thus, then, under the first seal, the Roman Empire
is represented as in a state of great national prosperity.
ABSTRACT OF LECTURES. 199
The words of the second seal are these : "xVnd there went
out another horse that was red : aaid power was given to
him that sat thereon to take peace from the earth, and that
they shouhl kill one another ; and there was given unto him
a great sword."' And you will observe that in the original
it is to take, not peace, but the peace (r;;»' sigyvi,v^ — that is,
the peace established under the previous seal, when all was
prosperous and peaceful. Red, I explained to you, was
the sj'uibol of bloodshed : and I illustrated this passage by
referring to the fact that the reception of a sword, in the
language of Rome, was equivalent to the constituting a
person a pretor — a pretorian-prefect, or one of the highest
military officers of the empire : the statement of the recep-
tion of a sword pointed, therefore, to that office ; and the
power of these officers to take peace from the earth, together
with the previous part of the symbol, indicated a time of
internal bloodshed and of war. Such a time did eventually
take place. The first seal extended from the year 96, when
John wrote the Apocalypse, to the year 180, commencing
with the reign of Nerva. and ending with that of Mark
Antonine. The second, from that period to 249, during
which time Rome Avas visited with the most fearful bloodshed
and intestine war.
The next seal is thus described: "I beheld, and lo, a
black horse, and he that sat on him had a pair of balances
in his hand ; and I heard a voice in the midst of the four
beasts, saying, A measure of wheat for a penny, and three
measures of barley for a penny, and see thou hurt not the
oil and the wine." I showed you that this referred to a
period in the history of Rome when the whole land was
oppressed l>y injustice — the balances evidently relating to
the administration of the justice of the empire, as I showed
by reference to the symbol ; and I historically demonstrated
the fact, that the grinding exactions of the governors of
Rome, in the language of Gibbon, had brought the empire
to the very verge of exhaustion and ruin.
I then referred to the fourth seal: "I looked, and be-
hold, a pale horse : and his name that sat upon him was
Death, and hell followed with him. And power was given
unto them over the fourth part of the earth, to kill with the
sword, and with hunger, and with death, and with the beasts
200 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
of the earth.'" I showed you that this '•hell'' "was Hades,
or the grave — I showed, from historic fact, that from the
year 248 to the year 2G8, pestilence overflowed the length
and breadth of the land. — "The wild beasts," in the lan-
guage of the historian, '-from man's failing, and the sup-
plies of man's existence being withdrawn, rushed into the
cities and completed the havoc that death had begun;" and
the symbol of Death riding on the pale horse, with the
grave opening at his heels to receive the victims that he
mowed down, was an exact symbolical picture of the real
state of the empire from the year 248 to the year 268.
Then the fifth seal was the spectacle of those under the
altar that were slain for the testimony of Jesus, and for the
word of God, saying, "How long?" This I explained to
you to represent the persecutions of the Christian Church
from the year 303 to 313.
Then we have the sixth seal, where some great change
seems to have taken place immediately after the fifth seal had
been opened, and after the sealing had taken place. That
change I showed to be Rome casting away its idol-gods —
sweeping the Pantheon of all its idolized tenantry — recog-
nizing the gospel as the national religion, exalting its min-
isters, rightly or wrongly, to the highest places in the state ;
and Christianity, from being the religion of the catacombs,
the dens, and caves of the earth, becoming the religion of
the palace, of the cathedral, of churches magnificent in
architecture, and protected by the sceptre of the reigning
monarch.
Immediately after this exaltation of Christianity, there
follows the sealing of the 144.000. That, as explained to
you, signifies that Christianity, in the hours of its prosper-
ity, sufiered more than it did in the days of its depression
— that the gospel was a purer and a nobler thing when
crushed by the persecutions of Nero, than when it nestled
beneath the shadow of the imperial throne of Constantino ;
and, whether it was right or whether it was wrong thus to
elevate the gospel, it is matter of fact that in the catacombs
and caves of the earth the church retained her garments
unsullied — her communion with her Lord unbroken ; but
the moment the heads that were exposed to the tempests
were crowned with mitres, and the catacombs exchanged
ABSTRACT OF LECTURES. 201
for cathedrals, she laid aside her robes of beauty and of
glory, put on the gorgeous dress of Cnssar, became shorn
of her real strength and her attributes of grandeur, and
ground, a miseral)le drudge, at Cicsar's mill, and at Crcsar's
bidding. I am not called on, in this place, to pronounce
whetlicr that elevation were scripturally right or wrong :
I merely comment on historic facts, the sulistancc of which
I have now stated.
But in the midst of all this I showed you, while the visi-
ble churcli tluis enthroned by the emperor had ceased to be
scriptural, God was In-inging out his true church. The
Apostasy was now gathering strength every day — the visi-
ble church was ceasing to be the true church, God therefore
causes to emerge the 144,000 sealed ones, that is, his own
election, his own redeemed people — the true links of the
true succession, the sons of God i?i the world, but not of
the world.
Now, having shown you that the visible church became
apostate, and that the true church was restricted only to the
few or the handful, then a series of judgments was poured
out upon the apostate church, described under the symbolical
figure of the seven trumpets. I may here digress to ob-
serve tliat God has thus dealt with nations in almost every
part of their existence. You recollect that passage in
Amos, where God is about to judge his people for their
manifold transgressions (Amos 4 : G — 12). Now, if I
should classify these verses under Apocalyj)tic symbols, you
would see the complete harmony that exists in God's deal-
ings in all dispensations of his grace. Thus, in verse G,
there is the first trumpet : — "I have also given you clean-
ness of teeth in all your cities, and want of bread in all
your places ; yet have ye not returned unto me, saith the
Lord God." Thus one trumpet sounds: but the result is
no repentance. It is therefore followed by the second
trum])et, if I may use the expression : — " And also I have
withholdcn the rain from you when there were yet three
months to the harvest : and I caused it to rain upon one
city, and caused it not to rain upon another city ; one piece
was rained upon, and the piece whereupon it rained not
withered. So two or three cities wandered unto one city to
drink water ; but they were not satisfied : yet have ye not
202 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
returned unto me, saith the Lord." There is the second
trumpet. Then the third trumpet sounds : — "I huve smit-
ten you Avith blasting and mildew : ^Yhen jour gardens, and
your vineyards, and your fig-trees, and your olive-trees in-
creased, the palmer-worm devoured them : yet have ye not
returned unto me, saith the Lord." Then the fourth
trumpet sounds: — "I have sent among you the pestilence
after the manner of Egypt : your young men have I slain
with the sword, ;iud have taken away your horses ; and I
have made the stink of your camps to come up unto your
nostrils : yet have ye not returned unto me, saith the Lord."
There is another trumpet : — "I have overthrown some of
you as God overthrew Sodom and Gomorrah, and ye Avere
as a firebrand plucked out of the burning : yet have ye not
returned unto me, saith the Lord." There is the sixth
trumpet. Now what is the seventh? — "Therefore thus
will I do unto thee, Israel : and because I will do this
unto thee, prepare to meet thy God, Israel." There is
the sounding of the seventh. God's judgments in the past
are all in harmony with God's judgments in the future ;
both are his commissioners to walk the world, and do the
behests of his will.
I endeavored to open up to you the meaning of the seven
trumpets in the same manner that I explained the seven
seals, by historic facts. I showed you that trumpets, in the
Levitical economy, Avere used, first to proclaim feasts or
festivals to the people, or to proclaim war against the enemy.
So they are used in the Apocalypse. The first trumpet
sounded after Christendom had become apostate, and the
judgments of that trumpet Ave read fell upon the Roman em-
pire in the shape of "hail and storm: " that is, desolating
and destructive judgments, mingled Avith blood or bloodshed,
and they Avere cast upon the earth : ' • and the third part of
trees was burnt up, and all green grass was burnt up."
You read that Alaric the Goth burst upon the empire at this
time, swept it Avith his victorious sword, deluged it Avith
blood, and it almost fell beneath the severity of the on-
slaught. We read that the second angel sounded, "and,
as it were, a great mountain burning Avith fire was cast into
the sea, and the third part of the sea became blood ; and
the third part of the creatures that were in the sea, and had
ABSTRACT OF LECTURES. 203
life, died ; and the third part of the ships were destroyed.''
I showed jou that, under this trumpet, the maritime shores
of the Roman cmi)ire, its ships and fleets, were the subjects
of suffering. I opened history, and read that, as Alaric fell
upon the land, and swept it with fire and deluged it with
blood, in order to fulfil the symbols of the second trumpet;
so Gcneseric, according to this trumpet, fell upon the ships
and maritime i)Owcr of Rome. Three times the fleets of
the empire were opposed to him — three times they were
almost annihilated ; and, as if to show the mysterious
nature of his mission, when his pilot asked Geneseric to
what coast should he steer? the reply of the Goth was,
"Leave that to the winds of heaven — they will waft us to
the guilty coast." He desolated every island, and smote
with destruction every shore, and totally exterminated the
fleets of Rome. Suddenly he drops from the stage, and all
again is still.
The third trumpet sounds: "And there fell a great star
from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell upon
the third part of the rivers, and upon the fountains of
waters." I showed you that the rivers and fountains of
waters, wherever they are alluded to in the Apocalypse,
denote the people that dwell upon the banks of the rivers —
the great rivers of Europe, the Danube, the Rhine, and the
Po. Accordingly avc read, when the third trumpet sounds,
that Attila, who was called the Scourge of God, instantly
descended upon the banks of the Rhine, the Danube, and
the Po, and swept from them every nation that opposed him,
and fell like a burning mountain from the sky, upon every
section of the geographical territory so graphically described
in these symbols.
The fourth trumpet sounded : " And the third part of the
sun was smitten, and the third part of the moon, and the
tliird part of the stars : so as the third part of them was
darkened, and the day shone not for a third part of it, and
the night likewise." I explained to you that the sun and
moon in the Apocalypse denote always the imperial or sove-
reign power. Accordingly, we read in history that Odoacer,
the last of the Gothic dynasty, marched upon Rome, after
Alaric had fiiUen upon the land, and Geneseric upon the
sea, and Attila upon the rivers ; and swept the whole impe-
20J: LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
rial territory ; tlie sun was darkened : and accordingly we
read that Odoacer marched upon Rome, the capital itself;
commanded, with his drawn sword, that Augustulus, the
emperor that then reigned, should abdicate his throne, re-
sign the insignia of sovereignty, and that all the emblems
of empire should be transferred to Constantinople. Here
we have the sun darkened, or the imperial power withdra^vn.
And when the fifth trumpet- sounded, we read that "A
star fell from heaven, and to him was given the key of the
bottomless pit. And he opened the bottomless pit; and
there arose a smoke out of the pit, as the smoke of a great
furnace ; and the sun and the air Avere darkened by reason
of the smoke of the pit. And there came out of the smoke
locusts upon tlie earth : and unto them was given power, as
the scorpions of the earth have power," &c. (Rev. 9 : 1 — 12.)
I showed that this star falling from the firmament — a star
denoting rank in office — was Mohammed, who was the
descendant of a royal but degraded house. He retired to a
cave in the neighborhood of Mecca, where he concocted that
horrible scheme of delusion and blasphemy which has over-
spread vast portions of xisia and of Europe ; which depends
for its success on the cimeter of its preacher, and on the
sensuality of its auditory. We read that the result of it
was that the whole sky was darkened by this moral smoke.
The locusts, I showed you, by the strange accompaniments
by which they are characterized, represent the Saracens rush-
ing to the battle. " Their shapes," we are told, " were like
unto horses prepared unto battle ; and on their heads were
as it were crowns like gold, and their faces were as the faces
of men ; and they had hair as the hair of women, and their
teeth were as the teeth of lions. And they had breastplates
as it were breastplates of iron ; and the sound of their wings
was as the sound of chariots of many horses running to
battle. And they had tails like unto scorpions, and there
Avere stings in their tails, and their power Avas to hurt men
five months." You may remember my explanation of that.
First, the star was Mohammed ; secondly, the smoke Avas
Mohammedanism ; thirdly, the Apocalyptic locusts are evi-
dently symbols ; because, according to natural history, the
picture is most absurd; according to symbolic or hiero-
glyphic description, it is most expressive. The locusts were,
ABSTRACT OF LECTURES. 205
I showed you, the Saracens, and the reason they are likened
to locusts is, the locusts come never singly, but in swarms,
and from the east — the Saracens burst in innumerable
hordes upon the length and breadth of Europe. They had
crowns upon their heads — the Arab's aphorism says, that
"he has his turban for his crown." They had "the faces
of men." They were characterized by a peculiarity no
Roman had — namely, the moustache worn upon tlic up|)er
lip, wliich gave them an appearance of fierceness. They
" had hair as the hair of women." The Arabs were distin-
guished by their long flowing hair. In addition to this,
" the sound of their wings was as the sound of chariots of
many horses running to battle." Cavalry was their strength
and main reliance. " And they had tails like unto scorpi-
ons, and there were stings in their tails, and their power
was to hurt men five months." The expression " power " in
the original is i:niioi>i^ which means "authority," the ofiicial
authority was theirs. The allusion to tails is thus explained.
In one of the earlier battles of the Saracens, the sfcindard
•was lost ; their leader instantly cut off his horse's tail,
placed it upon a pole, told his troops that must be their
standard when they marched to battle, and ever afterward,
to this day, the horse's tail lias been the Turkish standard
— a pacha with one, two, or three tails, denoting the rank,
office, or authority that he holds — and their actual hurting
is in the history of their injustice and oppression ; and I
showed, by the most minute analysis, that this trumpet con-
tains the description of the spread of Mohammedanism and
Saracen conquest as a judgment upon an apostate and a
God-denying church.
Tlie si.xth trutui)et sounds, which, as I proved, describes
what was called, in other portions of the Apocalj^pse, the
Turkish wo. And there 3'ou remember that the Turks
passed the great river Euphrates, received the permission
from Him who alone had power to give it, to come " forth
for a day, a month, and a year, and the numl)er of the army
of the horsemen was two hundred thousand thou.sand : and
I heard the number of them." I showed that this w-as ful-
filled in the successive triunijihs of the Turks who hail re-
ceived the jNIohammedan delusion, and marched over great
portions of Asia and Europe, spreading havoc wherever
18
206 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
they exhibited their presence. I stated, also, that the allu-
sion here made to smoke, and brimstone, and fire, might be
an allusion to the fact that for the first time, on a large and
gigantic scale, artillery was used at the siege of Constanti-
nople by the Turks, and gunpowder, though it was invented
several years before, then first came to be employed on a
large scale, and to play a prominent part in modern Avar-
fare. I showed that in that siege Constantinople fell, and
thus the mistress of the East was laid prostrate upon the
ruins of the mistress of the West — the Apostasy reigned
in the Christian church — Mohammedanism overwhelmed
the eastern portion of Europe — a world without God —
men without hope — a church without religion — and all
things prognosticating some fearful catastrophe ; so much so,
that many of the Christians of that time anticipated the
speedy arrival of the judgment-day, and the appearing of
the great white throne.
Such, then, is a brief sketch of my exposition of the
Seven Seals and the Seven Trumpets. I know that many
of the statements I have made will appear to some of you
almost unwarranted, because some of you have not heard
the successive facts by which I have proved them ; but I
am now giving only a sketch, merely to refresh the memo-
ries of those who have attended the delivery of the whole,
and not to carry conviction on the present occasion.
The next great event we read of, is that glorious one, the
blessed Reformation. The church had become apostate —
destruction was its merit, reformation was God's gracious
purpose. I gave you a picture of the church before the
Reformation — the pope worshipped as God — the Roman
church rampant and supremo — kings, puppets in the hands
of the pope — their diadems kicked from their heads by his
pontifical foot — some of them deposed from their thrones.
And, I may here remark, I have always felt this, that the
danger of the church of Christ, if we may judge of the
present and the future from the past, is not the popular
power, nor the kingly power, or, as it is called by some, the
Erastian power, but I solemnly believe it to be from the
priestly power ; little do I fear from the people, nor do I
fear much from the crown, but I have much fear of the
priest. Watch the priests and the people and the crown,
ABSTRACT OF LECTURES. 207
pray fox' all three, but protest against the usurpations of
any of them.
The Reformation then came, and Milner states that " after
ages of superstition, we see the Sun of Righteousness rising
over Europe with healing under his \Yings.''
You may recollect the interesting sketch that I gave of
the Reformation. Leo X. was enjoying uninterrupted and
undisturbed supremacy, when a poor Augustinian monk
lays hold of a dusty volume Avhich had not been opened
for centuries, in the library of the university of Erfurt.
Startled by its appearance, he xinclasps it : the unclasping
of that book was the first act of the Reformation, and in
that book la}' all the privileges, the freedom, the hopes, the
blessings that you possess. If ^Martin Luther, humnnly
speaking, had not unclasped that volume, your grand
philosophy, your great discoveries, your steam-engines, and
your steamboats, and your electric telegraphs, and your rail-
roads, would never have existed. scientific scorner, little
dost thou know the debt that thou owcst to that poor
Augustinian monk in the convent of Erfurt ! When he
perused the contents of the Bible, he discovered in it truths
that he had never heard of before : he saw that the breviary
and the missal contained mere fragments of the Bible, and
he read and road again ; he discovered that glorious truth
which was the lever that lifted Europe from its thraldom,
and shook the very throne of the pontiff, "we are justified
by fiith alone in the glorious righteousness and finished
sacrifice of the Son of the living God." When ho discov-
ered this, the hope of souls, he could not be silent — he
began to speak out. The pope tried to terrify hira by his
decrees, and to alarm iiim by his thunders : Luther contin-
ued for some time doubting ; but at length he discovered
that the pope was not Christ's minister, but Antichrist, and
that Popery was not the church at all. but the Apostasy.
As soon as he was satisfied of this, he feared no man's fiice,
he cared for no man's frown, he went like the cannon-shot
through all opposition riglit to his coui's-, o, «, hcTfiioi, and there is no
other word corresponding to it. There are many words that
are an approximation to it, but there are plain reasons for
rejecting them, and the most powerful reasons for believing
that this word, Aitrfn-os, is the true word here intended.
The church of Rome is marked by Latin canons, Latin
missal, Latin breviary, Latin Bible — Latin bulls, ency-
clicals, decrees, canons: it is emphatically the Latin church
— the Man of Sin — the Antichrist — the wild beast from
the abyss.
After having given you a description of the great charac-
teristics of this church, I proceeded to give you an exposi-
tion of the Seven "S'ials. The first vial, we find, was poured
out, l)y the angel commissioned to do so, upon the Roman
earth ; the result of its effusion we read in chapter 16 :
" There fell a noisome and grievous sore upon the men
wliich had the mark of the l)cast, and upon them which
worshipped his image." I showed you that that sore waa
that dreadful scourge, the French Revolution ; and that
those who had so martyred the saints then felt in their turn
that they that throw the arrow of persecution always receive
it again, sooner or later, into their own bosoms. This sore
fell upon the capital of the earth, the eldest daughter of the
church, and the scene that accompanied its pouring out I
need not recapitulate.
The second vial was poured out upon the sea; and, just
as we explained " tlie burning mountain" falling into the
sea to mean the destruction of the maritime and naval
powers of Rome, so must we consistently explain the pour-
ing out of this vial upon the sea. What, then, took place?
212 LECTURES OF DE. GUMMING.
We read that, immediately after the great outburst of the
French Revolution, all the naval forces and fleets that
France could muster against our country, as her only hope
of destroying us, were swept from the sea in rapid succes-
sion. Her islands and colonies — St. Domingo and others
— became the scenes of servile and terrible warfare : the
French, on this occasion, exhibited a very strange pecu-
liarity of human nature ; they proclaimed, at their Revo-
lution, equality of all the members of the whole human
family; the blacks in St. Domingo, their most powerful
colony, caught the sentiment, and believed it, too ; and they
proclaimed equality for all. But it seems that the French
meant, when they proclaimed liberty and equality for all,
for those only whose faces were bleached by a northern cli-
mate ; for they excluded all those whose countenances had
the least tinge of a southern sun. This is just the feature
that some of our American brethren in the Southern States
exhibit at the present day. There the black man is not
permitted to travel in the same coach, or the same steam-
boat, or railway-carriage, with the white man, nor even to
approach the same communion-table, where one would sup-
pose all distinctions of caste were utterly annihilated, — as
if Christ died for the white and not for the black. Shame
upon those ministers of the gospel, then, who know it, and
do not protest against it ; and still more so on those Avho
sanction it because it supports them. I think, by the grace
of God, if I were there, I should show the greater prefer-
ence to the black men rather than to the white, upon that
beautiful principle of the gospel, that the weakest ought to
be first supported.
The very first effect of tiie action of this second vial was,
that all the colonies of France were lost to her, and
her navies annihilated. The victories of the Nile, Cape
St. Vincent, and Trafalgar, and many others, the most
splendid in any country's annals upon earth, were gained
by our own country, to whom seems to have been intrusted
the dread mission of pouring out this vial. It would occupy
too much of your time were I, in this syllabus, to recount
all the brilliant triumphs of our country on the ocean, or
the names of that cluster of illustrious admirals who
appeared about this time — men whose appearance on the
1
ABSTRACT OF LECTURES. 213
ocean was the prelude of victory to our arms, and the signal
of confidence to our sailors. Napoleon cried out, " Let me
have ships and a navy, and perfidious Albion will be
crushed: but no sooner had he ol)tained them, than they
were burned in the harbor, or blown from the deep. The
reason of this was not that we had braver seamen, or greater
heroism, but that God had pronounced the doom on the
guilty nation, and all the power and bravery of France,
sustained by the consummate skill of Napoleon, could not
avert it.
The third vial, we read, was poured out upon the river's ;
and, accordingly, Ave have in history the evidence of the
fearful scenes of bloodshed which soon took place upon the
banks of the Rhine, the Danube, and all the great rivers of
continental Europe : in fact, there was not a capital from
jNIoscow to ^Madrid, from St. Petersburg to Paris, that was not
blazing beneath the ilanies of the French invasion ; nor a
city on the Danube, the Rhine, or the Po, that did not give
evidence of the action of some terrible judgment upon the
earth.
The fourth vial was poured out upon the sun. I told you
that the sun denotes, in Apocalyptic symbols, as I have
explained before, the kingly power. Ilei'e, then, the sun is
said to scorch the nations of the earth. This has been
explained by Mr. Elliott, and I think justly, to be the power
given to that imperial sun. Napoleon, to scorch, that is,
severely punish the nations of the earth, in just and right-
eous retribution. It is surely allusive to the manner of
his doing so, since we read that he was called by his own
soldiers •' the little sun;'' his battles were signalized by the
rolling fire of musketry and artillery, which last he brought
into the field to an extent unprecedented in the history of
European warfare ; and upon this he depended so much that
he called artillery his " right arm." lie may justly be said
to have scorched the nations of the earth, literally and
figuratively, too. Having done his work, he passed from the
stage ; for Napoleon had liis mission, and when he had done
it, he was swept away in order to make room for other
agencies. His rise, his empire, and his retreat, are alike
supernatural.
The fifth vial was poured out upon the throne of the
214 LECTUKES OF DK. GUMMING.
beast. I showed in a previous lecture, that this wild beast
is the symbol of the Pope : is there, then, coincident with
this symbol in prophecy, a fact in history which shows that
the Papal power, in its central seat, was visited, about this
time, with any signal and overwhelming judgments? We
read in every history that the marshals of Napoleon
appeared in the midst of the sacerdotal capital — burst upon
the Pope and his cardinals — took the ring, that indicated
his marriage with the church, from the Pope's finger —
marched him to Paris a humble prisoner ; and thus he, who
had awed the nations by his word, was dragged at the
chariot-wheels of Napoleon, introduced at the ceremony of
the coronation of the Emperor, not to crown, but to grace
the coronation, as a puppet at the spectacle ; for Napoleon
placed the crown on his own head, w'hile the Pope stood by
to gild the scene, but not to perform the ceremony. How
truly was the prediction fulfilled that this vial should be
poured out upon the throne of the beast !
We now turn to the sixth vial, under the last dregs of
which we now are. Under it the premonitory symptoms of
the approach of Him who is to reign for ever, develop them-
selves. Under this vial the river Euphrates Avas to be dried.
I showed you. in a previous lecture, that the Euphrates Avas
the symbol of the Turkish power: what has been the fact?
From 1820 down to the present time, Turkey has been
wasting — the crescent waning. The Janissaries, its power-
ful police, are extinct : the head of the Empire is adopting
European customs ; laws that were peculiar distinctions of
Mohammedanism are repealed ; and, in the language of
Chateaubriand, "Turkey is dying for Avant of Turks."
And, in the course of a very few years more, the last
streams in the channels of the Euphrates will be exhausted,
and Turkey, the great oppressor of the church in the days
that are past, will be no longer a reality among the nations.
Then the drying up of the river was to make preparation
for the return of the kings of the east. The kings of the
east, I showed you. are the JeAvish people ; and that, con-
temporaneous Avith the Avasting of the Turkish poAver, there
should be the rise of an interest in the JcAvish race;
and Avhen the Turkish power is utterly exhausted, the Jews
should be illuminated Avith a divine light, march in columns
ABSTRACT OF LECTURES. 215
to the land of their fathers, and, in the midst of Jerusalem,
praise with hosaunas, Him whom their fathers crucified.
And such an interest is actually taken in their destiny at
the present day : Sweden is agitated about the position of
the Jews in that country : the king of Prussia is in diffi-
culty about the same tiling. That despised, persecuted,
money-loving race is about to occupy a new and more
prominent position in the affairs of Europe. In our own
country, is it not one of the great topics of the day ? I
pronounce not here whether it be politically right or politi-
cally wrong ; but when I read the speeches of Lord John
Kussell and Lord Ashley, in the House of Commons, the
former in support of the measure, and the latter in oppo-
sition to it, I was struck by the deep and solemn sense of
responsibility that seemed to be felt hy l)Oth those statesmen,
ami the impression rushed upon my mind, — Prime ministers
and members of Parliament may, as they conscientiously
desire, pursue their own plans, and seek the accomplishment
of their own ends; but they are but instruments in the
hands of God, working out his glorious will — his predicted
purpose.
I noticed, also, the three unclean spirits that go out, under
this vial, to deceive the nations of the earth. I showed that
the first was Lifidelity : and, remember, I am only now
stating results, not giving you the data : I showed that the
first is Infidelity, consisting in the absence of religion ; and
next in antagonism to reliij;ion. I showed that the second
unclean spirit from the mouth of tlie beast was Popery : I
need not here recapitulate the evidence of its remarkable
presence among us. Some fifty years ago there were only
fifteen or twenty lloman Catholic chapels in England ; now
there arc about 700. In the course of six years they have
built 60 churches, several of which are cathedrals, all are
as large, some larger, than the largest parish churches in this
country ; they have between 800 and 900 priests laboring
throughout the country ; nay, more, there is not a place of
any importance in which there is not some Jesuit laboring
with untiring energy — unwearied zeal — and unequalled
cunning for the supremacy of his church. Then I showed
you that the third unclean spirit is Tractarianism, as distin-
guished from Popery ; in other words, Popery without a
216 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
pope ; all the venom of the original without its consistency
and fulness of development. I have seen much of this
system in recent instances, and it has made me feel more
than ever that the priestly power is the main element that
we have to dread. The dissenter says, whether truly or not
I need not now pronounce, that the church ought to be
totally separate from the state, and to be in no degree
within the reach of Cassar's touch. The churchman says,
rightly or wrongly I do not now determine, but most consist-
ently, that the church and state should bo united to one
another, and live in good friendship and happy brotherhood ;
but the Puseyite does not adopt the sentiments of either ;
he says that the state must obey the church; the priest
must be the ruler, the prince must be the subject. I say
the priestly power is the element we have to dread — the
element Avhich makes gigantic progress, and aims at umiti-
gated supremacy.
We came, last Sunday evening, to the opening of the
seventh vial, which is the grand consummation of those
prophecies that bud every hour into performance. Under
it, I believe, Christ comes. Now, I do believe that Christ's
advent is not post-millennial, but pre-millennial. I believe
there will not be a Millennium till Christ come ; I believe
that when He comes there will take place two resurrections,
the one only of the just, the other only of the wicked.
Need I remind you of what St. Paul says, "If by any
means I may attain unto the resurrection" (Ix. rSf renQSii'^
^^fi-om among the dead." And our Lord speaks of the
resurrection of the just in particular : and St. Paul speaks
plainly, "the dead in Christ shall rise first, then we which
are alive and remain shall be caught up together Avith him
in the air." My dear friends, when Christ comes, what a
startling spectacle will the world present ! Every grave
that contains a dead saint shall rend, while every grave that
contains the ashes of the lost remains unagitated. In every
churchyard one grave will open, and its dead, quickened by
an impulse from on high, will rise and meet the Lord in the
air ; but the grave that is next to it shall remain still un-
changed as it was before, and unmoved by what has taken
place beside it. So in a family, one person shall be snatched
away, it may be at midnight, and rise to meet the Lord in
I
ABSTRACT OF LECTUllES. 217
his resurrection-body, and another shall be left. The
mother shall remain, the child shall rise ; or the son shall
remain, and the mother shall be taken away. And then,
■when all Christ's dead saints are quickened and risen, and
all Christ's living saints have joined them, this globe, as I
explained to you from 1 Pet. 3 : 10, this earth, which is
stored with fire — for it is very remarkable that the last
geological discoveries prove the earth upon which we tread
to be a mere crust, the interior of which is full of liquid
fire, and for every one hundred feet that you go down into
the earth the thermometer rises one degree — will split into
a thousand crevices, from which those fiames will burst, and
the atmosphere which surrounds it, and is composed of gases
that are igneous, will ignite and wrap it in a shroud of
flame, and the earth, thus purified, will be the holy and the
happy spot on which the saints shall dwell and praise and
magnify the Lord.
The seventh vial, we are told, will be poured out upon
the air : I showed you, last Sunday evening, the proofs
and evidences of its action ; and I also stated that, while
there was its moral meaning in this, there was also a literal
fulfilment of it. And what do we see taking place all
around us ? Look at the potato blight which took place two
years ago ; after all that has been written on the subject, it
has not yet been explained : look at the rapid progress of
the influenza; all admit that it is not contagious, yet it
breaks out in one family and goes on to another family ; and
see, the cholera next threatens us with its ravages; it is
proved that it is not contagious, yet it breaks out in city
after cit}*, and country after country — sanitary improve-
ments, however right and however necessar}'-, cannot abso-
lutely prevent it. "What is the explanation of all this?
Look at our commercial difliculties — our perplexed mer-
chants — our political dislocations and Chartist excitements
— all admit that they ai*c puzzled for the explanation of
these things. I can explain it to you. The angel is pour-
ing out liis vial upon the air — the sprinklings arc on the
pen, the plough, the shuttle, on continent, and island, and
sea. Our commerce, and our agriculture, and our manu-
factures, and all in which we glory, feel its blighting
dews, and give token of feeling it more severely, and that
19
218 LECTURES OF DR. CUMMINa.
speedily. "Blessed is he that watchetli and keepeth his
garments," for "behold, I come as a thief."*
If time Avould only have allowed me, I Avould have de-
duced several lessons from all that I have now been stating,
which I think of great practical value ; but I have really
drawn so much upon your patience already, that I must
close, and I only regret that the time for my continuing
these lectures has passed away : the historical illustrations
I Avill not pursue further, but the beautiful and spirited
passages contained in the rest of the Apocalypse I shall
explain to my own peojjle, in my own church, on successive
Sunday evenings.f
We live in years into each of which is crowded the work
of centuries. A day brings forth now more than a century
brought forth in former times. Time rushes more rapidly
as it nears its final fall. The future appi'oaches us like a
rising tide, and destinies solemn as the soul, heaven, and
hell, stretch out before us. Are we not called on to ascer-
tain clearly our relative position ? What matters it that a
Millennium comes, if we shall have no share in it? What
avails it that its music shall be so sweet, its air so holy, and
its people so happy, and its translucency with glory so
bright, if we shall have no part in it ? There remaineth
indeed a rest ; but it is for the people of God. Is this our
class ? Do we belong to that consecrated family ? Are we
Christ's ? This is the question of questions. Our w^hole
interest is compressed in this. 0, leave it not unsolved
and unsettled. " Believe in the Lord Jesus Christ and thou
shalt be saved." " Look unto me, all ye ends of the earth,
and be yc saved." " Behold the Lamb of God, that taketh
aAvay the sin of the world." "Lord Jesus, to Avhom can
we go but unto thee ? thou hast the words of everlasting-
life."
Let me ask, therefore, when Christ shall come upon the
lightning's Aving or upon the eddying air, at midnight or at
* Tho earthquake of the seventh vial began in February, 1818, at Paris,
the centre of Europe. Watch and wait; we are now plainly under the
seventh vial.
f The second series of Apocalyptic Sketches has been published. These
contain the Apocalyptic sketches of millennial blessedness, and I trust will
prove as interesting to tho people of God as those, which were so much
appreciated, and more appreciated than they deserved, in Exeter Hall.
THE MOSLEM AND HIS END. 219
midday, if you feel that you ai*e prepared to meet him ? to
welcome him? to reign with him? He may come next
year, or in five, or in ten, or in twenty years : I cannot
say. It will be at an hour when ye think not. Near, how-
ever, his advent is — all chronology, and prophecy, and
history prove it — it is time, therefore, that we should set
our house in order, and have our loins girt, and our lamps
burning. Were I told that the end of this dispensation
would come to-morrow, I would not say to the tradesman,
leave your shop — or to the statesman, leave your cabinet
— or to the lawyer, abandon your desk — or to the soldier,
your sword ; but I would say to each and all, sit loose to
all that is worldly ; mingle not your affections with its
transitory elements ; let your iiand be here, but let your
heart be in heaven ; let your treasure be beyond the skies,
and your hope in glory. Like the eagle, touch the earth
only to eat and sleep, and rise again as quickly as possible,
and soar perpetually towards brighter realms, rivetting your
eye on a yet more glorious Sun. There is no obstruction
to the upward flight of him who has Christ, the password
of the universe. All things shall aid you. for God is with
you ; and when the gray wing of time siiall have winnowed
away things now seen, your eye, purified and strengthened,
will gaze upon a universe clear with light and pure with
Deity, no more to wane in age or wo — the Sabbath of the
world's long week — the reign of the church's long-absent
Lord.
THE MOSLEM AND HIS END.
In introducing to the reader the Moslem and his fivte, I
do not pretend to prophesy, but simjily to set forth what
seems, on grounds of the very highest probability, to be the
meaning of prophecy inspired by God, and written for our
instruction. I do not attempt to foretell : all I presume is,
to foi'th tell what is already predicted in the sacred volume.
I am an humble interpreter of what God has written, not a
220 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
prophet of Avhat God -will do. I speak to reasonable men;
I ask attention, not submission.
The application of Scripture to the events of the day de-
mands the utmost carefulness. We must take care to avoid
that presumption which sees the fulfilment of prophecy in
things in no just respect the echoes of ancient predictions ;
and equally also that incredulity, or rather skepticism, ■which
regards the \vord of God as in no degree applical)le to the
afiairs of men. I believe history is a continuous fulfilment
of prophecy ; its facts, the marks of Providence translating
the written into the actual — ancient texts into modern an-
nals. God inspired the prophet. He rules in the afiairs of
men, when all past utterances shall be seen embodied in
present facts, and all history point backward to its outline,
laid down in Scripture long before its materials were found.
Gibbon the skeptic, and Hume the atheist, and Alison the
Christian, and Macaulay, and innumerable others, will ap-
pear, reluctantly or the reverse, the most emphatic witnesses
to God in his word and in his Avorld. Every day this result
approaches us ; more and more does Scripture shine forth
in deepening lustre and beauty.
At the same time, it is important to remark, that, on the
great truths of Christianity, all true Christians of every
persuasion are as one ; on the interpretation of prophecy, it
is fair to state, they conscientiously differ. Yet in this field
there is a deepening agreement among most. Differ from
me or any other Christian as such, on that which is vital
and essential, and you so far denude yourselves of the claims
of Christians ; but should the reader differ from me on the
interpretation of prophecy, and what appears to me most
probable, I hope, in the spirit of brotherly love and of
Christian charity, we shall forgive our differences in things
confessedly difficult, and sometimes obscure, because of our
harmony in magnificent and glorious things, which are so
plain that a wayfaring man may not err therein.
The subject I propose to examine here is Turkey and
Mohammedanism, or the Moslem and his end. The subject
is, in the present crisis of Europe, fraught with the intens-
est interest. It absorbs many thoughts : all eyes are
directed to the sun-rising. Every newspaper reflects on the
West the startlin'jc li'dits that are breakino; forth in the East.
THE MOSLEM AND UIS END. 221
Every day's post is anxiously expected. Tiie Crescent is
occupyin<^ the thoughts, the hopes, the sympathies, and even
provoking tiie sorro\vs and the griefs of the best, the most
civilized and Christian of the human family. The Koran
has played so startling a part in the great drama of the past,
that we naturally and anxiously inquire what place it is to
occupy in the looming prospects of the future. I am here,
not to guess or to calculate politically, but to interpret, as
I may be able, inspired prophecy.
The two great prophecies, to which I would direct atten-
tion, arc contained in the Book of Daniel, and in the Book
of Revelation. These writings of Daniel and St. John are
as descriptive of things future as Genesis and Exodus of
things past. They arc given to be read, and why not to be
understood ?
The first one is in the eighth chapter of the Book of
Daniel, where we read the interpretation of what the seer
saw. It says : "The ram which thou sawest having two
horns are the kings of INIedia and Persia : and the rough
goat is the king of Grecia : and the great horn that is
between his eyes is the first king. Now, that being broken,
wdiercas four stood up for it, four kingdoms shall stand up
out of the nation, but not in his power. And in the latter
time of their kingdom, when the transgressors are come to
the full, a king of fierce countenance, and understanding
dark sentences, sliall stand up. And his power shall be
mighty, but not by his own power : and he shall destroy
wonderfully, and shall prosper, and practise, and shall de-
stroy the mighty and the holy people. And through his
policy also he shall cause craft to prosper in his hand ; and
he shall magnify himself in his heart, and by peace shall
destroy many : he shall also stand up against the Prince of
])rinoc3; but he shall be broken without hand." (Dan. 8 :
20—25.)
I do not waste your time by establishing and identifying
every symbol in the passage. I assume that the identifi-
cation of Bishop Newton, of Elliot and Mede, and many
other distinguished interpreters of prophecy, is correct.
Indeed, I have no doubt of it. First, the rara is represented
and proved by them to be the Persian power. The two
horns are two dynastic branches, or the Median and Persian
19*
222 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
kingdoms, shooting from one head, or grafted into the one
great national power. For fifty or sixty years, — that is,
from the accession of Cyrus to the Greek expedition under
Xerxes, — no national power, Avestward, northward, or
southward, was able to stand before it. This is the literal
history of the progress, the triumphs, and successes of the
Mcdo-Persian kingdom. The goat, that appears in the fifth
verse, as INIacedonian coins shall testify, Avas the Macedonian
power. Tlie notable horn — the remarkable or illustrious
horn between the eyes — has been identified successfully as
Alexander the Great, Avho, in tiie language of verses G and
7, rushed against the ram, broke his horns, or destroyed the
Persian kingdom, added the empire to his own, and so
swelled his imperial supremacy to the highest possible pitch,
and became politically "notable."
This great or notable horn broke down in its meridian :
that is, Alexander the Great died in his prime, and in the
midst of his victories, a melancholy proof that victory is
vanity. Tlie four horns that succeeded, on the division of
the empire, were the four Macedonian kingdoms, formed
under the four generals of Alexander, after the battle of
Issus. These are the outlines of the passage I have read.
Historical facts thus fill up prophetic outlines.
The subject that specially concerns me in this investiga-
tion, is the rise, locality, and date of Avhat is here called
" the little horn," described by the prophet in the most
graphic terms. It was, I conceive, the representative of the
Turkish and Mohammedan power. First, it springs out of
one of the four Macedonian kingdoms at its close. Second-
ly, the character of its chief is, "a king of fierce counte-
nance, disclosing dark sentences," or a military prophet,
propagating strange or portentous revelations. Thirdly, his
success, that he should Avax exceeding great towards the
south, the east, and the glory, or Jerusalem, used here in
all likelihood to represent the professing Christian church.
Fourthly, the effects of his progress shall be, that he shall
cast truth to the ground, cause craft to prosper, take aAvay
the daily sacrifice, and cast down the place of Jehovah's
sanctuary, that is, depress Christendom. Fifthly, he shall
stamp upon the mighty ones, or secular powers ; and the
reason of his judging them or visiting them in his wrath is
THE MOSLEM AND HIS END. 223
their apostasy, or the standing up against ' ' the Prince of
princes," that is, the Lord Jesus Christ; and at the end of
2300 years, according to the prophecy of this book, the
sanctuary shall begin to be cleansed, or, in the language of
the sixteenth chapter of the Apocalypse, the Euphratean
flood, as I shall show you by and by, will begin to retire,
or to evaporate and cease.
Having thus bricHy given the outline of the prophetical
record, let me now identify its features by stating tho
historical fulfilment of it, as attested in tlie annals of Asia
and Europe. The Turkish power arose cast of the Oxus,
in Chorassan, a territory of the Cyro-Macedonian horn or
kingdom. At that time a Turkman tribe revolted against
the Sultan of Ghizni, elected Toghrul Beg for its chief,
and asserted for itself the dignity, the position, and the
prestige of a ruling power, though comparatively then "a
little one." Toghrul was invited by the caliph at Bagdad
to help him against Persia. The Turkman chief obeyed
the request, and, in the language of the prophecy, advanced
southward. Toghrul was next raised to the dignity of chief
general of Islam ; afterwards he married the caliph's
daughter, and so became the powerful and fanatical mission-
ary of Mohammedanism through eastern lands, and Greek
Christendom ; and not only Judea, but Asiatic Christendom,
was gradually subdued by him.
Gibbon, the best commentator upon past prophecy, as a
daily newspaper is the best commentator upon existing and
fulfilling prophecy, thus describes the victorious progress of
this Turkman chief, in words almost the very echoes of
Daniel's prophecy: '-From the Chinese frontier in the
cast, he stretched his immediate jurisdiction to the west and
south, as far as the neighborhood of Constantinople, the holy
city of Jerusalem, and the s[)icy groves of Arabia Felix; "
or, in the language of prophecy, of which Gibbon was tho
unconscious expounder, he "waxed exceeding great toward
the cast, and toward the south, and toward the glory."
Daniel says, he waxed great to the host of heaven, cast tho
stars down and stamped upon them ; and the daily sacrifice
was taken away, and the place of the Lord's sanctuary was
cast down. Gibbon thus describes the Turkish progress :
"By the choice of the Sultan, Nice was preferred for his
224 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
palace, and the divinity of Christ was denied and derided in
the same temple in v.hich it had been first pronounced by
the first synod of Christendom. On the hard conditions of
tribute and servitude, the Greek Christians might enjoy the
exercise of their religion ; but their most holy temples were
profaned, and their priests and bishops were insulted." The
idolatry and apostasy of its professors having come to the
full, in the language of Daniel, they were thus punished by
the scourge, sent forth in the providence of God to chasten
the apostate and the guilty nations of Christendom. The
" dark sentences " of Daniel are thus translated by Gibbon,
though unconscious that Daniel had so written : " The
Koran is full of endless, incolierent rhapsody and fable,
sometimes crawling in the dust, at other times lost in the
clouds." The fierce countenance of this predicted king,
which is the picture of Daniel, is described by Gibbon, when
he uses the expression in his magnificent History, " He was
fierce as a Turk." " The Turks breathed still all the fierce-
ness of the desert." The fierceness of the Turk became at
last a proverbial expression throughout Christendom. The
angel in the prophecy asks how long this absolute eastern
domination shall last, and the answer given, as I have stat-
ed, is 2300 years. The first question is. What is the date
of the commencement of that epoch ? It cannot be previous
to the year 536 before Christ, because then the two-horned
kingdom was in existence. It cannot be after the defeat of
Xerxes in the year 480 before Christ, for then the chief
glory of the Persian empire was gone; but in 480 before
Christ, immediately previous to the last catastrophe of the
Persian empire, Xerxes made his triumphant march into
Macedon and Greece, and thus the tide of its glory was at
its full, just before its ebbing. Dating, therefore, the 2300
years at that period, the Crescent, if the date be correct,
should begin to wane in A. D. 1820 ; the Euphratean flood
should then begin to evaporate, and Turkey not he extin-
guished at a blow, but decline and die of gradual decrepi-
tude, exhaustion, and decay. By and by I will show you
how literally this has been fulfilled.
Having seen the picture of Daniel, let me show you, for
the sake of giving the full history, another portrait, by an
equally inspired penman, namely, St. John, in the ninth
THE MOSLEM AND HIS END. 225
chapter of the Apocalypse. He says : " The fifth angel
sounded, and I saw a star fall from heaven unto the earth :
and to him Avas given the key of the bottomless pit. And
he opened the bottomless pit ; and there ai'ose a smoke out
of the pit, as the smoke of a great furnace ; and the sun and
the air was darkened by reason of the smoke of the pit.
And there came out of the smoke locusts upon the earth :
and unto them was given power, as the scorpions of the
earth have power. And it was commanded them that they
should not hurt the grass of the earth, neither any green
tiling, neither any tree ; but only those men which have not
the seal of God in ihcir foreheads. And to them it was
given that they should not kill them, but that they should
be tormented five months: and their torment was as the tor-
ment of a scorpion when he striketh a man. And in those
days shall men seek death, and shall not find it ; and shall
desire to die, and death shall flee from them. And the
shapes of the locusts were like unto horses prepared unto
battle ; and on their heads were as it were crowns like gold,
and their faces were as the faces of men. And they had
hair as the hair of women, and their teeth were as the teeth
of lions. And they had breastplates, as it were breastplates
of iron ; and the sound of their wings was as the sound of
chariots of many horses running to battle. And they had
tails like unto scorpions, and there were stings in their tails:
and their power was to hurt men five months. And they
had a king over them, which is the angel of the bottomless
pit, whose name in the Hebrew tongue is Abaddon." That
is one class. Then, secondly, he describes another: "And
the sixth angel sounded, and I heard a voice from the four
horns of the golden altar which is before God, saying to the
sixth angel Avhich had the trumpet. Loose the four angels
which are bound in the great river Euphrates. And the
four angels were loosed, which were prepared for an hour,
and a day, and a month, and a year, for to slay the third
part of men. And the number of the army of the horsemen
were two hundred thousand thousand : and I heard the num-
ber of them. And thus I saw the horses in the vision, and
them that sat on them, having breastplates of fire, and of
jacinth, and brimstone : and the heads of the horses were as
the heads of lions ; and out of their mouths issued fire and
226 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
smoke and brimstone. By these three was the third part of
men killed, by the fire, and by the smoke, and by the brim-
stone, which issued out of their mouths. For their power is
in their mouth, and in their tails : for their tails were like
unto serpents, and had heads, and with them they do hurt."
—Rev. 9 : 1—19.
Now, first of all, in the chapter I have read, we have the
originator, or chief inventor or letter-loose of that smoke
which darkened, soon after that date, the whole eastern part
of Christendom. Secondly, we have th(! Saracen propagand-
ists of Mohammedan delusion, who carried their propagandism
up to a point limited in this chapter by the express declara-
tion of the inspired penman, and confirmed, as we shall see,
by facts. We have next the Turks, who took up the prop-
agandism of i\Iohammedanism at Bagdad on the Euphi-ates,
Avhere the Saracens paused, and carried it onwards through
the length and breadth of Asia and of Europe, till the victo-
rious Crescent stood over the ruins of the mistress of the
East, the noble and beautiful Constantinople.
Let us, then, see how exactly all this has been fulfilled in
history. First, we have the great chief or originator of the
system likened unto a fallen star. Both Bishop Newton
and jMr. Elliot, and the best commentators on prophecy,
admit that this refers to Mohammed : and the proof of it is not
a conjecture, but the perfect parallelism between it and the
man's biography and the historic records of modern Europe.
A JJrmamental star denotes a ruler, secular or ecclesiastical ;
a fallen firmamental star, a ruler degraded, degenerate, or
deposed. Mohammed was of the royal house of Koreish, the
governors of Caaba, who had its key as representative of
paganism. At the death of his father, Mohammed was left a
destitute orphan ; he fell from dignity to the earth ; he had
royal lineage, ancient but now lost greatness, and was re-
duced in the providence of God to the lowest level. He was
a star once resplendent in the firmament ; in the meridian
of rule he fell, and sunk, in the language of Gibbon, to be-
come the humble servant of a humble and a poor wido.w.
In other words, he lost the key of the Caaba, and the dig-
nities of its tenure, originally intrusted to his family in
former days, and he became the menial servant of a poor
widow, for whom he transacted business in the markets and
• THE MOSLEM AND UIS END. 227
in the chief places of merchandise in Damascus. Three
miles from Mecca there was a cave (Heira), into which Mo-
hammed, as the menial servant of this widow, was in the habit
of retiring; and, in the language of Gibbon, in that cave
" he held communion with the spirit of fraud and fanaticism,"
and from the pit, of which this cave was the meet type, he
ultimately emerged, professing to be the great missionary of
God, the chief recipient and proclaimer of his will through-
out the length and breadth of Asia and of Eastern Europe.
The chief persons in Mecca, the moment that he publicly
assumed the dignity of an apostle, denounced him as a pre-
tender, and he was expelled from the city; and that expul-
sion of Mohammed from the city is the date of Mohammedan
chronology, or the period called the Hegira, from which
they date their years, as we do from the Christian era, or
birth of our Redeemer.
" After an exile of seven years," says Gibbon, "the fu-
gitive was enthroned, the prince and prophet of his native
country ; tiie injustice of Mecca transformed the citizen of
Heira into the prince, the preacher, and the leader of the
armies of his country."
In the passage I have read, it is said a key was given him.
The accuracy of Apocalyptic symbols is most remarkable.
In the Koran it is said, Slohammed received the key of God.
The Koran says, "With the key, did not God give him the
title and power of a porter to open the gates of a paradise? "
And a form of renunciation of a ^Mohammedan in the Greek
church is still preserved, in which these words occur: "I
anathematize the teaching of Mohammed, who, they say, has
the key of paradise." And on tiie central stone of the arch
of the court of justice of the Alhambra there is at this mo-
ment in alto-relievo a large key, as the great symbol of the
Muhainmedau jurisdiction ; so much so that the key spoken of
in this chapter as given to the fallen ruler, is to a Mahomme-
dan very much what the cross is to a Christian. And thus
INIohammed, having lost the key of the pagan Caaba, which
his forefathei-s had, — that is, having lost princely authority
and jurisdiction there, — emerged from the abyss, having
held communion, as Gibbon says, with the spirit of fraud
and fanaticism, imbued with a spirit of fiery propagandisra,
and let loose over the length and breadth of Asia that smoke
228 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
which darkens mighty masses of the Eastern nations unto
this (lay.
Having seen the first originator, let me look at the first
propagandist missionaries of that smoke which he let loose
from the abyss. The Saracens Avere the first, the Turks
were the next. I may just remark, that the former call
themselves Saracens. The Arabs profess to be the descend-
ants of Sara ; hence they call themselves Saracens, because
they are ashamed to admit that they are Ishmaelites, or the
descendants of Hagar. They ought properly to be called
Hagarenes, as the descendants of Hagar ; but, professing to
be the descendants of Sara, the princess, they call them-
selves, as a term of dignity and honor, Saracens. The first
propagandists of this delusion were the Saracens ; and they
and their progress are depicted in symbolic language, ac-
cording to prophetic usage, which I think can be identified
with them and their history. The locusts, a very composite
and clearly symbolic creature, described in verses 3, 7, and
10 of the ninth chapter of the Apocalypse, are the repre-
sentatives of these missionaries.
Let us see the force of this by examining what the sym-
bol denotes. A fig-tree is a symbol of Judea ; a crocodile,
of Egypt; a willow, of Babylon; a wild ass, of Ishmael;
and a ship, of Tyre. But what is the locust a symbol of?
It is a composite one, and must denote a being composite,
and not a natural, literal, living animal. It must denote
some great moral feature embodied in those whom it repre-
sents. Now the locust, first, appears in swarms, an idea
almost inseparably connected with it. Secondly, its horse-
like aspect denotes that the invading swarms should in some
shape be associated with, or mainly consist of, cavalry.
Thirdly, the lion-likeness denotes resistless ferocity. And,
lastly, the scorpion-sting expresses the torment they should
inflict and leave behind them. The birth-place of these lo-
cust propagandists must be the East ; we read in Exodus,
'■ the cast-wind brought locusts" into Egypt. Yolney says,
" The locusts come from the deserts of Arabia;" and Arbe,
the Hebrew for an Arab, is almost the same as arba, the
Hebrew for a locust. Hence, as in Judges 6 : 5, " they
come as arba, or locusts." The scorpion, in the next place,
is always traced in Scripture to Arabia. Moses says, " the
THE MOSLEM AND HIS END. 229
wilderness, where fiery serpents and scorpions are." The
hoi'sc, I need not say, is popularly au Arab symbol. Arabia
is his home. Wc read of the Arab steed, as the model of a
horse. The whole zooloijjy of the symbol is strictly Arab.
15ut superadded to the symbol is this remarkable fact, that
tliey had tlie faces of men, the long liair of women, crowns
on their heads, and breastplates of iron ; or, translated into
literal language, the courage of men, the effeminacy of wo-
men, invulnerability, and triumph in battle. These were
not, I observe, the Goths, because the Goths had not the
faces of men ; they shaved off tlie moustache, and were
charged by Eastern nations with having effeminate faces.
They were not, in the next place, the Greeks and Romans ;
for long hair, another part of the symbol, was an abomination
to them. Pliny specifies the Arabs as wearing the mous-
tache on the upper lip, as having the long hair like women,
and having turbans like crowns : and in the Antar, a cele-
brated Arabic poem, it is said God has bestowed upon Arabs
four heavenly gifts :
" Turbans for diadems, tents for walls,
Swords for intrcnchincnts, and poems for laws."
The Koran specifics the breastplate of the Arab as the
gift of God. The locust is the national emblem of the
Ishmaelite, or Arab ; and it is related by Turkish writers,
that a swarm of locusts alighted on ^lohammed's head, and on
each of their "wings was written, "We arc the army of
God." We thus identify completely the symbol with the
Saracens, or the Arab IMohammedans.
Now, soon after the rise of the Mohammedan smoke from
the pit, we read that "the Saracens emltraced the new* and
startling imposture, and, imbued intensely with its fanati-
cism, they rushed in overwhelming crowds into the eastern
parts of Christendom."' Hallam says, "The religion of
Mohammed is essentially military. The people of Arabia
found in the law of their prophet, not a license, but a com-
mand, to desolate the world." Like locusts, they descended
in swarms into Europe, with all the ferocity of lions, Avith
all the fleetnoss of steeds, indulging in sensual license upon
earth, and expecting as their reward sensual enjoyments in
pai'adise.
20
230 LECTTJRES OF DR. GUMMING.
Having thus identified the syml3ol with the Saracens, let
us now turn to history, and read, as its comment upon the
inspired page, the history and deeds of the Saracens. In
the year 629 the Saracens first emerged from the desert ;
in A. D. 636 they burst forth like an impetuous torrent;
Damascus and Jerusalem fell successively before them ; and
that very year, the year 636, a mosque Avas raised on the
site of tbe illustrious temple of the Jew, and the cry of the
muezzin wafted by that au* which had once sounded with
the Psalms of David, and echoed with hosannas to David's
greater Son. In ten years, from 634 to 644, the Mohamme-
dans reduced 3.600 cities, destroyed 4,000 churches, and
built 1,400 mosques; and the illustration of the scorpion-
sting is in these words : "Ye Christian dogs, ye know your
choice ; the Koran, the tribute, or the cimeter." And
those that were spared, they tormented with the scorpion-
sting of the lawless tyranny which they exercised.
But the progress of these Saracens, you see in the sacred
page, had two limits : first, they were not to hurt any that
had the seal of God upon their foreheads ; and, secondly,
they were not to hurt the green grass, or any green thing.
Now, both of these are remarkably fulfilled. The first was
fulfilled in this fact : at the time that they went forth, accord-
ing to the language of Gibbon, "the Christians of the
seventh century had relapsed into the semblance of Pagan-
ism; their public and private prayers w'ere addressed to
images and relics that disgraced the temples of the heathen :
and the throne of the Almighty was darkened by a cloud
of martyrs, saints, and angels, the objects of popular vener-
ation." These idolatrous Christians, who were not sealed
of God, were the objects of the punishment of the locust
propagandists, commissioned not to hurt the secret and hid-
den saints of the Most High, but to visit with retributive
and penal judgments those who had turned the Christian
fivne into an idol temple, and wreathed around the brow of
a creature the glories that were the exclusive prerogatives
of God himself And secondly, they were not to hurt any
green thing. How remarkable it is, these are almost the
very words of the commission given to the Saracens :
"Destroy no palm-trees nor fields of corn : cut down no
fruit-trees nor green things." The Goths turned every
garden into a desert ; the Saracens sacredly preserved them.
THE MOSLEM AND UIS END. 231
And lastly, they had a king over them. The Goths and
Vandals adopted the religion of the country they conquered;
the Saracens carried their religion uith them, and their
subjection to Mohammed, their prince and prophet, ^^"as part
and parcel of their most solemn duty. Their mission Avas
not to annihilate the apostate Christians of the East, but to
torment them ; and the time of their tormenting them was
limited to one hundred and fifty years. Every time that
the Saracens tried to go beyond their limit they were
checked and repressed. Twice they were foiled in their
attempts at Constantinople. They invaded France ; and if
they had succeeded in subjugating that illustrious land,
Europe at this moment had probably been jNIohammedan.
"Charles Martel, the Hammer,"' the historian says, " beat
them back ; and Europe owes the existence of its liberties
and its religion to his heroic efforts." But as soon as they
had finished their commission, we find they immediately
paused. Ilallamsays: "Their conquests are less perplexing
than the cessation of them." Gibbon says : " The calm histo-
rian must study to explain by what means church and state
were saved from impending desolation." The true reason was
the prophetic record. The period of their action — that is,
of their inflicting torment on apostate Christendom — was
limited to one hundred and fifty years. Mark how true
this is.
In 612 Mohammed first proclaimed his mission. "Who,"
he said, " will lie my Grand Vizier? *' The answer given
by his chief follower was: "0 prophet! I am the man.
Whoever rises against thee, I will dash out his teeth, tear
out his locks and his eyes, and rip him up." In 755 the
dynasty of the Oramiades was supplanted in the caliphate
by the Abassides ; and thus they were rent into antagonistic
powers. In 702 another capital. Medina al Salem, further
east, was selected, and there the locust settled. Now hear
what the historian says. "The colossus," says Sismondi,
" that had bestridden the whole south, Avas now broken; and
this revolt did more for the deliverance of Europe from the
Moslem than the battle of Poictiers." And Gibbon says:
" War was now no longer the passion of the Saracens. The
luxury of the caliphs relaxed their nerves, and terminated
the progress of the Arabian empire." Now, sec how chrono-
232 LECTURES OF DK. CUMillNQ.
logically exact this was. In 612 was the commencement
of the mission of Mohammed ; 762 was tlic cessation of their
progress and their conquest. Deduct 612 from 7G2, and
you have 150 years, called in the Apocalypse 150 pro-
phetic days, — the precise period during which their action,
progress, and success were to continue.
We have thus seen wha^, is called in the Apocalypse the
first, or the Saracenic wo. Let us turn to the Turkish, or
the second wo, as it is therein called. Heretofore, Western
Christendom had been the chief suiferer from the Saracen ;
Eastern Christendom was no less guilty than the West ; and
hence on the very spot — and this will explain why we
identify Turkey and Mohammedanism with the Euphrates —
on which the Saracens had settled down, namely, Bagdad,
on the Euphrates, the angels of retribution were again let
loose, and the Turks marched forth, under Toghrul Beg,
their constituted head, to promote the secular power and
religious dominion of Islam, and to devastate Eastern Christ-
endom, as the Saracens before them had devastated Asia
and the West. Alp x\rslan, the valiant lion, crossed the
Euphrates, — the commencement of Turkish propagandism,
— in 1063, at the head of immense Turkish cavalry; and
began a career of resistless conquests over the whole of
Eastern Christendom, till he fell by the knife of the assas-
sin. Malek Shah succeeded, and spread his victories, in the
words of Gibbon, -'from the spicy groves of Arabia Felix
to Constantinople." The crusaders averted for a season the
downfall of the imperial city, but in so doing they consoli-
dated the forces of the Ottoman; and, at the end of the
fourteenth century, the Turks crossed tlie Danube; and
Gibbon says : " For the first time during a thousand years.
Constantinople was surrounded both on the Asiatic and the
European sides." The Apocalypse calls them, "the num-
ber of the armies of horsemen." Let us recollect, the
Western warriors were chiefly infantry, the Eastern war-
riors were chiefly cavalry. Gibbon sa3's : " The myriads of
Turkish horse overspread the Greek empire;" and Peter
the Hermit, and patriarch of Jerusalem, wrote to their breth-
ren in the West in these words : " We call for help ; the forces
of the Turks are fierce, and more numerous than the Sara-
cens ; they have in anticipation devoured the whole world."
THE MOSLEM AND HIS END. 233
Thus, the closer we read, the clearer we see the accuracy
of the Apocalyptic s^'^nibols, as wo proceed. It is said that
"out of their mouths cauic smoke and brimstone and fire."
At this very time, and primarily at the siege of Constanti-
nople, gunpowder and cannon were used, at least on a vast
scale, and a park of artillery planted with its devastating
thunders against Constantinople ; and it is in the veiy chap-
ter in which Gibbon describes the fall of the mistress of
the East, that he alludes to the mighty effects of the recent
and mysterious mixture of saltpetre, sulphur, and charcoal.
" Canst thou cast a cannon," said the Sultan Mohammed to
the founder, "large enough to batter down the walls of
Constantinople?" The cannon were founded at Adrian-
ople ; and soon the battlements and fortifications that had
stood the shock of a thousand years fell before the Ottoman
cannon. Gibbon says : " Double walls were reduced by the
cannon ; the Turks rushed in at the breaches ; Constanti-
nople was subdued ; lier empire was subverted, her religion
trampled in the dust, by the Moslem conqueror; " — or, in
the words of the inspired penman, by these three, the fire,
the smoke (or the carbon), and the sulphur, which issued
out of their mouths, Avas the third part of Christendom
made desolate.
Then it is added, as if still further to identify them :
"Their power," their lioima, that is, their jurisdiction, "is
in their tails." Wliat a strange expression is this! A
crown is a mark of a king, a diadem of an emperor, a sword
o.f a military prefect ; but a horse's tail, what can that be a
mark of? Notice again the accuracy of Apocalyptic sym-
bols. In one of the great battles of the Turks, the com-
mander lost the standard of his army ; he innnediateiy dis-
mounted, cut off his horse's tail, hoisted it on a pole, and
made tliat the rallying standard of the Turks. And wluit
is the fact to this day? A pasha of two, or a pasha of three
horse-tails, is now the description of Turkish dignitaries and
rulers ; and under the shelter of these, in past days, they
have not "hurt," as we render it, but "done injustice."
So accurately do we identify the words of prophecy with
the chapters of liistory ! Now, mark again : " Just as we
had specified exactly the time — 150 years — during which
the Saracens were to punish apostate Christendom, we have
20*
234 LECTURES OF DR. CUMMINO.
now the period fixed during wliich the Turks are to punish
the same, though more Eastern, apostate Christendom. The
time is appointed, — a day, a month, a year, and an hour.
Now, prophetically viewed, — for prophecy is just like
the map of a country, upon the scale of an eighth of an
inch for a mile. — you have here a day for a year, as you
may easily see by referring to various parts of Scripture ;
a month, 30 years ; a year, 365] years ; an hour, 15^-
days. Add all these together, and they amount to 39(J
years. 106 days. Now let us see how exactly this prophecy
was fulfilled in fact. The Turks started on their mission
from Bagdad, on the Euphrates, on Jan. 18th, 1057. On
May 29th, 1453, their last exploit was consummated, when
Constantinople fell. Deduct Jan. 18th, 1057, from May
29th, 1453, and you have the prophecy chronologically
proved by fact, or, as is proclaimed in the prophecy of the
Apocalypse, the duration, 396 years, 106 days.
Having seen the successes achieved by the Saracens, and
next by the Turks ; having seen how history sustains and
bears out the words of prophecy, I observe that the waves
of the Euphratean flood,, that overflowed its banks, and
spread from the spicy groves of Arabia to Constantinople,
are now retreating to their shores, or, rather, drying up in
their channels, and, since 1820, the flood has evaporated, day
by day ; and, as the Euphratean flood retreats from the
lands it has covered as by a deluge, and evaporates in the
sunshine, or rolls to its ancient channel, thousands of true
Christians, Armenians, and Greeks, not, as their fathers
have been, the worst specimens of a corrupt Christianity,
but, by the instrumentality of missionaries, regenerated,
illumined, and sanctified, begin to raise their heads, and to
aspire after that glorious supremacy when Christ shall be
King over all the earth, Constantinople may be Christian ;
yet it may not, and it must not, be Russian. St. Sophia
need not be under the auspices of the Czar, nor the Patri-
arch of Constantinople made a subject of the Patriarch of
St. Petersburgh ; and yet, the decay of Mohammedanism is
as plainly proclaimed in this sacred volume as any one fact
that can happen in history. During the sixth vial, which
began about 1820, the Euphrates is to be dried up, to make
way for the kings of the East. It would take too much
THE MOSLEM AND HIS END. 235
space if I were to quote all the proofs of this drying up
ever since 1820, when the prophecy tells us it was to begin.
The 2300 years of Daniel, I have already said, were to end
in 1820. At that period, then, Mohammedanism was to
begin to give way. Now, just read the facts of the case.
One interpreter, who wrote upwards of two hundred years
ago, accepted the symbol of the "drying up of the Euphra-
tes," as predicted umler the sixth Apocalyptic vial, as the
gradual exhaustion of the Mohammedan power; and almost
every prophetic student since that time has furnished
stronger, and, to my mind, absolutely conclusive, proofs of
the accuracy of this interpretation.
Another eminent interpreter stated, at least a hundred
years ago, that about 1820 the Turkish power would begin
its course of wasting and decay. That year, namely, 1820,
is universally accepted by prophetic students as the begin-
ning of the '"drying up of the Euphrates," or decadence
of Mohammedanism primarily in Europe, and progressively
over all Asia.
It was in 1820 that Ali Pasha, of Yanina, proclaimed
his independence, and hastened on the Greek insurrection.
The Suliot Greeks raised the standard of revolt in Novem-
ber of the same year against the Sultan. In April, 1821,
the Moreote Greeks broke out in insurrection. Northern
Greece, the Isles of the x-Egean Sea, and the Danubian prov-
inces revolted. In the Morca, the Greeks destroyed an army
of 30,000 Turks in 1823. By sea, the Greeks beat the
Turkish and Egyptian fleets in September, 1824. In 1827,
when the Greeks seemed for a season to give way, the com-
bined fleets of England, France, and Russia destroyed the
Turco-Egyptian fleets at the battle of Navarino, saved
Greece, and struck a blow against Turkey from which the
Ottoman Empire has never recovered. In 1828, Russia,
feeling insulted, dechued war, crossed the Balkan, entered
Adrianople, and Constantinople was saved only by the in-
terposition of the Western ambassadors. But, by this last
step, the exhaustion of Turkey, or "drying up of the Eu-
phrates," was very greatly increased. Servia, Wallachia,
and Moldavia were all practically detached from Turkey,
and, in the same yeai', the Turkish province of Algiers be-
came a French colony. As if the fanaticism of Turkey,
236
LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
which used to be its strength, had degenerated into folly
and infatuation, she massacred the Janissaries, her right
arm, and found this reform was her ruin.
Afterwards came the rebellion of Mehemet Ali, the Pasha
of Egypt; and such was his progress, that, if the Western
powers had not again interposed, Turkey had been annihi-
lated. .From 1821 to 1831, earthquakes, plague, and pesti-
lence almost depopulated Bagdad, INIecca, and Medina.
The Rev. Mr. Walsh, the British chaplain at Constantino-
ple, Avriting in 1831, says, as I have already quoted :
"Within the last twenty years, Constantinople has lost
more than half its population. Two conflagrations hap-
pened while I was in Constantinople, and destroyed 15,000
houses. The silent operation of the plague is continually
active, though not always alarming. It will be no exagge-
ration to say, that, within the period mentioned, from three
hundred thousand to four hundred thousand have been pre-
maturely swept away in this one city of Europe, by causes
which were not operating in any other, — conflagration, pesti-
lence, and civil commotion." I give these historic facts to
show that what the earliest students of prophecy were led to
infer, respecting the gradual exhaustion of the Ottoman
power, and the date of the beginning of its decline, has
been exactly fulfilled.
So striking are the prophetic dates relating to the
exhaustion of the Ottoman Empire, that one interpreter of
prophecy in 1840 fixed the period of its end at 1849, as
the earliest date ; and almost every student of prophecy, of
any note or name, ]Mr. Elliot, Dr. Keitli^ Mr. Bickerstaff,
and ]Mr. Birks, were unanimous in regarding its utter over-
throw as just at our doors, before the present invasion of
Russia. I do not say that our views of unfulfilled prophecy
are to regulate cabinets ; but it is interesting to us calmly
yet patiently to look on the present complications in the
East as the irresistible harbingers of the speedy extinction
of error ; and we almost regret that our great nation should
be dragged into war, as if to avert what we regard as a
foregone conclusion, prophetically viewed, and a consumma-
tion which, on other grounds, we would hasten rather than
delay. But we do not war to maintain the Crescent, but
to beat back from us and ours a powerful despotism. Stu-
THE MOSLEM AND HIS END. 237
dents of prophecy are neither fatalists nor prophets, but
investigators of those glimpses of the future which the Au-
thor of the Bible has been pleased to reveal.
The same prophetic record that thus indicates the near
downftill of Mohammedanism, informs us that this down-
fall is to make way for the march of ''kings from the
sun-rising."' Whether this refers to the Jews, as I believe,
or to the emergence of the ancient Oriental churches, is
matter of dispute. But this is plain, that the Christians of
the East will gain, in all respects, by the waning of the
Crescent, and prove a better obstruction to Russia's ambi-
tion than the Turks.
Now, it seems clear, from the words of Daniel's prophecy,
that the great Mohammedan delusion, — for such, as
Christians, we must regard it, — and its head and strength,
the Ottoman dynasty, will not l)e struck down by a blow,
as Russia expects, but must, if prophecy be true, gradu-
ally and progressively expire. It dies out; its waters are
literally evaporated ; it expires of age, decrepitude, and
decay. I do not believe, from pi'ophecy, that the Russian
eagle will be allowed to tear it to pieces, or to have the
SulUui's palace for its eyrie. I do not believe that it will
be suftered to disappear till the last pulse beats feebly in the
Mohammedan heart; but, whether there is peace or war,
Turkey is equally exhausted. If Russia persists in her
infatuated ambition, Turkey, as a jNIohammcdan power, will
be destroyed ; if Russia is compelled, before the bayonets
of Europe, to retire to the Kremlin, the Turkish exchequer
will ])e exhausted ; and, in either case, the prophecy of its
expii-y will l)e fulfilled. It will " be broken without hand."
The waters of the great Euphrates will gradually evaporate.
Our country, at this moment, in taking the part of the
Ottoman Empire, seems to me fulfilling a solemn and a
sacred duty. Treaty, pioniiie#compact, and the everlasting
duty of the strong to sympathize with the weak and the
oppressed, vindicate the conduct of our country. Nations
have duties and responsibilities, just as individuals have.
This protection does not imply that we approve of Moham-
medanism, or that we wish prosperity to the Crescent, or
that we have forgotten the barbarities of the Saracen, and
the fearful tragedies inflicted upon Europe by the Turk;
238
LECTURES OF DR. CUMMINa.
but, let our worst of enemies be injured and insulted, it ia
the duty of a Christian to interpose and protect him. Sup-
pose our worthy ecclesiastical "ruler," L)r. Wiseman, were
insulted in the streets of London by a mob, I should feel it
my duty to interpose and protect him. Because he dislikes
me, and I dislike his principles, I will not forget that I am
a man, and whatever is human commands my sympathies,
— still less, that I am a Christian, bound to sympathize with
suffering, as such, and heap coals of fire upon the head of
those that are opposed to me.
And, in the next place, it is most remarkable, that, if we
turn to the prophet Ezekiel, — and for one moment I will
do so, — we shall find that, while Russia is unconsciously
hastening the end predicted in prophecy, every act of her
conduct is reprobated and condemned. In the Hebrew
Observer^ written by unconverted Jews, there is a leading
article, of the date of February 10, 1854, most ably writ-
ten, called the "Eastern Question;" which states that
Russia is the Meshech and the Tubal, or the Ross, Moscow,
and Tobolsk mentioned in the Old Testament; and these
Jews say, that, if the Russian Autocrat should sweep away
Turkey, their existence as Jews in Turkey is gone. Under
the Crescent, they say they have had freedom, — under the
Autocrat, they have had cruelty, tyranny, and murder ; and,
if he should get the upper hand, they must leave the realms
of the East. And then what will be the case ? Erom the
sun-rising, as predicted in prophecy, the Jews will march
homeward, or fiee, like doves to their windows, and find no
rest for the soles of their feet till they arrive in Palestine,
— theirs by everlasting right, and the decree that cannot be
abolished. Now, in Ezekiel, chap. 88, we have this remark-
able prophecy, — so remarkable that it seems to me to refer
to these days : " Son of man, set thy face against Gog, the
land of Magog, the chief prirfce of Meshech and Tubal, and
prophecy against him," — (how like the names Moscow and
Tobolsk !) — " and say, Thus saith the Lord God ; Behold,
I am against thee, Gog, the chief prince of Meshech and
Tubal : and I will turn thee back, and put hooks into tliy
jaws, and I will bring thee forth, and all thine army, horses
and horsemen, all of them clothed with all sorts of armor,
even a great company, with bucklers and shields, all of
THE MOSLEM AND UIS ENl). 239
them handling swords : Persia, Ethiopia, and Lybia with
thcni ; all of them •with shield and helmet : Gomer, and all
his bands ; the house of Togarmah of the north quarters,
and all his bands : and many people with thee. Be thou
prepared, and prepare for thyself, thou, and all thy com-
pany that are assembled unto thee, and be thou a guard unto
them.'' — (How like what is taking place !) — " After many
days thou shalt be visited : in the latter years thou shalt
come into the land that is brought back from the sword, and
is gathered out of many people, against the mountains of
Israel, which have been always waste : but it is brought
forth out of the nations, and they shall dwell safely, all of
them. Thou shalt ascend and come like a storm, thou shalt
be like a cloud to cover the land, thou, and all thy bauds,
and many people with thee. Thus saith the Lord God ; It
shall also come to pass, that at the same time shall things
come into thy mind, and thou shalt think an evil thought"
— (suppose this addressed to the Autocrat :) — " and thou
shalt say, I will go up to the land of unwalled villages ; I
will go to them that are at rest, that dwell safely, all of
them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor
gates, to take a spoil, and to take a prey ; to turn thine
hand upon the desolate places that are now inhabited, and
upon the people that are gathered out of the nations, which
have gotten cattle and goods, that dwell in the midst of the
land. Sheba, and Dedan, and the merchants of Tarshish,
with all the young lions thereof, shall say unto thee, Art
thou come to take a spoil ? hast thou gathered thy company
to take a prey? to carry away silver and gold, to take
away cattle and goods, to take a great spoil ? Therefore,
son of man, prophes}' and say unto Gog, Thus saith the
Lord God ; In that day when my people of Israel dwelleth
safely, shalt thou not know it ? And thou shalt come from
thy place out of the north parts, thou, and many people
with thee, all of them riding upon horses, a great company,
and a mighty army : and thou shalt come up against my
people of Israel, as a cloud to cover the land ; it shall be in
the latter days, and I will bring thee against my land, that
the heathen may know me, when I shall be sanctified in
thee, Gog, before their eyes. Thus saith the Lord God ;
Art thou he of whom I have spoken in old time by my
240 LECTURES OF DR. CUMMINQ.
servants, the prophets of Israel, which prophesied in those
days many years that I would bring thee against them ?
And it shall come to pass at the same time, when Gog shall
come against the land of Israel, saith the Lord God, that
my fury shall come up in my face : for in my jealousy, and
in the fire of my wrath, have I spoken, Surely in that day
there shall be a great shaking in the land of Israel."
If this, then, relate — and it relates to the last days —
to Gog, and Magog, and Tubal, as the representative names
of Russia and its chief cities, then we see that Avhilst he
fulfils, as the axe in the hand of the Almighty, prophe-
cies that relate to the future, he is not thereby exempt from
punishment, or free from guilt, because he himself is a free
agent, though used in the hands of Him who has the com-
mand, and the control, and the government of all. Our
views of pi'ophecy are not to modify our duties. The Czar
may fulfil prophecies, and yet be most guilty. It is not
our business to fulfil prophecies, but to obey precepts. Be-
cause, for instance, it is predicted, "A Jew shall be a scoff,
a by- word, and a scorn,'' some men think they cannot do a
more Christian act than spit upon a Jew, extract his teeth,
maltreat him, and call him by bad names. Leave God to
fulfil the prophecies he has inspired ; you fulfil the duties
he has laid down, — justice, mercy, sympathy, and love.
It is most interesting to see the great panorama of the
future sketched in its minutest details on the sacred page,
and to witness autocrats from their thrones, and armies from
their barracks, rushing, in the nineteenth century, to fill up
the outline that God has chalked out upwards of two thou-
sand years ago. I know it will be said, Turkey is dying ;
it will soon be defunct ; why should we care for it ? I an-
swer, — If a man were dying of consumption, we should
not think of knocking him on the head and killing him
outright; on the contrary, we should try to get him
the warmest blankets and the most nourishing food, and
shelter him from the winds and the biting frost and the
storms, and protract his life to the latest period. And be-
cause Turkey is feeble, because it is dying of a consumption
that is obvious and inevitable, that is no reason why the
Autocrat should strike it down, and why nations that are
Christian should stand by and suffer the tyrant to inflict
the blow.
THE MOSLEM AND HIS END. 241
It is singular enough that the Turks themselves are
almost universally persuaded that the hour of their doom
has struck. At tiiis moment, the dead that die in the Eu-
ropean part of the city are carried across tiie Bosphorus
and buried on the Asiatic side, where they think they will
rest in peace. They have also a tradition amongst them-
selves, that 1854 ends the dynasty of the Turk in Europe ;
and Napoleon Bonaparte, in St. Helena, forty years ago,
with that extraordinary sagacity with which that great
man's mind was characterized, said : "In the natural course
of things, in a few years Turkey must fall to Russia. The
greatest part of her population are Greeks, who, you may
say. are Russians. The Powers it would injure — and who
cbuld oppose it? — are England. France, Prussia, and Aus-
tria. Now, as to Austria, it will be very easy for Russia
to engage her assistance by giving her Servia, and other
provinces bordering upon the Austrian dominions, reaching
near to Constantinople. The only hypothesis that France
and England may ever be allied with sincerity, will be in
order to prevent this. But even this alliance will not avail.
France, England, and Prussia, united, cannot prevent it.
Russia and Austria can at any time effect it. Once mistress
of Constantinople, Russia gets all the commerce of the
Mediterranean, becomes a great naval power, and God knows
what may happen. She quari'els Avith you, marches off to
India an army of 70,000 good soldiers, which to Russia
is nothing, and 100,000 caunille, Cossacks and others,
and England loses India, Above all the other pow-
ers, Russia is the most to be feared, especially by you.
Ilcr soldiers are braver than the Austrians, and she has
the moans of raising as many as she pleases. In bravery,
the French and English soldiers are the only ones to he
compared to them. All this I foresaw. I see into futurity
further than others, and I wanted to establish a barrier
against those barbarians, by re-establishing the kingdom
of Poland, and putting Poniatowski at the head of it as
king : but your imbeciles of ministers would not consent.
A hundred years hence I shall be praised, and Europe,
especially England, will lament that I did not succeed.
Wiieu they see the finest countries in Europe overrun,
and a prey to those northern barbarians, they will say,
21
242 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
' Napoleon was right.' " Now, at this moment the Greek
and Armenian Christians are, many of them, being trans-
Lited from darkness into light, and from the kingdom of
Satan into that of God's dear Son. At present, many of
the Greek and Armenian Christians, as a body, are mucli
less truthful, much more depraved, than even the worst of
the Talks ; but is it impossible to suppose that these de-
graded Christians shall be the subjects of a new and a noble
resurrection ? — that the Crescent shall not wane till it
disappears before the Cross? — that the moon of Islam
shall not set till it is merged in the rising splendor of the
Sun of righteousness? and a nation Christian to its core
takes the place of the Mohammedans, and forms a stronger
barrier to Russian ambition and Russian domination than a
dying, exhausted, and decrepid empire? But is the Mo-
hammedan himself impervious to light? The predicted decay
of Mohammedanism as a power may be the prophecy of her
resurrection as a Christian dynasty. Everybody knows
that Turkey of 1854 is not the same as Turkey in the days
of Napoleon Bonaparte. The paddle-wheel noAV disturbs
the silence of the Dardanelles ; the scream of the railway
whistle echoes from the walls of St. Sophia ; the printing-
press is busy in Constantinople ; our newspapers are read
by the Turks : a spirit of reform is sweeping the Divan
that will end in a grand reformation ; and, mainly through
the instrumentality of American missionaries, the Turks
begin to discover that the Christian faith is not that de-
graded and brutish superstition which has hitherto been em-
bodied in the miserable specimens that have dwelt in the
midst of them ; and the ancient savage law, which made it
deatii for a man who had become a Mussulman and was once
a Christian to revert to his Christianity again, is now abol-
ished ; and so late as 1846 the Armenian patriarch, accord-
ing to usage, sent in the names of thirteen Protestants to
the Sultan, praying that, according to custom, at his bid-
ding, they might be banished from the land. The Sultan
replied, that " henceforth no subject of his should suffer for
his religious opinions." The greatest persecutors in Turkey
for the last hundred years have not always been the Mo-
hammedans, Init, I say it with shame, the professed followers
of the Lord Jesus Christ have been too often intolerant ;
THE MOSLEM AND HIS END. 243
and at this moment the greatest advocates of liberty are
the Sultan and his Grand A'izier, not perhaps from prin-
ciple, but policy ; and a thousand times sooner, as far as
secular and personal freedom is concerned, let me fall into
the hands of the Sultan and his Grand Vizier, than into
the hands of Pio Nono and his Grand Vizier in Golden
Stjuare.
The prophetic decay of the Turk, as the bulwark of
Islam docs not necessarily mean the extinction of the
Turk, but the exchange of his errors for everlasting and
glorious truth. Not the destruction of the man, but the
departure of his superstition, may be the fulfilment of the
prophecy. This is the existing course of things in the
East. Christianity is not a religion of annihilation, but
of amelioration, elevation, improvement ; and when the
present dark and tainted streams of the Euphrates, that
liave so long overflowed the fair lands of Eastern Christen-
dom, shall have retired, or rolled back to their ancient
channels, or rather evaporated beneath tiie beams of the
unsetting sun, the lands from which those floods have ebbed
away shall be covered with the knowledge of the Lord, as
the waters of the ocean cover the channels of the great
deep; and that river whose streams make glad the city of
our God shall roll where the Euphrates had rolled its tide
before; and
" With finthcms of devotion.
Ships from the isles shall meet,
And pour the wealth of ocean "
lu tribute at His feet.
*' For Christ shall have dominion
O'er river, sea, and shore ;
Far .OS the eattle's pinion
Or dove's light wing can soai\"
What is called the "Eastern question" maybe lulled
for a little, but only to be resuscitated with more terrible
results. The source of its protracted agitation lies in the
moral condition of the East. The age, also, in which we
live has for its awful and its ominous motto, — " Overturn,
overturn, overturn." This is the partialdestiny of thegood ;
^Ye trust it is the doom of all that is unholy and evil.
What comes from God is sustained by him. What is evil
244 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
is -weak. The Crescent is doomed to wane ; the Tiara
trembles on the head of him that wears it ; and superstition,
in all its aspects, Avill soon flee before the approach of an
unsetting sun ; and while statesmen in their official ca-
pacity, and nations in their national capacity, are doing
their duty to the oppressed, and trying to stay the oppressor,
let us Christians do ours, by extending missions, circulating
God's word, urging onward into every land that blessed
kingdom Avhich conquers by truth, not arms, — reigns by
love, not force, — and is "not meat nor drink, but
righteousness and peace and joy in the Holy Ghost."
I grieve that our brave and heroic troops should be sent
to bleed and fall on distant shores ; I grieve over the ex-
istence of war; but I believe that the war now provoked by
the ambition of the Russian Autocrat, and accepted by our
country, is a Avar, not only of policy, but of justice, of
truthfulness, of mercy. The guilt rests on Russia. I pity
the infatuated Autocrat ; may his punishment be signal, or
his repentance speedy ! May his ambition meet with re-
ward ! May he learn in the Kremlin that justice and
truth and mercy are stronger than Cossacks, and more en-
during than armed battalions; and whilst our intrepid
soldiers on the land, and our brave sailors on the Baltic and
the Black Sea, inspired by a sense of the justice of their cause,
are battling not only for mercy to the oppressed, but for
protection to our dear native land, — whilst they, like
Joshua, are warring in the plains below, let us, like Moses,
lift up our hearts and hands, and pray that He " to whom
the shields of the earth belong " would uphold and bless
the banners of the right.
We have no sympathy with the Koran, no desire to up-
hold the Mosope, no wish to see the Osmanli strike deeper,
or extend wider, his withering foot-print. But Ave have no
less dread of autocratic tyranny, and of the lust of power.
Acquiesence in this matter would be connivance. It would
not avert ultimate war. We pray that the Prince of Peace
may soon spread his love and law over all the earth.
THE NEARNESS OF THE END.
We are led from all signs to infer that the meeting- place
of all the lines of God's providential work on earth is very
near. Paganism is breaking up all over the East. Mo-
hammedanism is in its death struggle, in vain attempting to
avert its waning. Popery is artificially propped up, and
preparing to take its exodus to eternal nigiit. The Ganges,
the Euphrates, and the Tiber are all gleaming with dawn-
ing glories of a nearing day. The Jordan, too, is not still :
it heaves with the hopes and expectations of Judah. Life
from the dead is reaching the hearts of buried nations, and
they rise in rapid succession to their feet; they only wnit
for the order, "Unloose, and let go free." We stand on
the margin of two ages ; we hear the dying moan of one, and
catch from afar the aAvakening anthem of the other. While
all that is holy, beneficent, and true is starting to its feet,
all that is infidel, superstitious, and evil, under the prince
of the power of the air, is mustering to battle. Satan puts
forth gigantic energies, — fraud, sophistry, cruelty, oppres-
sion ! The imprisonment of the Madiai, and Miss Cunning-
liame, and others, is proof of what he would do if he could.
The deadly and mischievous errors he sows, like tares in a
field, are proofs of his attempts to poison what he cannot
persecute, to disturb what he is unable to destroy. The
allies of Pio Nono and of Voltaire will yet coalesce against
Christianity, in order to keep back a swelling tide of light
and love, which sweeps them from an earth they have too
long polluted by their presence.
In the midst of this, let me add, the church and the peo-
ple of God are safe : they are enclosed in everlasting arms ;
the shield of Omnipotence is over them. They may pass
through a sharp niglit. but it will be a short one. 0, what
a solemn position do we occupy, if my conclusions be right !
The shadows of 1854 fall back into one eternity and forward
21*
246 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
into another. We stand on an isthmus washed by the waves
of time and wasted by the waters of eternity. The terrible
silence of the age is the suspensive pause, when nations hold
their breath before the shock comes. The sure and glorious
termination alone reconciles us to its pressure. Into a holy,
and happy, and blessed land the surf of the troubled present
rolls ; and our Aveary hearts will leap to that land as a babe
leaps to its mother's bosom.
Are we among the saints of God? It is time to lay aside
our ecclesiastical and sectarian quarrels. The very ground
on which we stand will soon be calcined by the last fire, and
the miserable Shibboleths which distract Christendom dis-
appear in smoke. All society is rending into two great di-
visions. By and by there will be no Jesuits, no Ultramon-
tanes, no Franciscans, no Tractarians, but out-and-out
Papists. By and by there will be no Churchmen, no Dis-
senters, but out-and-out Christians. All society is splitting
into two great antagonistic masses : every man is taking his
place ; and those Avhom we call, in courtesy, Tractarians —
who profess to hold the via media, neither going with us
nor with the opposite side — Avill find themselves like men
between two advancing armies, overwhelmed by the fire of
both. I say, society is splitting into two great masses. To
which do we belong ? To Christ — that is, the church of
the living God : or to Antichrist — that is, the great Apos-
tasy ? 0, let us not quarrel about lesser things ! There
is love enough on Calvary to lift the earth to heaven : there
is light enough at Pentecost to irradiate the wide world ;
there is warmth enough on the hearthstone of our Father's
house to make every heart glow with ecstasy and thankful-
ness ! Let us rather quench than kindle the fires of passion.
Let us pray that the temperature of our Christian life may
be so raised, that we shall neither see nor feel the petty
scintillations of angry quarrels.
" Between us all let oceans roll
Yet still, from either beach
The voice of blood shall reach.
More audible than speech, —
' We are one ! ' "
It is very remarkable that all the great times and dates of
prophecy meet and mingle about the year 1864. I do not
THE NEARNESS OF THE END. 247
say that that year will be the close of this world. I do not
prophesy ; I do not foretell the future : I only forth tell what
God has said ; but I do feel, that if 18G-4 be not the close of
the age that now is, and the commencement of a better one,
it will be a time unprecedented since the beginning, — por-
tentous, startling, and terrible to the enemies of God ; but
glorious, holy, and full of joyous scenes to the people of
God.
Clinton proves that the seventh millenary of the world
begins in 18G3. The Jews of ancient and modern times all
look to the beginning of tlie seven thousand years for their
Sabbalisfiios, or millennial rest. Is the end of the age so
near ? —
" The groans of nature in this netlier world,
Which heaven has heard for ages, have an end
Foretold by prophets, and by poets sung;
The time of rest, the promised Sabbath, comes.
Six tliousand years of sorrow have well nigh
FulfiU'd their tardy and disastrous course
Over a sinful world ; and what remains
Of this tempestuous state of human things
Is merely as the working of a sea
Before a calm that rocks itself to rest."
Thus all fingers point to this rapidly approaching crisis.
All things indicate that the moment that we occupy is
charged with intense and inexhaustible issues. Never was
man so responsible ! Never, in the prospect of what is com-
ing on the earth, was man's position so solemn ! But evil
shall not gain the day. Truth and love will emerge from
every conflict, beautiful, and clothed with victory. The
days of Infidelity and Popery are numbered. The waters
of evil must soon ebb from the earth they have soiled. The
approaching genesis will surpass in beauty and in glory the
old. The churcii of Christ will lay aside her soiled gar-
ments, her ashen raiment, and put on her bridal dress, her
coronation robes ; and the nations will look up to her in ad-
miration, earnest as the waves of the ocean rise up to the
bright full moon enthroned above them. The sunrise of
approaching day will strike the earth, and awaken its long
sdcnt hymns, and clothe creation's barest branches with
amaranthine blossoms. Poor Nature, that has so long
moaned like a stricken creature to its God from its solitary
lair, shall cease her groans and travail and expectancy ; for
248 LECTURES OF DR. GUMMING.
God •will wipe away her tears, and on her fair and beauti-
ful and holy brow, crowned and kingdomed, other orbs
in the sky, her handmaidens, will gaze in ecstasy and
thankfulness and praise. "And God shall wipe away all
tears from their eyes; and there shall be no more death,
neither sorrow, nor crying ; neither shall there be any more
pain. And there shall be no night there. For these say-
ings are faithful and true."
i
THE NEW HEAVENS
THE NEW EAETH
I
SERMON.
BY THE REV. THOMAS CHALMERS, D.L>., LL.D.
Nevertheless wo, according to his promise, look for a new heavens and
new earth, wherein dwelleth righteousness." — 2 Peter 3 : 13.
There is a limit to the revelations of the Bible about
futurity, and it were a mental or spiritual trespass to go
beyond it. The reserve which it maintains in its informa-
tions we also ought to maintain in our inquiries, — satisBed
to know little on every subject Avhere it has communicated
little, and feeling our way into regions which are at present
unseen, no farther than the light of Scripture will carry us.
But while we attempt not to be "wise above that which
is written,'" we should attempt, and that most studiously, to
be Avise up to that whieii is written. The disclosures are
very few and very partial, which are given to us of that
bright and beautiful economy which is to survive the ruins
of our present one. But still there are such disclosures —
and on the principle of the things that arc revealed belong-
ing unto us, Ave have a right to Avalk up and down, for the
purpose of observation, over the wiiole actual extent of
them.
What is made known of the details of immortality is
but small in the amount, nor are we furnished Avith the ma-
terials of anything like a graphical or picturesque exhibition
of its abodes of blessedness. But still somewhat is made
knoAvn. and Avhich, too, may be addressed to a higher prin-
ciple than curiosity, being, like every other Scripture, "prof-
itable both for doctrine and for instruction in righteousness."
In the text l)efore us, there arc two leading points of in-
formation, Avhich Ave sliould like succcessively to remark
upon. The first is, that in the new economy Avhich is to be
reared for the accommodation of the blessed, there Avill be
materialism, not merely new heaA'cns, but also a neAV earth.
252 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
The second is, that, as distinguished from the present, which
is an abode of rebellion, it will be an abode of righteousness.
I. We know historically that earth, that a solid material
earth, may form the dwelling of sinless creatures, in full
converse and friendship with the Being who made them ;
that, instead of a place of exile for outcasts, it may have a
broad avenue of communication with the spiritual world, for
the descent of ethereal beings from on high ; that, like the
member of an extended family, it may share in the regard
and attention of the other members, and along with them
be gladdened by the presence of him who is the Father of
them all. To inquire how this can be, w^ere to attempt a
wisdom beyond Scripture : but to assert that this has been,
and therefore may be, is to keep most strictly and modestly
within the limits of the record. For we there read, that
God framed an apparatus of materialism, which, on his own
surveying, he pronounced to be all very good, and the lead-
ing features of which may still be recognized among the
things and the substances that are around us, — and that he
created man with the bodily organs and senses which we
now wear, — and placed him under the very canopy that is
over our heads, — and spread around him a scenery, perhaps
lovelier in its tints, and more smiling and serene in the whole
aspect of it, but certainly made up, in the main, of the
same objects that still compose the prospect of our visible
contemplations, — and there, working with his hands in a
garden, and with trees on every side of him, and even with
animals sporting at his feet, was this inhabitant of earth, in
the midst of all those earthly and familiar accompaniments,
in full possession of the best immunities of a citizen of
heaven, — sharing in the delight of angels, and while he
gazed on the very beauties which we ourselves gaze upon,
rejoicing in them most as the tokens of a present and pre-
siding Deity. It Avere venturing on the region of con-
jecture to affirm, whether, if Adam had not fallen,
the earth that we now tread upon would have been the
everlasting abode of him and his posterity. But certain it
is, that man, at the first, had for his place this world, and,
at the same time, for his privilege, an unclouded fellowship
with God, and, for his prospect, an immortality which death
was neither to intercept nor put an end to. He was terras-
SERMON, BY DR. CHALMERS. 253
trial in respect of condition, and yet celestial in respect
both of character and enjoyment. His eye looked outwardly
on a landscape of earth, while his heart breathed upwardly
in the love of heaven. And though he trodc the solid plat-
form of our world, and was compassed about with its hori-
zon, still was he within the circle of God's fiivorcd crea-
tion, and took his place among the freemen and the denizens
of the great spiritual commonwealth.
This may serve to rectify an imagination of which wc
think that all must be conscious, — as if the grossness of
materialism was only for those Avho had degenerated into the
grossness of sin ; and that, when a spiritualizing process had
purged away all our corruption, then, by the stepping-stones
of a death and a resurrection, we should be borne away to
some ethereal region, where sense, and body, and all in the
shape either of audible sound or of tangible substance, were
unknown. And hence that strangeness of impression which
is felt by you, should the supposition be offered, that in the
place of eternal blessedness there will be ground to walk
upon ; or scenes of luxuriance to delight the corporeal
senses ; or the kindly intercourse of friends talking famil-
iarly, and by articulate converse together ; or, in short,
anything that has the least resemblance to a local territory,
filled with various accommodations, and peopled over its
whole extent by creatures formed like ourselves, — having
bodies such as we now wear, and fiiculties of perception,
and thought, and mutual communication, such as we now
exercise. The common imagination that we have of para-
dise on the other side of death, is, that of a lofty aerial re-
gion, where the inmates float in ether, or arc mysteriously
suspended upon nothing ; where all the warm and sensilde
accompaniments which give such an expression of strength,
and life, and coloring, to our present habitation, are attenu-
ated into a sort of spiritual clement that is meagre, and
imperceptible, and utterly uninviting to the eyo of mortals
here beloAv ; where every vestige of materialism is done
aAvay, and nothing left but certain unearthly scenes that
have no power of allurement, and certain unearthly ecsta-
cies, with which it is felt impossible to sjanpathize. The
hokiei's of this imagination forget, all the while, that really
there is no essential connection between materialism and
22
254 TUE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
sin ; that the world which we now inhabit had all the am-
plitude and solidity of its present materialism before sin
entered into it ; that God, so far, on that account, from
looking slightly upon it, after it had received the last touch
of his creating hand, reviewed the earth, and the waters,
and the firmament, and all the green herbage, with the liv-
ing creatures, and the man whom he liad raised in dominion
over them, and he saw everything that he had made, and
l:)chold it was all very good. They forget that on the birth
of materialism, when it stood out in the freshness of those
glories which the great Architect of Nature had impressed
upon it, that then the " morning stars sang together, and all
the sons of God shouted for joy." They forget the appeals
that are made everywhere in the Bible to this material
workmanship; and how, from the face of these visible
heavens, and the garniture of this earth that avc tread
upon, the greatness and the goodness of God are reflected
on the view of his worshippers. No, my brethren, the ob-
ject of the administration we sit under is to extirpate sin,
but it is not to sweep away materialism. By the convul-
sions of the last day it may be shaken, and broken down
from its present arrangements, and thrown into such fitful
agitations as that the whole of its existing frame- work shall
fall to pieces, and by a heat so fervent as to melt its most
solid elements may it be utterly dissolved. And thus may
the earth again become without form and void, but without
one particle of its substance going into annihilation. Out
of the ruins of this second chaos, may another heaven and
another earth be made to arise ; and a new materialism,
with other aspects of magnificence and beauty, emerge from
the wreck of this mighty transformation ; and the Avorld be
peopled as before, Avith the varieties of material loveliness,
and space be again lighted up into a firmament of material
splendor.
Were our place of everlasting blessedness so purely
spiritual as it is commonly imagined, then the soul of
man, after, at death, having quitted his body, would quit
it conclusively. That mass of materialism with which it
is associated upon earth, and which many regard as a
load and an incumbrance, would have leave to putrefy in
the grave without being revisited by supernatural power,
SERMON, 15Y DR. CHALMERS. 255
or raised again out of the inanimate dust into wbicli it
had resolved. If the body be indeed a clog and a confine-
ment to the spirit, instead of its commodious tenement,
then would the spirit feel liglitened by the departure it had
made, and expatiate, in all the buoyancy of its emancipated
powers, over a scene of enlargement. And this is, doubt-
less, the prevailing imagination. But why, tlien, after
having made its escape from such a thraldom, should it ever
recur to the prison-house of its old materialism, if a prison-
house it really be? Why should the disengaged spirit
again be flistcned to the drag of that grosser and heavier
substance, which many think has only the effect of weighing
down its activity, and infusing into the pure clement of
mind an ingredient which serves to cloud and to enfeeble it.
In other words, what is the use of a day of resurrection, if
the union Avhich then takes place is to deaden or to reduce
all those energies that arc commonly ascribed to the living
principle, in a state of separation ? But, as a proof of some
metaphysical delusion upon this subject, the product, per-
haps, of a wrong though fashionable philosophy, it would
appear, that to embody the spirit is not tlie stepping-stone
to its degradation, 1)ut to its preferment. The last day will
be a day of triumpli to the righteous, — because the day
of the re-entrance of the spirit to its much-loved abode,
where its faculties, so fur from being shut up into captivity,
will find their free and kindred development in such mate-
rial organs as are suited to them. The fact of the resur-
rection proves, that, with man at least, the state of a dis-
embodied spirit is a state of unnatural violence, — and that
the resurrection of his body is an essential step to the
higliest perfection of which he is susceptible. And it is
indeed an homage to that materialism, Avhich many are for
expunging from the future state of the universe altogetlier,
— that ere the immaterial soul of man has reached the ul-
timate glory and blessedness which are designed for it, it
must return and knock at that very grave where lie the
mouldered remains of the body which it wore, — and there
intpiisition must be made for the flesh, and the sinews, and
the bones, which the power of corruption has perhaps for
centuries before assimilated to the earth that is around
them, — and there, the minute atoms nmst be re-assembled
256 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
into a stnicture that bears upon it the form and the linea-
ments, and the general aspect of a man, — and the soul
passes into this material frame-work, which is hereafter to
be its lodging-place for ever, — and that, not as its prison,
but as its pleasant and befitting habitation, — not to be
trammelled, as some would have it, in a hold of materialism,
but to be therein equipped for the services of eternity, —
to walk embodied among the bowers of our second paradise,
— to stand embodied in the presence of our God.
There will, it is true, be a change of personal constitution
between a good man before his death and a good man after
his resurrection, — not, however, that he will be set free
from his body, but that he will be set free from the corrupt
principle that is in his body, — not the materialism by which
he is now surrounded will be done away, but that the taint
of evil by which this materialism is now pervaded will be
done away. Could this be effected without dying, then
death would be no longer an essential stepping-stone to
paradise. But it would appear of the moral virus which
has been transmitted downwards from Adam, and is now
spread abroad over the whole human family, — it would ap-
pear that, to get rid of this, the old fabric must be taken
down, and reared anew ; and that, not of other materials,
but of its own materials, only delivered of all impurity, as
if by a refining process in the sepulchre. It is thus that
what is " sown in weakness is raised in power," — and for
this purpose it is not necessary to get quit of materialism,
but to get quit of sin, and to purge materialism of its mal-
ady. It is thus that the dead shall come forth incorruptible,
— and those, we are told, who are alive at this great catas-
trophe shall suddenly and mysteriously be changed. While
Ave are compassed about Avith these vile bodies, as the apos-
tle emphatically terms them, evil is present, and it is well,
if, through the working of the spirit of grace, evil does not
prevail. To keep this besetting enemy in check is the
task and the trial of our Christianity on earth ; and it is
the detaching of this poisonous ingredient which constitutes
that for which the believer is represented as groaning earn-
estly, even the redemption of the body that he now wears,
and which will then be transformed into the likeness of
Christ's glorified body. And this will be his heaven, that
SERMON, BY DR. CHALMERS. 257
he will serve God without a strutigle, and in a full gale of
spiritual delight, — because with the full concurrence of all
the feelings and all the faculties of his regenerated nature.
Before death, sin is only repressed ; after the resurrection,
all sin will be exterminated. Here he has to maintain the
combat, with a tendency to evil still lotlging in his heart,
and working a perverse movement among his inclinations ;
but after his warflire in this world is accomplished, he will
no longer be so thwarted ; and he Avill sit him down in an-
other world, with the repose and the triumpli of victory for
his everlasting reward. The great constitutional plague of
his nature will no longer trouble him ; and there will be the
charm of a genial affinity between the purity of his heart
and the purity of the element he breathes in. Still it will
not be the purity of spirit escaped from materialism, but of
spirit translated into a materialism that has been clarified of
evil. It will not be the purity of souls unclothed as at
death, but the purity of souls that have again been clothed
upon at the resurrection.
But the highest homage that we know of to materialism
is that which God, manifest in the flesh, has rendered to it.
That lie, the Divinity, should have wrapt his unfathomable
essence in one of its coverings, and expatiated amongst us
in the palpable form and structure of a man; and that he
should have chosen such a tenement, not as a temporary-
abode, but should have borne it with him to the place which
he now occupies, and where he is now employed in prepar-
ing the mansions of his followers ; that he should have en-
tered within the vail, and be now seated at the right hand of
the Father, with the very body which was marked by tiic
nails upon his cross, and Avherewith he ate and drank after his
resurrection; that he who repelled the imagination of his
disciples, as if they had seen a spirit, by bidding them han-
dle him and see ; and subjecting to their familiar touch the
ilesh and the bones that encompassed him; that he should now
be throned in universal supremacy, and wielding the whole
power of heaven and earth, have every knee to bow at his
name, and every tongue to confess, and yet all to the
glory of God the Father, — that humanity, that substantial
and embodied humanity, should thus be exalted, and a voice
of adoration from every creature be lifted up to the Lamb
22*
258 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEAV EARTH.
for ever and ever, — does this look like the abolition of ma-
terialism, after the present system of it is destroyed ; or
does it not rather prove that, transplanted into another sys-
tem, it will be preferred to celestial honors, and prolonged
in immortality throughout all ages ?
It has been our careful endeavor, in all that we have
said, to keep within the limits of the record, and to offer
no other remarks than those which may fitly be suggested
by the circumstance, that a new earth is to be created,
as well as a new heavens, for the future accommodation
of the righteous. We have no desire to push the specu-
lation beyond what is written, but it were, at the same
time, well, that, in all our representations of the immortal
state, there was just the same force of coloring and the
same vivacity of scenic exhibition that there is in the Ncav
Testament. The imagination of a total and diametric op-
position between the region of sense and the region of
spirituality certainly tends to abate the interest with
which we might otherwise look to the perspective that is
on the other side of the grave; and to deaden all those
sympathies that we else might have with the joys and the
exercises of the blest in paradise. To rectify this, it is not
necessary to enter on the particularities of heaven, — a
topic on which the Bible is certainly most sparing and
reserved in its communicatians. But a great step is gained
simply by dissolving the alliance that exists in the minds
of many between the two ideas of sin and materialism ; or
proving, that, when once sin is done away, it consists with
all we know of God's administration that materialism shall be
perpetuated in the full bloom and vigor of immortality.
It altogether holds out a warmer and more alluring pic-
ture of the elysium that awaits us, Avhen told, that there
will be beauty to delight the eye ; and music to regale the
ear ; and the comfort that springs from all the charities
of intercourse between man and man, holding converse as
they do on earth, and gladdening each other with the be-
nignant smiles that play on the human countenance, or the
accents of kindness that fall in soft and soothing melody
from the human voice. There is much of the innocent,
and much of the inspiring, and much to affect and elevate
the heart, in the scenes and the contemplations of mate-
I
SERMON, BY DR. CHALMERS. 259
rialism ; and we do hail the information of our text, that,
after the dissolution of its present frame-work, it will again
be varied and decked out anew in all the graces of its
unfading verdure and of its unbounded variety, — that in
addition to our direct and ])crsonal view of the l)eity, when
he comes down to tabernacle with men, we shall also have
the reflection of him in a lovely mirror of his own work-
manship ; and that, instead of licing transported to some
abode of dimness and of mystery, so remote from human
experience as to be beyond all comprehension, we shall
walk for ever in a land replenished with those sensible de-
lights, and those sensible glories, which, we doubt not, will
lie most profusely scattered over the " new heavens and
the new earth, wherein dwcllcth righteousness."
II. But though a paradise of sense, it will not be a par-
adise of sensuality. Though not so unlike the present
world as many apprehend it, there will be one point of total
dissimilarity betwixt them. It is not the entire substitu-
tion of spirit for matter that will distinguish the future
economy from the present. But it will be the entire sub-
stitution of ri2:htcousncss for sin. It is this which signal-
izes the Christian from the Mahometan paradise ; not that
sense, and substance, and splendid imagery, and the glories
of a visible creation seen with bodily eyes, are excluded
from it, but that all which is vile in principle, or voluptu-
ous in impurity, will be utterly excluded from it. There
will be a firm earth, as we have at present, and a heaven
stretched over it, as we have at present ; and it is not by
the absence of these, but by the absence of sin, that the
abodes of immortality will be characterized. There will
both be heavens and earth, it would appear, in the next
great administration, — and with this speciality to mark it
from the present one, that it will be a heavens and earth
"wherein dwelleth righteousness."
Now, though the first topic of information that we educed
from the text may be regarded as not very practical, yet
the second topic on which I now insist is most eminently
so. Were it the great characteristic of that spirituality
which is to obtain in a future heaven, that it was a s})iritu-
ality of essence, then occupying and pervading the place
from which materialism has been swept away, we could not
260 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
by any possible method, approximate the condition we are
in at present to the condition we are to hold everlastingly.
We cannot ctherealize the matter that is around us, neither
can we attenuate our own bodies, nor bring down the slight-
est degree of such a heaven to the earth that we now in-
habit. But when we are told that materialism is to be kept
up, and that the spirituality of our future state lies not in
the kind of substance which is to compose its fi-ame-work,
but in the character of those who people it, this puts, if
not the fulness of heaven, at least a foretaste of heaven,
within our reach. We have not to strain at a thing so im-
practicable as that of diluting the material economy which
is without us ; we have only to reform the moral economy
that is within us. We are now walking on a terrestial sur-
face, not more compact, perhaps, than the one we shall
hereafter walk upon ; and are now Avearing terrestial bodies,
not firmer and more solid, perhaps, than those we shall
hereafter wear. It is not by working any change upon
them that we could realize, to an extent, our future heaven.
And this is simply done by opening the door of our heart
for the influx of heaven's affections, — by bringing the whole
man, as made up of soul, and spirit, and body, under the
presiding authority of heaven's principles.
This will make plain to you how it is that it could be
said in the New Testament, that the "kingdom of heaven
was at hand," — and how, in that book, its place is marked
out, not by locally pointing to any quarter and saying, Lo,
here, or lo, there, but by the simple affirmation that the
kingdom of heaven is within you, — and how, in defining
what it was that constituted the kingdom of heaven, there
is an enumeration, not of such circumstances as make up
an outward condition, but of such feelings and qualities as
make up a character, even righteousness, and peace and joy
in the Holy Ghost, — and how the ushering in of the new
dispensation is held equivalent to the introduction of this
kingdom into the world, — all making it evident that if the
purity and the principles of heaven begin to take effect upon
our heart, what is essentially heaven begins with us even in
this world; that instead of ascending to some upper region,
for the purpose of entering it, it may descend upon us, and
make an actual entrance of itself into our bosoms ; and that
SERMON, BY DR. CUALMERS. 261
SO far, therefore, from that remote and inaccessible thing
■which many do regard it, it may, through the influence of
the word which is nigh unto you, and of the Spirit that is
given to prayer, bo lighted up in the inner man of an in-
dividual upon earth, "whose person may even here exemplify
its graces, and whose soul may even here realize a measure
of its enjoyments.
And hence one great purpose of the incarnation of our
Saviour. He came down amongst us in the full perfection
of heaven's character, and has made us see that it is a char-
acter which may be embodied. All its virtues were in his
case infused into a corporeal frame-work, and the substance
of these lower regions was taken into intimate and abiding
association with the spirit of the higher. The ingredient
which is heavenly admits of being united with the ingredi-
ent which is earthly, — so that we who by nature are of the
earth, and earthly, could we catch of that pure and celestial
element which made the man Christ Jesus to differ from all
other men, then might we too be formed into that character
by which it is that the members of the family above differ
from the outcast family beneath. Now, it is expressly said
of him, that he is set before us as an example ; and we arc
required to look to that living exhibition of him, where all
the graces of the upper sanctuary are beheld as in a picture,
and, instead of an abstract, we have in his history a fiimiliar
representation of such worth, and piety, and excellence, as,
could they only be stamped upon our own persons, and
borne along with us to the place where he now dwelleth —
instead of being shunned as aliens, we should be welcomed
and recognized as seemly companions for the inmates of that
place of holiness. And in truth the great work of Christ's
disciples upon earth is a constant and busy process of as-
similation to their Master who is in heaven. And we live
under a special economy, that has been set up for the ex-
press purpose of helping it forward. It is for this in par-
ticular that the Spirit is provided. We are changed into
the image of the Lord, even hj the Spirit of the Lox'd.
Nursed out of this fulness, we grow up unto the stature of
perfect men in Christ Jesus, — and. instead of heaven being
a remote and mysterious unknown, heaven is brought near
to us by the simple expedient of inspiring us where we now
262 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
stand, with its love, and its purity, and its sacredness. We
learn from Christ that the heavenly graces are all of them
compatible with the wear of an earthly body, and the cir-
cumstances of an earthly habitation. It is not said in how
many of its features the new earth will differ from or be
like unto the present one — but we, by turning from our
iniquities unto Christ, push forward the resemblance of the
one to the other, in the only feature that is specified, even
that " therein dwelleth righteousness."
And had we only the character of heaven, we should
not be long of feeling what that is which essentially makes
the comfort of heaven. " Thou lovest righteousness, and
liatest iniquity ; therefore, God, thy God, hath anointed
thee with the oil of gladness above thy fellows." Let
us but love the righteousness which he loves, and hate
the iniquity which he hateth, and this, of itself, would
so soften and attune the mechanism of our moral nature,
that in all the movements of it there should be joy. It
is not sufiiciently adverted to, that the happiness of heaven
lies simply and essentially in the well-going machinery
of a well-conditioned soul — and that, according to its
measure, it is the same in kind with the happiness of
God, who liveth forever in bliss ineffable, because He is
unchangeable in being good, and upright, and holy. There
may bo audible music in heaven, but its chief delight
will be in the music of wcU-poised affections, and of
principles in full and consenting harmony with the laws
of eternal rectitude. There may be visions of loveli-
ness there, but it will be the loveliness of virtue, as seen
directly in God, and as reflected back again in family
likeness from all his children — it will be this that shall
give its purest and sweetest transports to the soul. In a
Avord, the main reward of paradise is spiritual joy — and
that, springing at once from the love and the possession of
spiritual excellence. It is such a joy as sin extinguishes
on the moment of its entering the soul ; and such a joy as
is again restored to the soul, and that immediately on its
being restored to righteousness.
It is thus that heaven may be established upon earth,
and the petition of our Lord's prayer be fulfilled, " Thy
kingdom come." This petition receives its best explanation
SERMON, BY DR. CHALMERS. 263
from the one which follows : " Thy will be done on earth
as it is done in heaven." It just requires a similarity of
habit and character in the two places, to make out a simi-
larity of enjoyment. Let us attend, then, to the way in
Avhich the services of the upper sanctuary are rendered —
not in the spirit of legality, for this gendereth to bondage ;
but in the spirit of love, which gendereth to the beatitude
of the affections rejoicing in their best and most favorite in-
dulgence. Tlicy do not work there for the purpose of
making out the conditions of a bargain. They do not act
agreeably to the pleasure of God, in order to obtain the
gratification of any distinct will or distinct pleasure of
their own, in return for it. Their will is, in fiict, identical
with the will of God. There is a perfect unison of taste
and of inclination between the creature and the Creator.
They are in their clement when they are feeling righteously
and doing righteously. Obedience is not drudgery, but de-
light, to them ; and as much as there is of the congenial
between animal nature, and the food that is suitable to it,
so much is there of the congenial between the moral nature
of heaven and its sacred employments and services. Let
the Avill of God then be done here as it is there, and not
only will character and conduct be the same here as there,
but they will also resemble each other in the style, though
not in the degree, of their blessedness. The happiness of
heaven will be exemplified upon earth, along with the vir-
tue of heaven — for, in truth, the main ingredient of that
happiness is not given them in payment for work ; but it
lies in the love they bear to the work itself A man is
never happier than when employed in that wliich he likes
best. This is all a question of taste ; but should such a
taste be given as to make it a man"s meat and drink to do
the will of his Father, then is he in perfect readiness for
being carried upwards to heaven, and placed beside the
pure river of water of life, that proceedeth out of the
throne of God and of the Lamb. This is the way in which
you may make a heaven upon earth, — not by heaping your
reluctant ofiers at the shrine of legality, but by serving God
because you love him ; and doing his will because you de-
light to do him honor.
264 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EAKTH.
And here we may remark, that the only possible convey-
ance for this new principle into the heart, is the Gospel of
Jesus Christ, — that in no other way than through the
acceptance of its free pardon, sealed by the blood of an
atonement, which exalts the Lawgiver, can the soul of man
be both emancipated from the fear of terror, and solemnized
into the fear of humble and holy reverence, — that it is only
in conjunction with the faith which justifies, that the love
of gratitude and the love of moral esteem are made to
arise in the bosom of regenerated man ; and, therefore, to
bring down the virtues of heaven, as well as the peace
of heaven, into this lower world, we know not what else
can be done than to urge upon you the great propitiation
of the New Testament, — nor are we aware of any expedi-
ent by which all the cold and freezing sensations of legality
can be done away, but by your thankful and unconditional
acceptance of Jesus Christ, and him crucified.
S E K M N .
BY THE REV. JOHN WESLEY, A. M.
" Behold, I make all things new." — Rev. 21 : 5.
1. What a strange scene is here opened to our view !
How remote from all our natural apprehensions ! Not a
glimpse of what is here revealed was ever seen in the
heathen world. Not only the modern barbarous, tincivil-
ized heathens have not the least conception of it ; but it
was equally unknown to the refined, polished heathens of
ancient Greece and Rome. And it is almost as little thought
of or understood by the generality of Christians ; I mean,
not barely those that are nominally such ; that have the
form of godliness without the power ; but even those that in
a measure fear God, and study to work righteousness.
2. It must be allowed, that, after all the researches we
can make, still our knowledge of* the great truth, which is
SERMON, BY THE REV. JOHN WESLEY, A. M. 2G5
delivered to us in these ^yords, is exceedingly short and im-
IDcrfect. As this is a point of mere revelation, beyond the
reach of all our natural faculties, we cannot penetrate far
into it, nor form any adequate conception of it. But it may
be an encouragement to those who have, in any degree,
tasted of the powers of the world to come, to go as far as
they can go ; interpreting Scripture by Scripture, according
to the analogy of faith.
3. The apostle, caught up in the visions of God, tells
us, in the first verse of the chapter, "I saw a new heaven
and a new earth ; " and adds, verse 5, " lie tliat sat upon
the throne said'' [I believe the only ^vords which he is said
to utter throughout the whole bookj, ••Uehold, I make all
things new."
4. Very many commentators entertain a strange opinion,
that this relates only to the present state of things ; and
gravely tells us, that the words arc to be referred to the
ilourisliing state of the church, Avhich commenced after the
heathen persecutions. Nay, some of them have discovered,
that all which the apostle speaks concerning the "new
heaven and the new earth'' was fulfilled when Constantine
the Great poured in riches and honors upon the Christians.
What a miserable way is this of making void the whole
counsel of God, with regard to all that grand chain of
events, in reference to his church, yea, and to all mankind,
from the time that John was in Patmos unto the end of
the world ! Nay, the line of this prophecy reaches further
still : it docs not end with the present world, but shows us
the things that Avill come to pass when this world is no
more. For
5. Thus saith the Creator and Governor of the universe :
" Behold, I make all things new; " — all which are included
in that expression of the apostle: "A new heaven and a new
earth." A new heaven: the original word in Gen^is, chap.
1. is in the plural number: and indeed this is the constant
language of Scripture ; not licnvcn, but heavens. Accord-
ingly, the ancient Jewish writers arc accustomed to reckon
three heavens ; in conformity to which, the apostle Paul
speaks of his being caught '' up into the third heaven."
It is this, the third heaven, which is usually supposed to be
the more immediate residence of God ; so far as any resi-
23
266 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
dence can be ascribed to his omnipresent Spirit, ^Yho per-
vades and fills the whole universe. It is here (if we speak
after the manner of men), that the Lord sitteth upon his
throne, surrounded by angels and archangels, and by all his
flaming ministers.
6. We cannot think that this heaven will undergo any
change, any more than its great Inhabitant. Surely this
palace of the Most High was the same from eternity, and
will be, -world without end. Only the inferior heavens are
liable to change ; the highest of which we usually call the
starry heavens. This, St. Peter informs us, " is reserved
unto fire, against the day of judgment, and destruction of
ungodly men." In that day, "being on fire," it shall, first,
"shrivel as a parchment scroll; " then it "shall be dis-
solved, and shall pass away with a great noise ; " lastly, it
shall " flee from the face of him that sitteth on the throne,
and there shall be found no place for it."
7. At the same time, "the stars shall fall from heaven; "
the secret chain being broken which had retained them in
their several orbits, from the foundation of the world. In
the mean while, the lower, or sublunary heaven, with the
elements (or principles that compose it), "shall melt with
fervent heat; " while "the earth, with the works that are
therein, shall be burned up." This is the introduction to
a far nobler state of things, such as it has not yet entered
into the heart of man to conceive, — the universal restora-
tion which is to succeed the universal destruction. For
" we look," says the apostle, " for a new heavens and a new
earth, wherein dwelleth righteousness." 2 Peter 3 : 7, &c.
8. One considerable difference there will undoubtedly be
in the starry heaven, when it is created anew : there will be
no blazing stars, no comets there. Whether those horrid,
eccentric orbs are half-formed planets, in a chaotic state
(I speakr on the supposition of a plurality of worlds), or
such as have undergone their general conflagration, they
will certainly have no place in the new heaven, where all
will be exact order and harmony. There may be many
other differences between the heaven that now is, and that
which will be after the renovation. But they are above
our apprehension : we must leave eternity to explain
them.
SERMON, BY THE REV. JOHN "SVESLEY, A. M. 267
9. We may more easily conceive the changes which will
be wrouglit in the lower heaven, in the region of the air. It
will be no more torn by hurricanes, or agitated by furious
storms, or dostructive tempests. Pernicious or terrifying
meteors will have no place therein. "We shall have no more
occasion to say :
" There, like a trumpet, loud aud strong,
Til J thunder shakes our coast :
While the red li<;lituiugs wave along
The banners of thy host ! "
No, all will then be light, fair, serene ; a lively picture
of the eternal day.
10. All the elements (taking that word in the common
sense, for the principles of which all natural beings are
compounded) will be now indeed ; entirely changed as
to their tonalities, although not as to their nature. Fire is
at present the general destroyer of all things under the sun;
dissolving all things that come within the sphere of its
action, and reducing them to their primitive atoms. But
no sooner will it have performed its last great office of de-
stroying the heavens and the earth (wliether 3^ou mean
thereby, one system only, or the whole fabric of the uni-
verse ; the difference between one and millions of worlds
being nothing before the great Creator) ; when, I say, it has
done this, the destructions wrought by fire will come to a
perpetual end. It will destroy no more : it will consume
no more : it will forget its power to burn, — which it pos-
sesses only during the present state of tilings, — and be as
harmless, in the new heavens and earth, as it is now in the
bodies of men and other animals, and the substance of trees
and flowers; in all which (as late experiments show), large
quantities of ethereal fire are lodged ; if it be not rather
an essential component part of every material being under
the sun. But it will, probably, retain its vivifying power,
thougli divested of its power to destroy.
11. It has been already observed, that the calm, placid
air will be no more disturbed by storms and tempests. There
will be no more meteors, with their horrid glare affrighting
the poor children of men. May we not add (though at
first it may sound like a paradox), that there will be no
more rain. It is observable, that there was none in para-
268 THE NEW HEAVEXS AND THE NEW EARTH.
dise; a circumstance which Moses particularly mentions,
Gen. 2: 5,6; "The Lord God had not caused it to rain
upon the earth. But there went up a mist from the earth,"
which then covered up the abyss of waters, "and watered
the whole face of the ground " with moisture sufficient for
all the purposes of vegetation. We have all reason to be-
lieve that the case will be the same when paradise is re-
stored. Consequently there will be no clouds or fogs, but
one bright, refulgent day. Much less will there be any
poisonous damps or pestilential blasts. There will be no
sirocco in Italy ; no parching or suffocating winds in
Arabia ; no keen northeast winds in our own country,
" Shattering the gi\aceful locks of yon fair trees ; "
but only pleasing, beautiful breezes,
" Fanning the earth with odoriferous wings."
12. But what a change will the element of Avater un-
dergo, when all things are made new ! It will be, in every
part of the world, clear and limpid; pure from all un-
pleasing or unhealthful mixtures ; rising here and there in
crystal fountains, to refresh and adorn the earth • ' with
liquid lapse of murmuring stream." For undoubtedly, as
there were in paradise, there will be various rivers gently
gliding along, for the use and pleasure of both man and
beast. But the inspired writer has expressly declared,
"there will be no more sea," Rev. 21: 1. We have rea-
son to believe that, at the beginning of the world, when God
said, ' ' Let the waters under the heaven be gathered to-
gether unto one place, and let the dry land appear," Gen.
1 : 9, the dry land spread over the face of the water, and
covered it on every side. And so it seems to have done,
till, in order to the general deluge, which God had deter-
mined to bring upon the earth at once, " the windows of
heaven were opened, and the fountains of the great deep
broken up." But the sea vv'ill then retire within its primi-
tive bounds, and appear on the surface of the earth no more.
Neither, indeed, will there be any more need of the sea.
For either, as the ancient poet supposes,
Omnis feret omnia tellus ;
every part of the earth will naturally produce whatever
SERMON, BY TUE REV. JOHN WESLEY, A. M. 269
its inhabitants want ; or all mankind will procure what the
whole earth affords, by a much easier and readier convey-
ance. For all the inhabitants of the earth, our Lord in-
foi'ms us. will then be ifntyy^hu, — equal to atif/els : on a
level with them in swiftness, as well as strength ; so that
they can, quick as thought, transport themselves, or what-
ever they want, from one side of the globe to the other.
13. But it seems a greater change will be wrouglit in the
earth, than even in the air and water. Not that I can be-
lieve that wonderful discovery of Jacob Behme. which many
so eagerly contcml for; that the earth itself, with all its fur-
niture and inhabitants, will then be transparent as glass.
There does not seem to be the least foundation for this,
either in Scripture or reason. Surely not in Scripture : I
know not one te.xt in the Old or New Testament which
affirms any such thing. Certainly it cannot be inferred from
that text in Revelation, 4 : G ; " And before the throne
there Avas a sea of glass, like unto crystal." And yet, if I
mistake not, this is the chief, if not the only Scripture,
which has been urged in favor of this opinion ! Neither can
I conceive that it has any foundation in reason. It has
been warmly alleged, that all things would be far more
beautiful if they were quite transparent. But I cannot ap-
prehend this : yea, I apprehend quite the contrary. Sup-
pose every part of a human body were made transparent as
crystal, would it appear more beautiful than it does now?
Nay, rather, it would shock us above measure. The sur-
face of the body, in particular, '-'the human face divine,"
is undoubtedly one of the most beautiful objects that can be
found under heaven : but could you look through the rosy
check, the smooth, fair forehead, or the rising bosom, and
distinctly see all that lies within, you would turn away from
it with loathing and horror !
14. Let us next take a view of those changes which we
may reasoua1)ly suppose will then take place in the earth.
It will no more be bound up with intense cold, nor parched
up with extreme heat ; but will have such a temperature as
will be most conducive to its fruitfulness. If, in order to
punish its inhabitants, God did of old
"Bid his angels turn askance
Tliis oblique globe,"
23* •
270 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
thereby occasioning violent cold on one part and violent
heat on the other ; he Avill, undoubtedly, then order them
to restore it to its original position; so that there will
be a final end, on the one hand, of the burning heat,
which makes some parts of it scarce habitable, and on the
other, of
" The rage of Arctos and eternal frost."
15. And it will then contain no jarring or destructive
principles within its own bosom. It will no more have any
of those violent convulsions in its own bowels. It will no
more be shaken or torn asunder by the impetuous force of
earthquakes; and will, therefore, need neither Vesuvius
nor Etna nor any burning mountains to prevent them.
There will be no more horrid rocks, or frightful precipices ;
no wild deserts, or barren sands; no impassable morasses,
or unfruitful bogs, to swallow up the unwary traveller.
There will, doubtless, be inequalities on the surface of the
earth ; which are not blemishes, but beauties. And though
I will not affirm that
" Earth hath this variety from heaven,
Of pleasure situate in hill and dale ; "
yet I cannot think gently-rising hills will be any defect, but
an ornament, of the new made earth. And doubtless we
shall then likewise have occasion to say :
" Lo, there his wondi-ous skill arrays
The fields in cheerful green !
A thousand herbs his hand displays,
A thousand flowers between ! "
16. And what will the general produce of the earth be?
Not thorns, briars, or thistles; not any useless or fetid
weed ; not any poisonous, hurtful, or unpleasant plant ; but
every one that can be conducive, in any wise, either to our
use or pleasure. How far beyond all that the most lively
imagination is now able to conceive ! We shall no more re-
gret the loss of the terrestial paradise, or sigh at that well
devised descrij3tion of our great poet :
" Then shall this mount
Of paradise, by might of waves, be moved
Out of his place, push'd by the horned flood,
With all its verdui-e spoil'd and trees adrift,
Down the great river to the opening gulf.
And there take root, an island salt and bare ! "
SERMON, BY THE REV. JOHN WESLEY, A. M. 271
For all the earth shall be a more beautiful paradise than
Adam ever saw.
17. Such will be the state of the new earth with regard
to the meaner, the inanimate parts of it. But, groat as this
change will be, it is nothing in comparison of that which
will then take place throughout all animated nature. In
the living part of the creation were seen tlie most deplorable
effects of Adam's apostasy. The whole animated creation,
^vhatever has life, from leviathan to the smallest mite, was
thereby made subject to such vanity as the inanimate crea-
tures could not be. They were subject to that fell monster,
DEATH, the contjueror of all that breathe. They were made
subject to its forerunner, pain, in its ten thousand forms ;
although "God made not death, neither hath he pleasure in
the death of any living." How many millions of creatures
in the sea, in the air, and on every part of the earth, can
now no otherwise preserve their lives than by taking away
the lives of others ; by tearing in pieces and devouring their
poor, innocent, unresisting fellow-creatures ! Miserable lot
of such innumerable multitudes, who, insignificant as they
seem, are the offspring of one common Father ; the creatures
of the same God of love ! It is probable not only two-
thirds of the animal creation, but ninety-nine parts of a
hundred, are under a necessity of destroying others in order
to preserve their own life ! But it shall not always be so.
He that sitteth upon the throne will soon change the fiice of
all things, and give a demonstrative proof to all his crea-
tures "that his mercy is over all his works." The horrid
state of things which at present obtains irill soon bo at an
end. On the new earth, no creature will kill, or hurt, or
give pain to any other. The scorpion will have no poison-
ous sting, the adder no venomous teeth. The lion will
have no claws to tear the lamb, ne teeth to grind his flesh
and bones. Nay, no creature, no beast, bird, or fish will
have any inclination to hurt any other ; for cruelty will be
far away, and suvageness and fierceness be forgotten. So
that violence shall be heard no more, neither wasting nor
destruction seen on the face of the earth. " The Avolf shall
dwell with the lamb" (the words may be literally as well
as figuratively understood), "and the leopard shall lie down
272 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
with the kid : they shall not hurt or destroy," from the
rising up of the sun to the going down of the same.
18. But the most glorious of all Avill be, the change
■which then will take place on the poor, sinful, miserable
children of men. These had fallen, in many respects, as
from a greater height so into a lower depth, than any other
part of the creation. But they shall " hear a great voice
out of heaven, saying, Behold, the tabernacle of God is
with men : and he will dwell with them ; and they shall be
his people; and God himself shall be their God," Rev. 21:
3, 4. Hence will arise an unmixed state of holiness and
happiness, far superior to that Avhich Adam enjoyed in par-
adise. In how beautiful a manner is this described by the
apostle : " God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes;
and there shall be no more death, neither sorrow nor crying ;
neither shall there be any more pain ; for the former things
are done away." As there will be no more death, and no
more pain or sickness preparatory thereto ; as there will be
no more grieving for or parting with friends ; so there will
be no more sorrow or crying. Nay, but there will be a
greater deliverance than all this, for there will be no more sin.
And, to crown all, there will be a deep, an intimate, an un-
interrupted union Avith God ; a constant communion with
the Father and his Son Jesus Christ, through the Spirit ;
a continual enjoyment of the Three-One God, and of all
the creatures in him !
THE FUTURE CONDITION AND DESTINY
OF THE EARTH.
BY EDWARD HITCHCOCK, D.D., LL. D.
Man has a stronger desire to penetrate the future than
the past. And yet the details of most future events are
wisely concealed from him. There are two, and only two,
sources of evidence from which he can obtain some glimpses
VIEWS OF DR. EDWARD IIITCnCOCK. 273
of what will be hereafter. The one is revelation, the other
analogy. So far as God has thought proper to reveal the
futures our information is precise and certain. But it does
not embrace a multitude of events about which we have
strong curiosity. By analogy is meant a prediction of the
future from the past. On the principle that nature is con-
stant, we infer what will be from what hiis been. If, how-
ever, new laws are hereafter to come into operation, or if
present agencies will then operate very diffci-cntly from what
they now do, it is obviou% that analogy can be only an im-
perfect guide. Still, in respect to n)any important events,
its conclusions are infallible. Judging, for instance, from
the past, we are absolutely certain that no living thing will
escape the great law of dissolution, which, thus far, apart
from the few exceptions made known to us by revelation,
Las been universal.
The future changes in the condition of the earth, as they
are taught us by revelation and analogy, or, rather, by
geology, will form the subject of my present lecture. And
my first ol)ject will be, to ascertain, if possible, precisely
what the Bible teaches us concerning these changes.
We find in the Scriptures several descriptions, more or
less definite, of the changes which this globe will hereafter
undergo. Some of them, however, are couched in the
figurative language of prophecy, and others are incidental
allusions : and concerning the precise meaning of such
descriptions, there will, of course, be a diversity of opinion.
There are, however, some passages on this subject as
literal and as precise in their meaning as language can be.
Now, it is one of the rules for interpreting language, that,
where a work contains several accounts of the same event,
the description which is most simple and literal ought to be
made the index for obtaining the meaning of those passages
which are figurative, or, on any account, o1)5cure. 1 shall,
therefore, select the passage of Scripture which all acknowl-
edge to be most plain and definite, respecting the future
destruction of the earth, and the new heavens and earth that
are to succeed, and first inquire into its precise meaning ;
after which, we shall be better prepared to ascertain what
modification of that meaning other passages of sacred writ
demand.
I
274 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
It needs but a cursory examination of the Bible to con-
vince any one that the description in the Second Epistle of
Peter, of the future destruction and renovation of the earth
and heavens, is eminently the passage first to be examined,
because the fullest and clearest on this subject. It is the
apostle's object directly and literally to describe these great
changes, apart from all embellishments of language.
There shall come, says he. in the last days, scoffers,
walking after their own lusts, and sayiufj, Where is the
jjromise of his coming ? for since tlte fathers fell asleep,
all things contimie as they loere from the beginning of
the creation. For this they willingly are ignorant of,
that by the word of God the heavens icere of old, and
the earth standing out of the water and in the water ;
whereby the world that then was, being overfloiced with
water, 2jerished. But the heavens and the earth, which
are now, by the same word are kept in store, reserved
unto fire, against the day of jndgincnt and jterdition of
ungodly men. But, beloved, be not ignorant of this one
thing, tJtat one day is with the Lord as a thousand years,
and a tlionsand years as one day. The Lord is not
slack concerning his jiromise, as some men count slack-
ness, but is long suffering to us-ward, not icilling that
any sliould perish, but tliat all should come to repentance.
But the day of the Lord ivill come as a thief in the
night, in the which the h,eavens shall pass arcay loith a
great noise, and the elements shall melt ruith fervent heat;
the earth, also, and the icorks that are therein, shall be
burned up. treeing, then, that all these things shcdl be
dissolved, ivhat manner of persons ought ye to be, in all
holy conversation and godliness ? Looking for and
hasting unto tlte coming of the day of God, tcherein
the heavens, being on fire, shall be dissolved, and tlie ele-
ments shall melt with fervent heat. Nevertheless, we,
according to his promise, look for new heavens and a
neiv earth, loherein dwelleth righteousness.
It would require too much time, and, moreover, is not
necessary to the object I have in view, to enter into minute
verbal criticism upon this passage. I will only remark that
the phrase translated the earth and the icorks that are
therein, might with equal propriety be rendered '-the earth
VIEWS OF DR. EDWARD HITCHCOCK. 275
and the works that are thereon; " and jet the difference of
meaning betweocn the two modes of expression is of no great
iniportnnce. Again, by the term heavens, in this passage, we
are evidently to nnderstand the atmosphere, or region imme-
diately surrounding the earth ; as in the first chapter of Gene-
sis, Aviiere he said that God called the firmament heavens;
the plural form being used in the Hebrew, though not in
the English translation.
What, now, by a fair exegesis, is taught in this passage
concerning the destruction and renovation of the world?
The following train of remark may conduct us to the true
answer to this inc^uiry :
In the first place, this passngc is to be understood literally.
It would seem as if it could hardly be necessary to present
any formal proof of this position to any person of common
sense, who had read the passage. But the fact is, that men
of no mean re[tutation as commentators have maintained
that the whole of it is only a vivid figurative prophecy of
the destruction of Jerusalem. Others suppose the new
heavens and new earth here described to e.xist before the
conllagration of tlie world. But these new heavens and
earth are represented as the residence of the righteous, after
the burning and melting of the earth, which, according to
other parts of Scripture, is to take place at the end of the
world, or at the general judgment. How strange that, in
order to sustain a favorite theory, able men shoukl thus in-
vert the obvious order of these great events, so ^clearly
described in the Bible ! Still more absurd is it to attempt
to fasten a figurative character upon this most simple state-
ment of ins})iration. It is, indeed, true, that the prophets
have sometimes set forth great political and moral changes,
the downfall of empires, or of distinguished men, by the
destruction of the heavens and the earth, and the growing
pale and darkening of the sun and moon. But in all these
cases the figurative character of the description is most
obvious ; while in the passage from Peter its literal charac-
ter is equally obvious. Take, for example, this statement :
Bij the word of God the heavens V'ere of old, and the
earth, standing out of the water and in the water;
trhcrehy the world that then was, being overflowed with
water, pc?-ished. But the heavens and the earth, which
276 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
are noni, by the same word are kept in store, reserved
unto fire, agnuist the day of judgment and lierdition of
ungodly men.
I believe no one has ever doulrtecl that the destruction of
the world by water, here described, refers to Noah's deluge.
Now, how absurd to admit that this is a literal description
of that event, and then to maintain the remainder of the
sentence, which declares the future destruction of that same
world by fire, to be figurative in the highest degree ! For
if this destruction mean only the destruction of Jerusalem,
or any other great political or moral revolution, the language
is one of the boldest fi.gures which can be framed. Who,
that knows anything of the laws of language, does not see
the supreme absurdity of thus coupling in the same sen-
tence the most simple and certain literality with the strong-
est of all figures ? What mark is given us, by which we
may know where the boundary is between the literal and
the metaphorical sense ? From what part of the Bible, or
from what uninspired author, can a parallel example be
adduced ? What but the strongest necessity, the most de-
cided exlgeniia loci, would justify such an anomalous inter-
pretation of any author ? Nay, I do not believe any neces-
sity could justify it. It would be more reasonable to infer
that the passage had no meaning, or an absurd one. But
surely no such necessity exists in the present case. Under-
stood literally, the passage teaches only what is often ex-
pressed, though less fully, in many other parts of Scrip-
ture ; and, even though some of these other passages should
be involved in a degree of obscurity, — and I am not dis-
posed to deny that some obscurity rests upon one or two of
them, — it would be no good reason for transforming so plain
a description into a highly-wrought figurative representa-
tion ; especially when by no ingenuity can we thus alter
more than one part of the sentence. I conclude, therefore,
that, if any part of the Bible is literal, we are thus to con-
sider this chapter of Peter.
In the second place, this passage does not teach that the
earth will be annihilated.
The prevailing opinion in this country, probably, has
been, and still is, that the destruction of the world described
by Peter will amount to annihilation, — that the matter of
VIEWS OP DR. EDWARD IIITCnCOCK. 277
the globe will cease to be. But, in all ages, there have been
many who believe that the destruction \vill be only the ruin
of the present economy of the world, but not its utter ex-
tinction. And surely Peter's description does not inii)]y
annihilation of the matter of the globe. He makes fire the
agent of the destruction, and, in order to ascertain the ex-
tent of the ruin that will follow, we have only to inquire
what effect combustion Avill have upon matter. The common
opinion is, that intense combustion actually destroys or
annihilates matter, because it is thereby dissipated. But
the chemist knows that not one particle of matter has ever
been thus deprived of existence; the fire only changes the
form of matter, but never annihilates it. When solid mat-
ter is changed into gas, as in most cases of combustion, it
seems to be annihilated, because it disappears ; but it has
only assumed a new form, and exists as really as before.
Since, therefore, biblical and scientific truth must agree, we
may be sure that the apostle never meant to teach that the
matter of the globe would cease to be, through the action of
fire upon it ; nor is there anything in his language that im-
plies such a result, but most obviously the reverse.
If these things be so, then, in the third place, we may
infer that Peter did not mean to teach that the matter of
the globe would be in the least diminislied by the final
conflagration. I doubt not the sufficiency of divine power
partially or wholly to annihilate the material universe. But
beat, however intense, has no tendency to do this ; it only
gives matter a new form. And heat is the only agency which
the apostle represents as employed. In short, we have no
evidence, either from science or revelation, that the minut-
est atom of matter has ever been destroyed since the origi-
nal creation ; nor have we any iiiore evidence that any of it
ever will be reduced to the uothingucss from Avliich it sprang.
The prevalent ideas upon this subject all result from errone-
ous notions of the eftect of intense heat.
In the fourth place, the passage under consideration teaches
us that whatever upon or within the earth is capable of com-
bustion will undergo that change, and that the entire globe
will be melted.
The language of Peter has always seemed to me extreme-
ly interesting. He says that the heavens [or atmosphere]
24
278 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
vjUI pass away with a great 7ioise, and the elements shall
melt w'tth fervent heat ; the earthy also, and the toorks
that are therein, shall be burned iq) ; looking for and
hastening unto the coining of the day of God, ivherein
the heavens, being on fire, shall be dissolved, and the de-
ments shall melt witJt fervent heat.
This language approaches nearer to an anticipation of the
scientific discoveries of modern times than any other part of
Scripture. And yet, at the time it was written, it would
not have enabled any one to understand the chemistry of
the great changes which it describes. But, now that their
chemistry is understood, we perceive that the language is
adapted to it, in a manner which no uninspired writer would
have done. The atmosphere is represented as passing away
■with a great noise, — an effect which the chemist would pre-
dict by the union of its oxygen with the hydrogen and other
gases liberated by the intense heat. Yet what uninspired
Avriter of the first century would have imagined such a
result ?
Again, when we consider the notions which then prevailed,
and which arc still widely diifused, why should the apostle
add to the simple statement that the earth would be burnt
up, the declaration that its elements would be melted ? For
the impression was, that the combustion would entirely
destroy the matter of the globe. But the chemist finds that
the greater part of the earth has already been oxidized, or
burnt, and on this matter the only effect of the heat, unless
intense enough to dissipate it, would be to melt it. If,
therefore, the apostle had said only that the world would be
burnt up, the sceptical chemist Avould have inferred that he
had made a mistake through ignorance of chemistry. But
he cannot now draw such an inference; for the apostle's lan-
guage clearly implies that only the combustible matter of
the globe will be burnt, while the elements, or first princi-
ples of things, will be melted ; so that the final result will
be an entire liquid, fiery globe. Such a Vv'onderful adapta-
tion of his description to modern science could not surely
have resulted from human sagacity, but must be the fruit of
divine inspiration.
And this adaptation is the more wonderful when we find
it running; through the whole Bible wherever the sacred
VIEWS OF DR. EDWARD HITCHCOCK. 279
writers come in contact with scientific subjects. In this re-
spect, the Bible differs from every other system of religion
professedly from heaven.
Whenever other systems have treated of the works of
nature, they have sanctioned some error, and thus put into
the hands of modern science the means of detecting the im-
posture. Tiie Vedas of India adopt the absurd notions of
an ignorant and polytheistic age respecting astronomy, and
the Koran adopts as infallilde truth the absurdities of the
Ptolemaic system. But hitherto the Bible has never been
proved to come into collision with any scientific discovery,
althouL^h many of its books were written in the rudest and
most ignorant ages. It does not. indeed, anticipate scien-
tific discovery. I3ut the remarkable adaptation of its lan-
guage to such discoveries, when they are made, seems to me
a more striking mark of its divine origin than if it had con-
tained a revelation of the whole system of modern science.
Ill tlie fifth place, the passage under con.sideration teaches
that this earth will be renovated by the final conflagration,
and become the abode of the righteous. After describing
the day of God. icherc'ui the heavens, beiiifj on fire, shall
be dissolved, and the elements shall melt with fervent
heat, Peter adds. Nevertheless, we, according to his prom-
ise, look for new heavens and a new earth, wherein,
dwellcth rifjhtcousness. Now, the apostle does not here,
in so man}' words, declare that the new heavens and earth
will be the present world and its atmosphere, purified and
renovated l)y fire. But it is certainly a natural inference
that such was iiis meaning. For if he intended some other
remote and quite different place, why should he call it earth,
and, especially, why should he surround it with an atmos-
phere ? The natural and most obvious meaning of the passage
surely is. that the fntnrc residence of the righteous will he
this present tcrrar/ncons globe, after its entire organic and
combustible matter shall have been destroyed, and its whole
mass reduced by heat to a liquid state, and then a new
economy reared up on its surfiice, not adapted to sinful, but
to sinless beings, and, therefore, quite different from its
present condition , — probably more perfect, but still the same
earth and surrounding heavens.
There are, indeed, some difficulties in the way of such a
280 THE NEAV HEAVENS AND TUE NEW EARTH.
meaning to this passage, and objections to a material heaven ;
and these I shall notice in the propei' place. But I have
given what seems to me the natural and obvious meaning of
the passage.
Such, as I conceive, are the fair inferences from the
apostle's description of the end of the world. Let us no\y
inquire whether any other passages of Scripture require us
to modify this meaning.
The idea of a future destruction of the world by fire is
recognized in various places, both in the Old and New
Testaments. Christ speaks more than once of heaven and
earth as passing away. Paul speaks of Christ as descend-
ing, at the end of the world, in flaming fire. And the
Psalmist describes the destruction of the heavens and the
earth as a renovation. Tlicy shall perish, says he, but
thou [God] shall endure ; yea, all of them shall vax old
like a garment, and as a vesture shall thou change tJiern,
and they shall be changed. In Revelation, after the
apostle had given a vivid description of the final judgment
and its retributions, he says. And I saro a new heaven and
a new earth ; for the first heaven and the first earth icere
jyassed cucay, and tliere ivas no more sea. lie then pro-
ceeds to give a minute and glowing description of what he
calls the New Jerusalem, coming down from God, out of
heaven. It is scarcely possible to understand the whole of
this description as literally true. We must rather regard it
as a figurative representation of the heavenly state. And
hence the first verse which speaks of the new heavens and
the new earth, in almost the same language which Peter
uses, may he. also figurative, indicating merely a more ex-
alted condition than the present world. Hence, I would not
use this passage to sustain the interpretation given of the
literal description by Peter. And yet it is by no means
injprobable that the figurative language of John may have
for its basis the same truths which are taught by Peter.
Nor ought we to infer, because a figure is built upon that
basis in the apocalyptic vision, that the simple statements of
Peter are metaphorical.
In the passage quoted from Peter, it is said. Nevertheless,
ice, according to his 'promise, look for neiv heavens and a
neiv earth, wherein dwelleth righteousness. Most writers
VIEWS OF DR. EDWARD IIITCUCOCK. 281
have supposed the apostle to refer either to the promise
made to Abraham, that his seed should inherit the land, or
to a prophecy in Isaiah, which says : Bihohl, I create new
heavens, and a new eurt/i, and the former shall not be
remembered, or come into mind. Bnt be you (jlad and
rejoice forever in that which I create ; for behold, I cre-
ate Jerusalem a rcjoicinrj, and her 2)cople a joy. And I
will rejoice in Jerusalem, and joy in my people ; and the
voice of weeping shall be no more heard in her, nor the
voice of crying. There shall be ^lo more thence an in-
fant of days, nor an old man that hath not filled his
days ; for the child shall die a hundred years old ; but
the sinner, beinfj a liundrcd years old. shall be accursed.
And they shall build houses, (tnd i/ihabit them ; and they
shall plant vineyards, and cat the fruit oj' them. They
shall not build, and another inhabit ; they shall not plant,
and another eat ; for as the days of a tree are the days
of my people, and mine elect shtdl long enjoy the works
of their hands. The wolf and the lamb shall feed to-
gether, and the lion shall eat straw like the bullock ; and
dust shall be the serpent's meat. They shall not hurt
nor destroy in all my holy niou/itain, saith the Lord.
Now, it seems higlily probable that the new heavens and
earth, here described, represent a state of things on the
present earth before the day of judgment, and not a heavenly
and immortal state ; for sin and death are spoken of as exist-
ing in it; both which, we are assured, will be excluded from
heaven. Hence able biblical writers refer this prophecy to
the millennial state, or the period when there will be a gen-
eral prevalence of Christianity. In this they are probably
correct. But some of these writers, as Low and Whitby,
j)roceed a step further, and infer that Peter's description of
Uie new heavens and new earth belongs also to the millennial
period : first, because they presume that the apostle referred
to this promise in Isaiah ; and secondly, because he uses the
same terms, namely, " new heavens and new earth.'" But
arc these grounds sufficient to justify so important a conclu-
sion? How common it is to find the same words and
phrases in the l^ible applied by different writers to different
subjects, especiallj' by the prophets ! Even if we can sup-
pose Peter to place the new heavens and the new earth be-
24*
282 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEAV EARTH.
fore the judgment, in despite of his plain dechiration to the
contrary, yet there are few ^Yho will doubt that the new
heavens and earth described in revelation are subsequent to
the judgment day, so vividly described in the verses imme-
diately preceding.
And as to the promise referred to by Peter, if he really
describes the heavenly state, surely it may be found in a
multitude of places ; wherever, indeed, immortal life and
blessedness are offered to faith and obedience. Isaiah,
therefore, may be giving a figurative description of a glori-
ous state of the church in this world, under the terms " new
heavens and new earth," emblematical of those real new
heavens and new earth beyond the grave, described by Peter.
And hence, it seems to me, the language of the prophet
should not be allowed to set aside, or modify, the plain
meaning of the apostle.
I shall quote only one other passage of the Bible on this
subject. I refer to that difficult text in Romans which
represents the whole creation as groaning and travailing to-
gether in pain until now ; and that it will be delivered from
the bondage of corruption into the glorious liberty of the
children of God.
I have stated, in a former lecture, that Tholuck, the dis-
tinguished German theologian, considers this a description
of the present bound and fettered condition of all nature,
and that the deliverance refers to the future renovation of
the earth. Such an exposition chimes in perfectly with the
views on this subject which have long and extensively pre-
vailed in Germany. And it certainly does give a consist-
ent meaning to a passage which has been to commentators a
perfect labyrinth of difficulties. If this be not its meaning,
then I may safely say that its meaning has not yet been
found out.
In view, then, of all the important passages of Scripture
concerning the future destruction and renovation of the
earth, I think Ave may ftiirly conclude that none of them
require us to modify the natural and obvious meaning of
Peter which has been given. In general, they all coincide
with the views presented by that apostle ; or if, in any case,
there is a slight apparent difference, the figurative character
of all other statements besides his require us to receive his
VIEWS OF DR. EDWARD HITCUCOCK. 283
views as the true standard, and to modify the meaning of
the others. We may, therefore, conclude that the Bible
does plainly and distinctly teach us that this earth will
hereafter be burned up ; in other words, that all upon or
within it. capable of combustion, will be consumed, and the
entire mass, the elements, without the loss of one particle
of the matter now existing;, will be melted ; and then, that
iJm \rorld^ f/ius: piirijicd from the vontdininntion of sin,
and surrounded by a )fcu- atmosphere, or heavens, and
adapted in all respects to the nature and wants of spirit-
ual and sinless beinys, will become the ?'esidence of the
righteous. Of the precise nature of that new dispensation,
and of the mode of existence there, the Scriptures are in-
deed silent. But that, like the present world, it will be
material, — that there will be a solid globe, and a transparent
expanse around it, — seems most clearly indicated in the
sacred record.
The wide-spread opinion that heaven will be a sort of
airy Elysium, where the present laws of nature will be un-
known, and where matter, if it exist, can exist only in its
most attenuated form, is a notion to which the Bible is a
stranger.
The resurrection of the body, as well as the language of
Peter, most clearly show us that the future world will be a
solid, material world, purified, indeed, and beautified, but
retaining its materialism.
Let us now see whether, in coming to these conclusions
from Scripture language, we are influenced by scientific
considerations, or whether many discerning fninds have
not, in all ages, attached a similar meaning to the inspired
record.
Among all nations, the history of whose opinions have
come down to us, and especially among the Greeks, the
belief has prevailed that a catastrophe by fire awaited the
earth, corresponding to, or rather the counterpart of, a pre-
vious destruction by water. These catastrophes they de-
nominated the cataclysm, or destruction by -water, and the
ecj/yrosis, or destruction by fire. The ruin was supposed
to be followed, in each case, by the regeneration of the earth
in an improved form, which gradually deteriorated ; the first
age after the catastrophe constituting the golden age ; the
284 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
next, the silver age ; and so on to the iron age, which pre-
ceded another cataclysm, or ecpyrosis. The intervals be-
tween these convulsions were rea-ardcd as of various leno-ths,
but all of them of great duration.
These opinions the Greeks derived from the Egyptians.
The belief in the future conflagration of the world also
prevailed among the ancient Jews. Philo says that "'the
earth, after this purification, shall appear new again, even
as it was after its first creation." — De Vita 3Iosis, torn. ii.
Among the Jews, these ideas may have been, in part, derived
from the Old Testament ; though its language, as we have
seen, is far less explicit on this subject than the New Testa-
ment. That distinguished Christian writers, in all ages
since the advent of Christ, have understood tlie language of
Peter as we have explained it, would be easy to show. I
have room, however, to quote only the opinions of a few
distinguished modern writers.
Dr. Knapp, one of the most scientific and judicious of
theologians, thus remarks upon the passage of Peter already
examined: "It cannot be thought that what is here said
respecting the burning of the w^orld is to be understood
figuratively, as Wettstein supposes ; because the fire is here
too directly opposed to the literal Avater of the flood to be so
understood. It is the object of Peter to refute the boast of
scoffers, that all things had remained unchanged from the
beginning, and that, therefore, no day of judgment and no
end of the world could be expected. And so he says that
originally, at the time of the creation, the whole earth was
covered and overflowed with water (Gen. i.), and that from
hence the dry land appeared ; and the same was true at the
time of Noah's flood. Eut there is yet to come a great fire
revolution. The heavens and the earth (the earth with its
atmosphere) are reserved, or kept in store, for the fire, until
the day of judgment (v. 10). At that time the heavens
will pass away with a great noise, and the elements will be
dissolved by fervent heat, and everything upon the earth
will be burnt up. The same thing is taught in verse 12.
But in verse lo Peter gives the design of this revolution.
It will not be anniliilation, but we expect a new heavens and
a new earth, wherein dwelleth righteousness, i. e., an entirely
new, altered, and beautiful abode for man, to be built from
VIEWS OF DR. EDAVARD niTCHCOCK. 285
the ruins of his former dwelling-place, as the future habita-
tion of the pious (Rev. 21: 1). This will be very much
in the same way as a more perfect and an immortal body
will be reared from the body which we now possess.*' —
Thcoh)(jy, vol. ii., p. 049.
From Dr. Chalmers my extracts will be longer than arc
necessary to show his opinion upon this subject, because he
felicitously refutes certain erroneous ideas, widely prevalent,
respecting matter and spirit. [The extract is from Chal-
mers' Sermon, on a previous page, and so here omitted.]
" The glorification of the visible creation," says Tholuck,
the distinguished German divine, " is more definitely de-
clared in Rev. 21 : 1, although it must be borne in mind
that a prophetic vision is there described. Still more defi-
nitely do we find the l^elief of a transformation of the ma-
terial world declared in 2 Peter 3 : 7—12. The idea that
the perfected kingdom of Christ is to be transferred to
heaven is properly a modern notion. According to Paul
and the Revelation of John, the kingdom of God is placed
upon the earth, in so fiir as this itself has part in the uni-
versal transformation. Tliis exposition has been adopted
and defended by most of the oldest commentators ; for ex-
ami»le, Chrysostom, Theodoret, Hieronynms, Augustine,
Luther, Koppe, and others. Luther says, in his lively
way : ' God will make, not the earth only, but the heavens
also, much more beautiful than they are at present. At
present we see the world in its working clothes ; but here-
after it will be arrayed in its Easter and Whitsuntide robes.' "
" I cannot but feel astonishment," says Dr. John Pye
Smith, " that any serious and intelligent man should have
iiis mind fettered with the common, I might call it the vul-
gar, notion of a proper destruction of the earth ; and some
seem to extend the notion to the whole solar system, and
even the entire material universe ; applying the idea of an
extinction of being, a reducing to nothingness. Tliis notion
has, indeed, been often used to aid imjuissioned description
in sermons and poetry ; and thus it has gained so strong a
hold upon the feelings of many pious persons, that they
have made it an article of their faith. But I confess my-
self unable to find an}"- evidence for it in nature, reason, or
Scripture. Wc can discover nothing like destruction in the
286 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
matter of the universe as subjected to our senses. Masses
arc disintegrated, forms are changed, compounds are decom-
posed ; but not an atom is annihilated. Neither have we
the shadow of reason to assert that mind, the seat of intelli-
gence, ever was, or ever will be, in a single instance, de-
stroyed. The declaration in Sci'ipture that the heavens and
the earth shall flee away, and no more place be found
for theni^ is undoubtedly figurative, and denotes the most
momentous changes in the scenes of the divine moral gov-
ernment. If it be the purpose of God that the earth shall
be subjected to a total conflagration, we perfectly well know
that the instruments of such an event lie close at hand, and
Avait only the divine volition to burst out in a moment. But
that Avould not be a destruction ; it would be a mere change
of form, and. no doubt, would be subservient to the most
glorious results. TFe, according to his promise, look
for neiD heavens and a new earth, wherein dweUtth ri(jht-
eoHsnessy — Led 7 ires on Geolorjy and Revelation,"^. IGl
(4th London edition).
Says Dr. Griffin, one of the ablest of the American divines:
" A question here arises, whether the new heavens and new
earth shall be created out of the ruins of the old ; that is,
whether the old will be renovated and restored in a more
glorious form, or whether the old Avill be annihilated, and
the new made out of nothing. The idea of the annihila-
tion of so many immense and glorious bodies, organized
with inimitable skill, and declarative of infinite wisdom, is
gloomy and forbidding. Indeed, it is scarcely credible that
God should annihilate any of his works, much less so many
and so glorious works. It ought not to be believed with-
out the most decisive proof On the other hand, it is a most
animating thought that this visible creation, which sin has
marred, which the polluted breath of men and devils has
defiled, and which by sin will be reduced to utter ruin, will
be restored by our Jesus, will arise from its ruins in ten-fold
splendor, and shine with more illustrious glory tlian before
it was defaced by sin.
" After a laborious and anxious search on this interestinjz
subject, I must pronounce the latter to be my decided opin-
ion. And the same, I find, has been the more common
opinion of the Christian fathers, of the divines of the Re-
VIEWS OF DR. EDWAKD niTCnCOCK. 287
formation, and of the critics and annotators who have since
flourished. I coukl produce on this side a catalogue of
names \vhich Avould convince you that this has certainly been
the common opinion of the Christian church in every age,
as it Avas also of the Jewish.
" The words which are employed to express the destruc-
tion ot" the world do not necessarily imply annihilation. Is
it said that the world shall perish? The same word is used
to express the ancient destruction of the world by the
flood, when certainly it was not annihilated. Is it said that
tlie world shall have an end, and be no more ? This may
be understood only of the present form and organization of
the visible system. Is it said that the heavens and the
earth shall be dissolved by fire ? But the natural power of
fire is not to annihilate, but only to dissolve the composition
and change the form of substances." — Scnno/is, vol. ii.,
p. 450.
We have now examined the most important testimony
respecting the future destruction and renovation of the
earth ; for inspiration only can certiinly determine its fu-
ture condition. But science may throw some light upon the
changes through which it is to pass. And I now proceed
to incjuire whether geology affords us any glimpses of its
future condition.
In the first idace, geology shows us that the earth con-
tains within itself all the agencies necessary for its future
destruction in the manner pointed out in the Bible.
Some author has remarked that, from the earliest times,
there has been a loud cry of fire. We have seen that it
began with the ancient Egyptians, and was continued by the
Greeks. But in recent times it has wa.xed louder and fiir more
distinct. The ancient notions about the existence of fire within
the earth were almost entirely conjectural, but within the
present century the matter has been put to the test of ex-
periment. Wherever, in Europe and America, the temper-
ature of the air, the waters, and the rocks, in deep excava-
tions, has been ascertained, it has been found higher than
the mean temperature of the climate at the surface : and the
experiment has lieen made in hundreds of places. It is
found, too, that the heat increases rapidly as avc descend
below that point in the earth's crust to which the sun's heat
288 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
extends. The mean rate of increase has been stated by the
British Association to be one degree of Fahrenheit for every
forty-five feet. At this rate, all known rocks would be
melted at the depth of about sixty miles. Shall we hence
conclude that all the matter of the globe below this thick-
ness (or, rather, for the sake of round numbers, below one
hundred miles) is actually in a melted state ? Most geolo-
gists have not seen how such a conclusion is to be avoided.
And yet this would leave only about one eight-hundredth
part of the earth's diameter, and about one fourteenth of
its contents, or bulk, in a solid state. How easy, then,
should God give permission, for this vast internal fiery
ocean to break through its envelope, and so to bury the solid
crust that it should all be burnt up and melted ! It is con-
ceivable that such a result might take place even by natural
operations. And certainly it would be easy for a special
divine agency to accomplish it.
All geologists, then, agree that the elements of the earth's
final conflagration are contained Avithin its bosom or upon its
surface. At present, those elements are so bound down by
counteracting agencies that all is quiet and security. But
let the fiat of the Almighty go forth for their liberation,
and t-he scenes of the last day, as described in the Bible,
will commence. The ploughshare of ruin Tvill be driven
onward, until this fair world is all ingulfed, and no trace
of organic life remains. Yet to him who realizes that the
destruction is only a necessary preparation for a brighter
world, which will emerge from the ruins of the jDresent;
that, when the matter of the globe has been purified, its sur-
fixce shall be covered with new and lovelier forms of beauty,
surrounded by a still more bland and balmy atmosphere,
and inhabited by sinless and immortal beings, — to him who
realizes all this, the desolation will put on the aspect of a
glorious transformation.
We have reason to believe, from the Christisin Scriptures,
that the next economy of life which shall be placed upon the
globe will far transcend all those that have gone before.
Every vestige of sin, suffering, decay, and death, will disap-
pear. Says the Bible : There sha/l be no more death^
neither sorrow nor crying^ neither shall there be any
more pain; for the former things are passed away. And
VIEWS OF DR. EDWARD HITCHCOCK. 289
there shall in no tvisc ejiter it anything] that dcjilcth^
neither whatsoever worketh abomination, or maketh a lie.
In short, the change i.s no other than the conversion of this
world into heaven. Reasonably, therefore, might Ave anti-
cipate a most thorough destruction of the present world, to
prepare the way for the introduction of such a glorious state.
The Scriptures describe that state by the most splendid im-
agery that can be derived from existing nature. It is repre-
sented, figuratively, no doubt, as a splendid city, prepared of
God, and let down to the earth. Its twelve foundations are
all precious stones, its gates pearls, its wall jasper, and its
streets pure gold, as it were, transparent glass. The Lord
God Almighty and the Lamb are the temple of that city.
Instead of the sun and tlie moon, the glory of God enlight-
ens it. and the Lamb is the light thereof From out of
their throne proceeds the water of life, clear as crystal ; and
along its banks grows the tree of life, with its twelve man-
ner of fruits, yielding its fruit every month.
Here, then, we have the most splendid and enchanting
objects in nature brought before us as representatives of the
new heavens and the new earth. Yet we cannot learu from
the Bible, or science, what material dress nature will then
put on. We are taught only that it Avill far exceed, in
splendor and perfection, the drapery which she now wears.
We may be assured that it will be eminently adapted to a
spirit that is henceforth to be perfectly holy, happy, incor-
ruptible, and immortal. Both revelation and geology agree
in assuring us that the new earth, which will emerge from
the ruins of the present, will be improved in its condition ;
but the particulars of that condition are not described, —
probably because we could not, in our present state, under-
stand them.
The Scriptures represent the material aspect of the new
heaven and the new earth, when first the righteous enter
upon them, to be one of surpassing glory. I>ut why may
not other developments await them in the round of eternal
ages, as their expanding faculties are able to understand and
appreciate them ?
The greater the variety of new scenes in the material world
which shall be presented to the mind, such as an infinite
Deity shall devise, the more intense the happiness of their
25
290 THE NEW HEAVENS AND THE NEW EARTH.
contemplations ; and who can set limits to the permutations
which such a being can produce, even upon matter? I can
form no conjecture as to the nature of those new develop-
ments ; nor do I believe they could be understood in our
present state. I feel as if those formed too low an estimate
of the new heavens and the new earth, who imagine a repe-
tition there of the most curious organic structures, the most
splendid flowers and fruits, and the most enchanting land-
scapes, of the present world. I fancy that scenes far more
enchanting, and objects far more glorious, will meet the soul
at its first entrance upon the new earth, even though to mortal
vision it should present only an ocean of fire. I imagine a
thousand new inlets into the soul, — nay, I think of it as all
eye, all ear, all sensation ; now plunging deeper into the
infinitesimal parts of matter than the microscope can carry us,
and now soaring away, perhaps on the waves of the myste-
rious ether, far beyond the ken of the telescope. And if
such is the first entrance into heaven, who can conjecture
what new fields and new glories shall open before the mind,
and fill it Avith ecstasy, as it flies onward without end ! But I
dare u^t indulge further in these hypothetical, yet fascinating
thoughts ; yet let us never forget that in a very short time,
far shorter than we imagine, all the scenes of futurity will
be to us a thrilling reality. We shall then know in a mo-
ment how much of truth there is in these speculations. But
if they all prove false, fully confident am I that the scenes
which will open upon us Avill surpass our liveliest concep-
tions. The glass through which we now see darkly Avill be
removed, and face to face shall we meet eternal glories.
Then shall we learn that our present bodily organs, however
admirably adapted to our condition here, were in fact clogs
upon the soul, intended to fetter its free range, that we
might the more richly enjoy the liberty of the sons of God,
and expatiate in the spiritual body, the building of God,
the house not made with haiids^ eternal in the heavens.
Let us, then, live continually under the influence of the
scenes that await us beyond the grave. They will thus be-
come fiimiliar to us, and we shall appreciate their infinite
superiority to the objects that so deeply interest us on earth.
We shall be led to look forward, even with strong desire, in
spite of the repulsive aspect of death, to that state where
VIEWS OF DR. EDWARD HITCHCOCK. 291
the soul will be freed from her prison-house of flesh and
blood, and can range in untiring freedom through the bound-
less fields of knowledge and happiness that are in prospect.
Then shall we learn to despise the low aims and conti'acted
views of the sensualist, the demagogue, and the worldling.
High and noble thoughts and aspirations will lift our souls
above the murky atmosphere of this world, and, while yet
in the body, we shall begin to breathe the empyreal air of
the new heavens, and to gather the fruits of the ti'ee of life
in the new earth, where righteousness only shall forever
dwell.
ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES ON THE STAND,
TESTIFYING AGAINST
THE MODERN AVHITBYAN THEORY
OF
A MILLENNIUM OF RIGHTEOUSNESS
BEFORE
THE COMING OF CHRIST AND RESURRECTION OF THE SAINTS.
25*
I
THE TEMPORAL I\IILLENNIUM A MODERN
NOVELTY.
Human testimony should ^veigh nothing against plain
scriptural declarations, — God's Avord being the only Protest-
ant rule of faith ; * yet multitudes, in opposition to the ex-
plicit teachings of inspiration, reject the doctrine of the
personal reign of Christ, Avith his risen saints, on the new
earth, because of its supposed novelty. As such persons,
like the Jews of old, are ever ready to inquire, " Have any
of the rulers and of the Pharisees believed on him?" it be-
comes necessary to show that this charge of novelty is
founded on a mistaken opinion ; and that the present gen-
erally received theory of the universal prevalence of right-
eousness on the earth, before the resurrection of the saints,
is itself a novelty, and has prevailed in the church for less
than two centuries.
Dr. Henshaw, the late Bishop of Rhode Island, in his
Treatise on the Second Advent, says :
" So far as we have l)een able to investigate its history, it
was first advanced by the Rev. Dr. Whitby, the commenta-
tor, and afterwards advocated by Hammond. Hopkins, Scott,
Dwight, Bouguc, and others, and has been received without
careful examination by the majority of evangelical divines in
the present day. But we may safely challenge its advocates
to produce one distinguished writer in its fiivor, who lived
before the commencement of the eighteenth century. If
antiquity is to be considered as any test of truth, the advo-
cates of the prcmillennial advent and personal reign of Christ
* " The supreme judge, by which all controversies of religion are to be
determined, and aU decrees of councils, onxioxs of ancient -writers,
DOCTRINES of nicn and private spirits, are to be examined, and in whose
sentence we ai-e to rest, can be no other than the holy Scripture deliv-
ered by the Spirit; into which Scripture, so delivered, our faith is finally
resolved." — Dec. of Faith of the Congregational Churches, A, D. 1658.
296 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
•with his saints upon earth, need have no fears of the result
of a comparison of authorities with the supporters of the
opposite theory."*
Daniel Whitby, D.D., who is thus referred to, was born
A. D. 1638, in England, and died A. D. 172Y. In the
development of his theory, he denominated it "a new
hypothesis ; " and he said of the view which he rejected :
'• The doctrine of the Millennium, or the reign of saints
on earth a thousand years, is now rejected by all Roman
Catholics, and by the greatest part of Protestants ; and yet
it passed among the best of Christians, for two hundred and
fifty years, for a tradition apostolical, and, as such, is de-
livered by many fathers of the second and third century,
who speak of it as the tradition of our Lord and his
apostles, and of all the ancients who lived before them, who
tell us the very words in which it was delivered, the Scrip-
tures which were then so interpreted ; and say that it was
held by all Chj-istians that were exactly orthodox.''^ —
"Whitby's Treatise on Traditions.
This admission, respecting the faith of the primitive
church, by the founder of the spiritual and now prevalent
view, will not be gainsaid by any intelligent person. That
this faith was rejected by the apostate Papal church is ad-
mitted, but that militates nothing against the probability of
its truth. That the greater number of Protestants also now
reject it is also undoubtedly true ; but, in so doing, the fact
that they imitate the Papal apostates, rather than the " best
of the primitive Christians," is no argument in their favor.
It will not be understood that the following witnesses all
agree in the details of their respective views, and no opinion
should be imputed to any one, further than is expressed in
his own words. Among those who have believed the second
advent to be imminent, some have held that the Lord Jesus
would then come only to judge and to destroy the earth,
and that he would remove his resurrected and changed
saints to some distant sphere ; while others, who looked to
the regenerated earth as the future abode of the saints, have
regarded the resurrection as general, to both saint and sin-
ner, at the same epoch. The term Millennarian is properly
* Henshaw on 2d Advent, p. 115.
THOSE WHO SLEEP IN JESUS. 297
applicable only to those who recognize the interval of 1000
years between the resurrection of the just and that of the
rest of the dead. But, however much their views may vary
on these minor points, they either agree in teaching constant
watchfulness for the Lords coming, as an event that may
bo ever looked for, without the intervention of 1000 years
of a spiritual reign, as taught by Whitby and his followers;
or they admit the renewal of this planet, which, admitted,
necessarily becomes the subject of the predictions respecting
the kingdom of God on earth, and its future glory here.
THOSE "WHO SLEEP IN JESUS.
"These all died in the faith, not having received the
promises, but having seen them afar off, and were persuad-
ed of them, and embraced them, and confessed that they
were strangers and pilgrims on the earth, . . . God having
provided some better thing for us, that they without us
should not be made perfect." — Heb. 11: 13, 40.
Not only the belief in a spiritual millennium has done
much to cause Christians to cease to look for their Lord,
but the view now generally prevalent, that Christians are
admitted at death to the full glory of their eternal state,
has also caused them to regard the resurrection with less
interest, if not as of little importance.
When Paul preached to the Gentiles Jesus and the
resioTection. it was in opposition to the heathen view, that
the spirits of the departed, at death, entered on their final
careers of happiness or misery : for to such dignity did they
suppose distinguished heroes were advanced, that they im-
puted to them a place among the gods, and adored them as
such. The Scriptures, on the contrary, represent the
resurrection as the saints' coronation day ; and the day of
Christ's appearing, as that of the consummation of their
blessedness.
Paul indeed testifies, that for him '• to live is Christ, and
to die is gain"' (Phil. 1: 21), and that he had "a desire to
depart, and to be with Christ, which is far better" than to
abide in the flesh (v. 23) ; for he says (in 2 Cor. 5 : 6),
" Whilst we are at home in the body, we are absent from
the Lord;" and this made him (v. 8) "willing rather to
298 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
be absent from the body, and to be present with the Lord."
And yet it was not so much for death, when he should be
" unclothed " (v. 4), as for the resurrection, when he should
be "clothed upon, that mortality might be swallowed up of
life," that Christians in this "tabernacle," in Paul's day,
most ardently "groaned." Such was also the faith of the
primitive church ; for Justin Martyr, in his Dialogue with
Trypho the Jew, says :
If "you fall in with certain who are called Christians,
who confess not this [truth], but dare to blaspheme the
God of Abraham, and Isaac, and Jacob, in that they say
there is no resurrection of the dead, but that, immediately
they die, their souls are received up into heaven, avoid
them, and esteem them not as Christians." " However, I
affirm that no soul perishes entirely, or is annihilated ; for
that would really be good and joyful news to the wicked.
What then ? why, that the souls of the righteous are reserved
in a place of happiness, and those of the w'icked and unjust
in a place of misery and torment, in expectation of the
great day of judgment."
The Papists, when they substituted saint-worship for the
pagan hero-worship, in order to canonize their new gods,
had to suppose them purified by purgatorial fires, of a
longer or shorter duration, or by the superior merit of their
own pious acts, and ushered into glory before the resurrec-
tion, as the pagans did their heroes, without a resurrection,
and without such purification. Modern Protestants have
adhered to the Papal doctrine of glorification before the
second advent — merely abandoning the Papal dogmas of
purgatory and meritorious works. And this error has
doubtless done much to diminish desire for the resurrection
— the body being regarded, by many, as a mere clog to the
capacities of the spirit. Mr. Brooks, in his " Essays," goes
into a full examination of this question ; referring to which,
he says :
" I have shown, in another work {Abdiel's JSssays, p.
93), that the believer enjoys at death a conscious blessedness,
which renders it better for him to depart and be with Christ,
than to remain in the body ; but it is equally clear, from
Scripture and from the Fathers, that the believer does not
at death ' ascend into the heavens, ' any more than did
THOSE WHO SLEEP IN JESUS. 299
David (Acts 2 : 34) ; or than Christ did between his death
and resurrection ; Avho went to paradise, and had not even
after his resurrection yet ascended unto the Father. — John
20 : 17. It is very phiin, from the testimony of Justin,
that in the primitive church they held those not to be Cliris-
tians who maintained that souls are received up into heaven
immediately after death. Irenreus ranks them, in his Avork
against Heresies (lib. v.), as among the heretical; and the
testimony of the church is imlfonn on this ])oint (if we
accept some questionable passages in Cyprian) down into
Popish times; ana it was indeed the general opinion of the
Greek and Latin churches, down to theX^ouncil of Florence,
held under Pope Eugenius IV. in 1439. A passage from
Bishop Taylor's 'Liberty of Prophesying' (sect, viii.) will
set this matter in a clear W^Axi. When showing how doc-
trines of anticjuity were sometimes contradicted in subsequent
ages by councils, or by some ecclesiastic of power or ])opu-
larit}'-, he says : ' That is a plain recession from antiquity,
which was determined by the Council of Florence — piorum
aninms puryatas, t^'c, inox in cosliim recipi et intueri
dare ipsiini Dcn/ii trinnni ct i/nifin sioftl est {that the
soi/ls of the pious, hcinfj parificd, arc immediately at
death received into heaven, and behold clearly the triune
God, just as he is) : for those who please to try may see
it dogmatically resolved to the contrary by Justin Martyr,
Irenreus, Origen, Chrysostome, Theodoret, Arethas Cresa-
riensis, Euthymius, who may answer for the Greek church.
And it is plain that it was the opinion of the Greek church,
by that great difficulty the Romans had of bringing the
Greeks to subscribe to the Florentine Council, where the
Latins acted tlieir masterpiece of wit and stratagem, — the
greatest that hath been till the famous and super-politic
Council of Trent. And for the Latin church, Tertullian,
Ambrose, Austin, Hilary, Prudentius, Lactantius, Victori-
nus, and Bernard, are known to be of opinion that the souls
of the saints are in abditis rcceptaculis et exterioribus
atriis (in private receptacles and in more outward courts),
Avhere they expect the resurrection of their bodies and the
glorification of their souls ; and though they all believe
them to be happy, yet that they enjoy not the beatific vision
before the resurrection.'
300 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
" The Stratagem employed bj the Romanists, to "which
Bishop Taylor alludes, is, I suppose, the fact recorded in the
History of this Council by Creighton, who Avrote in 1660,
and in Geddes' hitroductory Discourse to Varffas\t Let-
ters ; who state that the Pope first inveigled the Patriarch
of Constantinople, and some of his clergy, to meet him at
a Council at Ferrara, which he then adroitly adjourned to
Florence ; and when the Greek ecclesiastics pleaded ina-
bility to bear the charges, he actually defrayed all their
expenses himself. The patriarch died at Florence, and the
Greek church (according to Gaspar PencA'us) not only dis-
owned the acts of the clergy present, but excommunicated
them, and denied them Christian burial.
"The early Reformers maintained the primitive faith on
this point, plainly perceiving that the object of the Papists
was to help forward the doctrine of purgatory and invoca-
tion of saints. Thus Tyndal, disputing with the Papists,
says : ' If the souls be in heaven, tell me why they be not
in as good case as the angels be ? and then, what cause is
there of the resurrection? ' — p. 324, Works by Fox. And
afterwards, in reply to More, who objects against Luther
that his doctrine on this point encouraged the sinner to con-
tinue in sin, seeing it so long postponed the ultimate judg-
ment, Tyndal says : ' Christ and his apostles taught no
other, but warned to look for Christ's coming again every
hour ; which coming again, because ye believe it will never
be, therefore have ye feigned that other merchandise.'
" Calvin also, in his Psychopannychia, replies thus to
another objection against this doctrine : ' I answer that
Christ is our Head, whose kingdom and glory have not
yet appeared. If the members were to go before the head,
the order of things would be inverted and preposterous.
But we shall follow our Prince then, when he shall come in
the glory of his Father, and sit upon the throne of his
majesty.' — p. 55.
"It is greatly to be lamented that the Protestant church
of a later period should have fallen into the errors of the
Papists on this subject, abating the distinct acknowledg-
ment of purgatory ; errors, the adoption of which has done
more than any other thing, perhaps, towards withdrawing
from the church the lively expectation of Christ's Advent."
— Elements of Prophetic Interpretation, pp. 52, 53.
TESTIMONY OF TUE REFORMERS. 301
As the coming of the Lord is universally admitted to
have been the hope of the church "in its purest and best
age,"* it will only be necessary to show that a "cloud of
witnesses " have continued to testify to it, since the Reform-
ation till now. And first we have
the testimony of the reformers.
From Martix Lutiier.
(Born A. D. 1483, in Germany; died, 1546.)
" In the year 1541, when, during a very beautiful spring,
everything flourished and l)loomed, Luther said to Justus
Jonas : ' If only sin and death were absent, we would be
satisfied with such a paradise. But it will be much more
beautiful when the old world and the old state of things
will be entirely renovated, and an eternal spring begin,
which will be and continue forever.' The computation of
those who confidently fi.xcd the year and the day of the final
judgment being once referred to, he said : ' No, verily, the
text is too plain in Matthew xxiv. : Concerning the day and
the hour knoweth no man, no, not the angels in heaven, but
alone my Father ; therefore neither I, nor any man, nor an-
gel, can fix the day or the hour. I believe, nevertheless,
that all the signs which are to precede the last day have-
already happened. The Gospel is preached throughout the
world ; the child of perdition is revealed, and destroyed in
the hearts of many ; the kingdom of Rome is declining to
its fall ; all the elements and creatures are in commotion,
and declining ; there is no longer any love or fidelity on
earth, and Christ may come when he may, he will find but
a small flock of believers ; excess in eating and drinking,
the practise of usury, anxious cares, covetousness, extrava-
gance in dress and liuilding, and all manner of irregularity,
verily being as prevalent now as they were at the times of
Noah : wherefore I conceive that the signs preceding the last
day are fulfilled. Unless it should lie that Gog and Magog,
together with the Papacy, should yet be crushed and de-
stroyed previously, in a temporal respect too, and that pai'-
ticular and supernatural darkness should perhaps be wit-
♦ Sec a valuable work entitled the " Voice of the Church," by Elder D. T.
Taylor, which contains much information on this subject.
26
802 ONE IlUNDllED WITNESSES.
nessed in the sun and moon, as was the case at the death of
Christ, and that the Gospel should, previously to the last
day, be banished from all the churches, schools, and pulpits,
and be found only with pious heads of families, within their
four walls, as it was at the times of Elijah, and as it verily
almost seems it will be now. Otherwise, everything is ful-
filled which is to precede the last day. Methinks Christ
our Lord is already publishing his summons in heaven, and
the angels are preparing for the journey, and because dur-
ing these six thousand years all the great and marvellous
events of which Elijah prophesied have occurred in spring
and about Easter, I trust Christ will also appear about
Easter, and cause his voice and thunder to be heard in a
morning tempest, and then with one stroke, confounding the
heavens and the earth, in a moment of time transform
the living, raise the dead, create a new heaven and earth,
hold his judgment in the clouds, wholly fulfil the Scriptures,
together with his last: It is finished ; THIS WE await.' '*'
— Meiirer's Life of Luthej-^ pp. 573, 574.
"The world has grown very stubborn and headstrong
since the revelation of the word of the Gospel. It begins to
crack sorely, and I hope will soon break and fall on a heap
through the coming of the day of judgment, for which we
wait with yearnings and sighs of heart." — Table Talk,
chap. 4.
'• Some, in explaining this passage, 'other sheep I have,'
say that before the latter days the whole world shall be-
come Christians. This is a falsehood forged by Satan, that
he might darken sound doctrine, that we might not rightly
understand it. Beware, therefore, of this delusion." — Com.
on John 10 : 16.
" The world is as it ever has been, the world, and desires
to know nothing of Christ. Let it go its own way. They
continue to rage and grow worse from day to day, which,
indeed, is a solace to the weary soul, as it shows that the
glorious day of the Lord is at hand. The world is given
up to its own ways, that the day of its destruction and our
salvation should be hastened. Amen, so be it."
" May the Lord come at once ! Let Him cut the whole
matter short with the day of judgment, for there is no
amendment to be expected." — Life, p. 342.
TESTIMONY OF TUE REFORMERS. 303
"I see no other prayer that is fitting, but only this, —
Thy kingdom come. ' — /i., p. 343.
'• Let us not therefore be wanting to ourselves, disregard-
ing the most diligent premonition and prophecy of Christ
our Saviour ; but seeing in our age the signs foretold by
him do often come to pass, let us not think that the coming
of Christ is far off. And now let us look up with heads
lifted up. and let us e.xpect our Redeemer's coming with a
longing and cheerful mind. For though the signs may seem
uncertain, yet no man can despise them without danger;
seeing there can be not only no danger, but also great profit,
if, reckoning them as true, thou shalt prepare thyself to meet
thy Saviour ; that is, if, bidding farewell to present things,
thou shalt be wholly taken up with the desire of the king-
dom of God that is coming. Let us follow certain things,
and the signs we have lately seen brought forth ; let us not
doubt but that they are true signs of tlie last day, lest wo
stumble with those profane men of the world, and meet
with sudden destruction, when we shall promise nothing but
quietness to ourselves." — Quoted from the London Q.
J. of Prophecy, vol. i., p. 445.
From Philip Melanctiion.
(Born A. D. 1497; died in loCO.)
" This aged Avorld is not far from its end.'' — Quoted by
Mr. Elliott.
From John Knox. ( The founder of the Pres. Ch.
in Scotland.^
(Born A. r. 1505; died in 1572.)
" Has not the Lord Jesus, in despite of Satan's malice,
carried up our flesh into heaven? And shall he not re-
turn ? We know that he shall return, and that with expe-
dition."
'• What were this else but to reform the face of the whole
earth, which never was, nor yet shall be, till that righteous
King and Judge appear for the restoration of all things."
— Treatise on Fastinr/.
"Our heavenly Father, of His infinite wisdom, to hold
us in remembrances that in this wretched world there is no
rest, suffereth us to be tried with this cross, that with an
304 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
unfeigned heart we may desire, not only an end of our own
troubles (for that shall come to us by death), but also of
all ti'oubles of the Church of God, which shall not be before
the again coming of the Lord Jesus." — Quoted from the
London Q. J. of Prophecy.
" Consider, by the signs forespoken by our Master, Christ
Jesus, which, for the most part, are now present, the days
of this most corrupt world to be short, and therefore the
joyful deliverance of the oppressed and afflicted flock to ap-
proach." — Ib.^ vol. iv., p. 412.
From John Calvin.
(Born A. D. 1509, in Picardy, France, and died in 15G4.)
" I expect with Paul a reparation of all the evils caused
by sin, for which he represents the creatures as groaning
and travailing." — Institiites, vol. iii., chap. 25.
" Since Scripture uniformly enjoins us to look with
expectation to the advent of Christ, and delays the crown
of glory till that period, let us be contented with the limits
divinely prescribed to us, viz., that the souls of the right-
eous, after their warfare is ended, obtain blessed rest, where
in joy they wait for the fruition of promised glory, and
that thus the final result is suspended till Christ the
Redeemer appear." — Jb., B. iii., chap. 25, sect. 6.
' ' There is no reason why any person shouLl expect the
conversion of the world : for at length (when it will be too
late, and will yield them no advantage) they shall look on
Him whom they have pierced." — lb., B. iii., chap. 9.
" We must hunger after Christ, we must seek, contem-
plate, &c., till the dawning of that great day, when our
Lord will fully manifest the glory of his kingdom. " — lb.,
B. iii., chap. 18.
''■ Christ is our head, whose kingdom and glory have not
yet appeared. If the members were to go before their
Head, the order of things would be inverted and preposter-
ous : but we shall follow our Prince then, when he shall
come in the glory of his Father, and sit upon the throne of
his majesty." — See p. 300.
TESTIMONY OF ENGLISH MARTYRS. 305
TESTIMOiry OF MARTYRS OF THE CHTJRCH OF ENG-
LAND.
(Imprisoned in ono Room in the Tower of London.)
There were four famous men, of Avhom Latimer writes :
"Mr. Cranmcr, Archbishop of Canterbury : Mr. Ridlcj,
Bishop of London ; that holy man, Mr. Bradford, and I, ohl
Hugh Latimer, Avere imprisoned in the Tower of London
for Christs gospel-preaching, and because we Avould not go
a massiiiff. The same tower being so full of prisoners, we
four were thrust into one chamber, as men not to be ac-
counted of" Here these venerable men passed their time
in reading and studying the Scriptures, and enlightening
and confirming each others faith." — Cranmcr and his
Times, p. 248.
From Bishop Huou Latimer.
(Born in England A. D. 1470; burned at the stake a. d. I.'jj,').)
Let US " have a desire that this day may come quickly ;
let us hasten God forward : let us cry unto Him day and
nigiit, ' Most merciful Father, T/uj kingdom come.' St.
Paul saith, ' The Lord will not come till the swerving from
faith Cometh' (2 Thess. 2: 3), which thing is already done
and past : Antichrist is known throughout all the world.
Wiiereforc the day is not far off. Let us beware, for it will
one day fall upon our heads. St. Peter saith, ' The end of
all things draweth very near.' St. Peter said so at his
time ; how much more shall we say so ! for it is a long time
since Peter spake these words. . . . All those excellent
learned men, which, without doubt, God hath sent into this
world in these latter days to give the world warning, all
those men do gather out of Scripture that tlie last day can-
not lie far off." — Investigator, vol. i., p. 170.
" There will be great alterations at that day; . . there
will be hurly-burly, like as ye see when a man dieth. There
will be such alterations of the earth and the elements ; they
will lose their former nature, and be endued with another
nature. And then shall they see the Son of man come in
a cloud with power and great glory. ... I pray God that
we may be of the number of those who shall hear this joyful
and most comfortable voice of Christ our Saviour whea He
26*
306 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
"will say, ' Come, ye blessed of my Father, possess the king-
dom which is prepared for you before the foundation of the
world was laid.' . . . That man or that Avoman that saith
these words, 'Thy kingdom come,' with a faithful heart, no
doubt desireth, in very deed, that God will come to judg-
ment, and Mncnd all things in this world, to pull down
Satan, that old serpent, under our feet." — lb., p. 171.
From Bishop Nicholas Ridley.
(Born about 1500, in England, and burned with Latimer in 1555.)
"The world, without doubt, — this I do believe, and
therefore I say it, — draws towards an end. Let us, with
John, the servant of God, cry in our hearts unto our
Saviour Christ, Come, Lord Jesus, come." — Lam. on the
State of Religion.
From the Holy John Bradford.
(Burned at the stake with John Leafe, a. d. 1555.)
Writing to a friend respecting "the earnest expectation
of the creature " (Rom. 8 : 19 — 23), he relates his own,
and "the cogitation of one who Avas my father in the
Lord," the learned, judicious, and pious Martin Bucer —
and he does it, —
" Because this morning I had some knowledge, more than
I had before, that my life stood in great danger, and that
even this week, I thought good, my right dearly beloved in
the Lord, to go about something which might be, on my
behalf, a swan's song,* and towards you both a monument
of my love, and also a help, or, at least, an occasion for you
to profit in that which I bear you record you most desire —
I mean everlasting life, and the state thereof. I therefore
take the apostle to mean by 'every creature,' simply, even
the whole shape and creatures in the world. ... As
everything and all things were made for man, so, by the
man Christ, all and everything, both earthly and heavenly,
shall be restored. . . . These things will I think upon ;
these things will I pause upon ; herein will I, as it were,
* That is, which might be a special comfort to him, being then ready to
be burned, as the swan's song is said to be sweetest a little before his
death. — Letters of the Martyrs.
TESTIMONY OF ENGLISH MARTYRS. 307
drown myself — being careless of this point, I mean as to
wJiat parts of the world the Lord Christ will restore
unto VIP., or Itoic He will do it. or what state or condition
He will give it. It is enough and enough for me, that
I, and all the world like mc, shall be much more happy
than I ever can by any means conceive. . . . This
renovation of all things the prophets seem to promise
when they promise new heaveiW and a new earth. . . .
Therefore, mcthinks it is the duty of a godly mind to
acknowledge and thereof to glory in the Lord, that, in
our resurrection, all things aiiall be repaired for eternity,
as, from our sin, they were made subject to corruption.
" The ancient writers, out of 2 Pet. 3, have, ;is it were,
agreed to this sentence, that the shape of this world shall
pass away through the burning of earthly fire, as it was
drowned with the flowing of earthly w'aters. Tiiese be St.
Augustine's words, that, ' The world changing into the
better, may openly be made fit for man when returned in
the flesh into the better state.' Therefore, it is the part of a
godly man, and of one that hangeth in all things upon the
word of God, to learn out of this place, that whatsoever
corruption, death, or grief, he seeth in anything, whatsoever
it be, that he ascribe that wholly unto his sins, and thereby
provoke himself to true repentance. Now, as soon as that
repentance compelleth him to go to Christ, let him think
thus : But this my Saviour and my Head, Jesus Christ,
died for my sins, and therewith, as he took away death, so
hath he taken away all the corruption and labor of all things,
and will restore them in His time, wheresoever they be, in
heaven or in earth. Now, every creature travaileth and
groaneth with us ; but we being restored, they also shall be
restored : there shall be new heavens, new earth, and all
things new."' — Bradford's Letters (83).
From Archbishop Thomas Cranmer.
(Born A. P. 14S11, in England; burnt at the stake in 155G.)
[The Catechism drawn up by the English prelates in the
time of Edward VI., and authorized by that king May 20,
1553, — the last year of his reign, — was acknowledged by
Cranmer (Burnet's Hist. Vol. iii., B. 4) to be written by
himself The following extracts will show his faith respect-
ing the kingdom] :
308 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
" Q. How is that petition, Thy kingdom, come, to be
understood ? /
^^Ans. We ask that his kingdom may come, for that as
yet we see not all things subject to Christ : we see not yet
how the stone is cut out of the mountain without human
help, which breaks into pieces and reduceth to nothing the
image described by Daniel : or how the only rock, which is
Christ, doth possess and obtain the empire of the whole
world given him of the Father. As yet, Antichrist is not
slain ; whence it is that we desire and pray that at length
it may come to pass and be fnlfilled ; and that Christ alone
may reign with his saints, according to the divine promises;
and that he may live and have dominion in the world, ac-
cording to the decrees of the holy Gospel, and not according
to the traditions and laws of men, and the wills of the
tyrants of the world.
"Q. God grant that his kingdom may come most speed-
ily, &c. ******
"Q. The sacred Scripture calls the end of the world the
consummation and perfection of the mystery of Christ, and
the renovation of all things : for thus the Apostle Peter
speaks in his second Epistle, chap. 3 : ' We expect new
heavens and a new earth, according to God's promise, where-
in dwelleth righteousness.' And it seems agreeable to
reason, that the corruption, mutability, and sin, to which
the whole world is subject, should at least cease. Now, by
what means, or ways of circumstances, those things shall
be brought to pass, I desire to know of thee.
'^^Ans. I will declare as well as I can, the same apostle
attesting. The heavens in the manner of a stormy tempest
shall pass away, and the elements estuating shall be dis-
solved, and the earth and the works therein shall be burnt.
As if the apostle should say, the world, like as we see in
the refining of gold, shall be wholly purged with fire, and
shall be brought to its utmost perfection ; which the little
world, man, imitating, it shall likewise be freed from cor-
ruption and change. And so, for man's sake, for whose use
the great world was created, being at length renovated or
made new, it shall put on a face that shall be far more
pleasant and beautiful." — Brooks' Essays, pp. 12, 13.
TESTIMONY OF ENGLISH CHURCH DIVINES. 309
TESTIMONY OF OLD ENGLISH CHURCH DIVINES.
From Bisuor John Davenant, D.D.
(Rom A. 1). 1570, in London; died 1G41.)
"The glory of Christians is to be expected at the second
coming of Christ, wliose day will arrive both suddenly and
quickly." — Voice of the CImrcli, p. 221.
From Archbishop James Usher, D.D.
(Bom in Ireland a. d. 1580; died 16G5.)
" The glorious appearance of the Son of God in the latter
day shall also be the overthrow of Antichrist, whence we
gather that before the last day he shall not be utterly con-
sumed." — Body of Divinity, chap, xlv., p. 539.
" We should always live in expectation of the Lord Jesus
in the clouds, with oil in our lamps, prepared for his com-
ing." — From Lon. Q. J. of Proph., vol. iv., p. 317.
From the Illustrious Joseph Mede, D.D.
(Bora A. D. 1586; died 1G38.)
" The rising of the martyrs is that which is called the
first resurrection, being, as it seems, a prerogative to their
suiferings above the rest of the dead, who, as they suffered
with Christ in the time of His patience, so should they be
glorified with Him in the reign of His victory before the
universal resurrection of all. ' Blessed and holy is he that
hath part in the first resurrection; for on such the second
death hath no power.' . . . Thus, I yet admit the first
resurrection to be corporeal as well as the second, — though
I confess I have striven much against it." — Letter to Mm.
'l\cisse.
From Robert Maton, A.M.
(Author of Israel's Redemption, published 1642.)
" When our Saviour comes to reign over all the earth. He
comes not alone, but brings all the saints with Him
Which words ... do establish the literal sense of the
first resurrection, mentioned in the 20th chapter of the Rev-
elation." — Lon. Quar. Jour, of Prophecy, vol. i., p. 91.
310 one hundred witnesses.
From Bishop Jeremy Taylor, D. D.
(Born A. D. 1C13; died in 1677.)
" The resurrection shall be universal : good and bad shall
arise ; yet not all together, but first Christ, and then we
that are Christ's : and then there is another resurrection,
though it be not spoken of here. Mj text speaks only of
the resurrection of the just. . , . ' The dead in Christ
shall rise first ; ' now blessed are they that have their portion
here : for upon these the second death shall have no
power." — Sermon on 1 Cor. 15 : 23.
From the learned Tueophilus Gale.
(Eorn A. D. 1C28; died 1G78.)
'■ We see the true reason why so many professors, and
some truly godly, are so far behind in their Christian race,
and have so much of their work before them. . . . Whence
comes all this but from want of serious, lively expectations
of their Lord's approach? Believe it, there is a deep mys-
terie, a spiritual art and skil in godlinesse which none arrive
unto so soon as they who wait for the coming of their Lord.
What made the Thessalonians, in a short time, to arrive
unto such high pitches of Christianitie, but they imbibed
or sucked in, at their first conversion, this principle of wait-
ing for the coming of their Lord (1 Thess. 1 : 10)? and
that professors would trie this experiment ! Verily, we
should not have such complaints, decays, follies, and scan-
dals, among professors, as we now everywhere find. It is a
sure and fixed rule, that no one hath made a further pro-
ficience in the schole of Christ, than he can with hope and
joy expect the second coming of Christ." — Discourse on
Christ's Coming, London, 1673; copied from Lon. Quar.
Jour, of Proph., vol. vii., p. 289.
From Thomas Burnet, D.D.
(Born A. D. 1C35; died 1715.)
"The prophets, both of the Old and New Testament,
have left us their predictions concerning neio heavens and
a new earth. So says the prophet Isaiah, chap. 65 : 17.
TESTIMONY OF ENGLISH CHURCH DIVINES. 311
Behold I create nev) heavens and a new earth; and the
former shall not he remembered, or come into mind; as
not wortliy our thoughts, in comparison of those that will
arise when these pass away. So, the prophet St. John, in
his Aporahjpse. when he was come to the end of this world,
saj's, And I saw a neic heaven and a new earth: for the
first heaven and the first earth were passed away, and
there iras no more sea (Apoc. 21 : 1). . . . And. in
the 5th verse, he that sate upon the throne says, Behold, I
make all things neir: which, considered with the antece-
dents and consec^uents, cannot be otherwise understood than
of a new world.
" But some men make evasions here, as to the words of
the prophets, and say they are to be understood in a figu-
rate and allegorical sense ; and to be applied to the times of
the Gospel, either at first, or towards the latter end of the
world; so as this new heaven and new enrth signify only
a great change in.the moral world. But Iioav can that be,
seeing St. John places them after the end of the world?
and the prophet Isaiah connects such things Avitli his new
heavens and new earth as are not compatible to tlie present
state of nature (chap 'oh^. However, to avoid all shufliing
and tergiversation in this point, let us appeal to St. Peter,
who uses a plain, literal style, and discourses downright
concerning the natural world. In his 2d Epistle, and 3d
chapter, when he had foretold and explained the future con-
flagration, he adds. But we expect new heavens and a new
earth,, according to his promises. These pron'iises were
made by the prophets; and this gives us full authority to
interpret their neir heavens and ncu- earth to be after the
confiagration. St. Peter, when he hail described the disso-
lution of the world in the last fire, in full and emphatical
terms, as the passing away of the heavens with a noise;
the melting of the elements, and bnrning vp all the works
of the earth; he subjoins, Nevej'theless (notwithstanding
this total dissolution of the present world), ire, according
to his promises, look for new Jicavciis and a. new earth,
wherein dwelleth righteousness. As if the apostle should
have said, notwithstanding this strange and violent dissolu-
tion of the present heavens and earth, which I have
described to you, we do not at all distrust God's promises,
312 OXE nUNDRED WITNESSES.
concerning new heavens and a new earth, that are to succeed
these, and to be the seat of the righteous." — Theory of
the Earthy vol. ii., pp. 140, 141.
From Bishop Joseph Butler.
(Bom A. D. 1692; died 1752.)
" Things of this kind naturally turn the thoughts of seri-
ous men towards the full completion of the prophetic history
concerning the final restoration of that people, concerning
the establishment of the everlasting kingdom among them,
the kingdom of the Messiah, and the future state of the
world under this sacred government." — Analogy, Part ii.,
chap. 7.
" Since they (Christians) are not already invested with
that degree of glory that will be communicated to them,
they could not, under the notion of members of that king-
dom, claim any earthly dominion before the glorious reign
of Christ shall commence, when they shall indeed reign
with Him upon the earth." — Memoirs, p. 298.
From Bishop Thomas Newton, D.D.
(Bom A. D. 1703, in England; died 1784.)
"With what propriety can it be said that some of the
dead who were beheaded 'lived and reigned with Christ a
thousand years, but the rest of the dead lived not again
until the thousand years were finished ' (Rev. 20 : 4, 5),
unless the dying and living again be the same in both
places, a proper death and resurrection ? ... If the mar-
tyrs rise only in a spiritual sense, then the rest of the dead
rise only in a spiritual sense; but if tlte rest of the dead
really rise, the martyrs rise in the same manner. There is
no difterence between them ; and we should be cautious and
tender of making the first resurrection an allegory., lest
others should reduce the second into an allegory too, like
those whom St. Paul mentions (2 Tim. 2 : 17, 18), ' Hy-
meneus and Philetus. who, concerning the truth, have erred,
saying that the resurrection is past already, and overthrow
the faith of some.' It is to this first resurrection that St.
Paul alludes, when he afiirms (1 Thess. 4 : 16) that ' the
dead in Christ shall rise first,' and (1 Cor. 15 : 23) that
TESTIMONY OF ENGLISH CHURCH DIVINES. 313
' every man shall be made alive in his own order ; Christ
the first fruits, afterwards they that are Chrisfs at his com-
ing, and then cometh the end,' after the general resur-
rection.
" In the general, that there shall be such a happy period
as the Millennium, that ' the kingdom and dominion, and
the greatness of the kingdom under the Avliole heaven, shall
be given to the people of the saints of the ]\Iost High ' (Dan.
7 : 27), that Christ shall have ' the heathen for his inher-
itance, and the uttermost parts of the earth for his posses-
sion' (Psal. 2: 8). that ^ the earth shall be full of the
knowledge of the Lord, as the waters cover the sea' (Isai.
11: 9), 'that the fulness of the Gentiles shall come in,
and all Israel shall be saved ' (Rom. 11 : 25, 26). in a
word, that the kingdom of heaven shall be established upon
earth, is the plain and express doctrine of Daniel and all the
prophets, as Avell as of St. John : and we daily pray for the
accomplishment of it, in praying Thy kingdom come.
But of all the prophets, St. John is the only one who hath
declared particularly, and in express terms, that the mar-
tyrs shall rise to partake of the felicities of this kingdom,
and that it shall continue upon earth a thousand years: and
the Jewish church before him, and the Christian church
after him, have further believed and taught that these
thousand years will be the seventh Millenary of the world.
A pompous heap of quotations might be produced to this
purpose, both from Jewish and Christian writers." — Dis-
sertations on Proph., p. 587.
From ARcnBisuop William Newcome, D.D.
(Born A. D. 1729, in England; died 1800.)
"I understand this (Rev. 20: 4) not figuratively of a
peaceable and flourishing state of the church on earth, but
literally of a real resurrection, and of a real reign with
Christ, who will display his royal glory in the New Jerusa-
lem. This is the great Sabbatism, or rest of the church."
— Bickersteth^ s Dissertations on Prophecy^ p. 106.
27
314 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
Among the writers of this period, the most distinguished
philosopher of his times is worthy of a place :
Testimony of Sir Isaac Newton.
(Born A. D. 1642; died 1727.)
"As the few and obscure prophecies concerning Christ's
first coming were for setting up the Christian religion,
which all nations have since corrupted ; so, the many and
clear prophecies concerning the things to be done at His
second coming are not only for predicting, but also for
eflfecting, a recovery and establishment of the long-lost
truth, and setting up a kingdom wherein dwelleth right-
eousness."
TESTIMONY OF THE "WESTMINSTEK ASSEMBLY'S
DIVINES.
This Assembly was called by Parliament for the purpose
of settling the government, liturgy, and doctrine of the
Church of England, and it met July 1, 1643. " The di-
vines were men of eminent learning and godliness, ministe-
rial abilities, and fidelity. ]\Iany lords and commons were
joined with them, to see that they did not go beyond their
commission. Six or seven Independents were also added
to them, that all sides might be heard." — (^Art. En. of Rel.
K/wwl.) In the " Shorter Catechism" is their exposition
of the Lord's Prayer; and, on the words "Thy kingdom
come," we have as follows :
" In the second petition we pray that Satan's kingdom
may be destroyed, and that the kingdom of grace may be
advanced, ourselves and others brought into it, and that the
kingdom of rjlory may he hastened; "
Which is explained, in the corresponding clause of the
larger Catechism, thus :
" We pray that Christ would hasten the time of His
second coming, and our reigning with Him forcA^er."
That this was designed to be understood in a Mil-
lenarian sense, is evident from the admitted Millenarian
tendencies of a majority of those who were there assem-
bled. Principal Baillie, a determined anti-Millenarian, and,
WESTMINSTER ASSEMBLY'S DIVINES. 315
therefore, not likely to exaggerate their numbers, said of
them :
"The inost of the chief divines here, not only Independ-
ents, but others, such as Twisse, ^Marshall, Palmer, and
many more, arc express Chiliasts.''" — Letters^ No. 117.
" Besides the three above mentioned, the following mem-
bers of that assembly arc known, likewise, by their pub-
lished writings, or sentiments, to have been Millenarian,
viz.: Simeon Ash, of St. Bride's: W. Bridge, A.M. ; Jere-
miah Burroughs, A.M. ; J. Carlyle, A.M. ; T. Goodwin,
D.D. ; W. Gouge, D.D. : J. Langley, Prebendary of Glou-
cester; and Peter Sterry, of London.'' — Brooks' El. Pro.
In. {Liicralist), p. 72.
From William Twisse, D.D.
(Tlio .Moderator of the Westminster Assembly.)
He Avrote to Mr. jMede, his instructor in theology :
" 0, Mr. Mede, I would willingly spend all my days in
hanging on your lips .... to hear you discourse upon the
glorious kingdom of Christ here on earth, to begin wiUi the
ruin of Antichrist." — Mcdes Work\s, p. 8-45.
From Jeremiah Burroughs, D.D.
" If 3^ou ask me when shall these things be? when shall
Jerusalem be made the praise of the whole earth? it is
very hard to determine the particular time, but surely at
the end of Antic/iri.st s rcirjn it must be. And how long
Antichrist shall reign, that we know certainly ; the only
difficulty is to reckon tlie very time of the beginning of his
reign. He shall reign for 12G0 yeare ; and we have such
parallel Scriptures for this, that there is nothing more evi-
dent, and generally divines agree upon it There will
be no certainty nor sottlcdness of things till Jerusalem come
to be made as the praise of the earth. There will attend afllic-
tiou to the people of God, yea, and to others too ; yea, and
there is a curse upon men's spirits which will not be taken
off till this time come." — Quoted from Voice of the
Church, p. 194.
316 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
From Peter Sterry.
" The subject (which is the reign of our Saviour with His
saints on the earth) is of a transcendent glory in itself, of a
universal consequence to all persons and states, and of very
great reasonableness for present times. Like a piece of rich
coin, it hath long been buried in the earth ; but of late days,
digged up again, it begins to grow bright with handling,
and to pass current with great numbers of saints, and learned
men of great authority. As the same star at different sea-
sons is the evening star, setting immediately after the sun,
and then the morning star, shining immediately before it ;
so was this truth the evening star to the first coming of
Christ, setting together Avith the glory of that day in a
night of anti-Christianism ; and now it appears again in our
own times, as a morning star to that blessed day of the
second effusion of tlie Spirit, and the second appearance of
our Saviour in the glory of the Father." — Quoted from the
Lon. Q. J. of Prophecy^ vol. iv., p. 316.
From Thomas Goodw^in, D.D.
(Born A. D. 1600; died 1679.)
"This ["We shall reign on the earth"] comforted the
saints of old, even the consideration of Christ's kingdom on
earth. And how peremptory are they ! They mention
that because that is the end and scope of the Revelation, and
the conclusion of this book, when the seals are off, and the
contents of the book accomplished, and, therefore, they have
that in their eye. And seeing Christ undertakes the accom-
plishment of all, whereof this is the issue, they are confirmed
in the faith of it.
" This kingdom of Christ on earth to come is a fixr more
glorious condition for the saints than what their souls have
now in heaven : for these here overlook that condition which
yet they were to run through ; and their thoughts fly to this
for comfort." — Com. on Rev. 5: 10.
" Let an indefinite warning that these things are approach-
ing, and we Avithin the reach of them, sufiice for to move us
to prepare for them, which is the only use of knowing them.
. . . And, although we may think this dismal and black cloud
of temptation not likely to come so soon, seeing the clouds rise
TESTIMONY OF OLD ENGLISH DISSENTERS. 317
not fast enough so suddenly to overcast the face of the sky
■with darkness, yet we are to consider that we live now in
the extremity of times, when motions and alterations, being
so near the centre, become quickest and speediest ; and we
arc at the verge, and, as it were, witliin the whirl of that
great mystery of Christ's kingdom, which will, as a gulf,
swallow up all time : and so the nearer we arc unto it, the
greater and more sudden changes will Clirist make, now
hasting to make a full end of alt" — Ex. of Apoc, p. 190.
testimony of old english dissenters.
Fkom a. Grosse.
(Pastor of Bridford, A. D. 1647.)
"No man rightly desires Christ's coming, but he that
hath assurance of the good and lienefit of His coming. To
them the day of Christ is as the day of harvest to the hus-
bandman, as the day of deliverance to the prisoner, as the
day of coronation to the king, as the day of wedlock to the
bride, — a day of triumph and exaltation, a day of freedom
and consolation, a day of rest and satisfaction ; to them the
Lord Jesus is all sweetness, as wine to the palate, and oint-
ment to the nostril, saith Solomon ; honey in the mouth,
saith Bernard : music in the ear, and a jubilee in the heart.
Get assurance of Christ's coming, as a ransonier to redeem
you, as a conqueror to subdue all your enemies under you,
as a friend to comfort you, as a king to honor you, as a
physician to heal you, as a bridegroom to marry you, and
then shall you Avith confidence and boldness, with joy and
gladness, with vehement and holy longings, say, ' Come
Lord Jesus.'" — Lou. Q. J. of Prophecy, p. 194, A. D.
1855.
From '• Sweet Old John Durant."
" I have heard of a poor man who. it seems, loved and
longed for Christ's appearance, that when there was a great
eartlu^uake, and when many cried out the day of judgment
was come, and one cried, ' Alas ! alas ! what shall I do ? ' and
a third, ' How sliall I hide myself? ' &c., that poor man only
said, 'Ah ! is it so? Is the day come? Where shalllgo?
Upon what mountain shall I stand to sec my Saviour?' "*
* CAr/.t/'s Appearance the Second Time for the Salvation of Believers,
I6r>.s. 27*
818 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
"0 how glorious •will that salvation be, vhen all the
heirs of salvation shall meet together ! Now, all are not
saved ; the whole body now is in trouble for a part. TJteti
all the children of the Father shall tneet together in their
Father's presence ; they shall come from the east and west,
from north and south, and sit down in that kingdom ; yea,
and then all saints shall be sweetly conjoined. Jewels scat-
tered are not so resplendent ; but joined in some rich pen-
dent, how glorious are they ! In that day Christ will
gather up all his jewels — he will bring in every saint into
one — gather them into one great jewel, one precious
j)endent, which shaU jointly lie in his ou-n bosom. Now
a saved soul sighs and cries, Where is Israel? — where is
Judah? When will the Lord save them? Why, poor
hearts, yoit shall all meet at that day — be saved with an
universal salvation ; and so be all of you with Abraham,
Isaac, and Jacob, and the patriarchs, prophets — all the
apostles and martyrs ; yea, all that fear God, small as well
as great. All, always, altogether in the presence of your
Saviour ! — surely, then, you will say, that salvation is very
sweet. Not one saint shall be missing in that day; but
all shall altogether meet, and enjoy the salvation of Christ
then, so universal shall it be."
"Our blessed Lord spoke of false Christs and false
prophets, and their prevailing deceits, as a sign of his coming
again. Though I am sorry, and who is not that believes
truth, that there have been so many diverse heresies
broached in these latter days, as was foretold ; yet I rejoice
in this, that they are a sign of the last days being at hand."
— Quoted from the Lon. Q. J. of Prophecy, vol. vi.,
p. 203.
Feom Thomas Vincent.
" We live in the end of the world, in the old age thereof.
. . . We are come not only to the declining years, but also
to the decrepid age of the world. And if the Lord Jesus
were to come shortly, in the days of the apostles, much more
shortly will he come now, when so many years are past
since the Scriptures were writ, and these things foretold." —
Se7'mon on the Plague, A. D. 1666.
testimony of old english dissenters. 319
From Thomas Watson.
(Who died A. D. 1G73.)
The judgment "cannot be fivr off. When the elect are
all converted, then Christ will come to judgment."
'• 'He that sat upon the throne said, Behold I make all
things new.' How imjircssive and sublime is the scene thus
presented ! Under the throne of him Avho is arrayed in the
glory of the Father lie heaven and earth, the present seat
of death, sorrow, and pain. He speaks, and they vanish,
and ' the former things are passed away.' He speaks again,
and a new heaven and earth spring into being ; ' The t;iber-
nacle of God is Avith men : ' and he that sittcth upon the
throne saith, 'Behold, I make all things new.' What a
dream will then our earthly sufferings and labors, our joys
and our sorrows, appear ! They iiave passed away, and a
new world opens to our view, to abide forever."
From Richard Baxter.
(Born A. D. Ifil5 ; died 1G9L)
"AVould it not rejoice your hearts if you were sure to
live to sec the coming of the Lord, and to see His glorious
appearing and retinue ? If you were not to die, but to be
caught up thus to meet the Lord, would you be averse to
this ? Would it not be the greatest joy that you could de-
sire ? For my own part, I must confess to you that death,
as death, appeareth to me as an enemy, and my nature doth
abhor and fear it. But the thouiihts of the cominti; of the
Lord are most sweet and joyful to me, so that if I were but
sure that I should live to see it, and that the trumpet should
sound, and the dead should rise, and the Lord appear, be-
fore the period of my age, it would be the joyfullest tidings
to me in the world. that I might see His kingdom
come ! It is the character of His saints to love His appear-
ing, and to look for that blessed hope ; ' The Spirit and the
bride say come : even so, come, Lord Jesus.' Come quickly,
is the voice of faith, and hope, and love. ButI find not that
His servants are thus characterized by their desire to die.
It is therefore the presence of their Lord that they desire, but
it is death that they abhor : and therefore, though they can
submit to death, it is the coming of Christ that they love
and long for. If death be the last enemy to be destroyed
820 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
at the resurrection, "we may learn how earnestly believers
should long and pray for the second coming of Christ,
when this full and final conquest shall be made. There is
something in death that is penal, even to believers ; but in
the coming of Christ and their resurrection there is nothing
but glorifying grace." — Works, vol. xvii., p. 555 — 590.
" Though I have not skill enough in the exposition of
hard prophecies to make a particular determination about
the thousand years' reign of Christ on earth before the final
judgment, yet I may say that I cannot confute what such
learned men as Mr. Mede, Dr. Twiss, and others (after the
old FatTiers), have hereof asserted But I believe there
will be a new heaven and earth, in which will dwell right-
eousness." — lb., vol. ii., p. 513; Lou. Qiiar. Jour, of
Proph., vol. ii., 115.
" Hasten, my Saviour, the time of thy return ; send
forth thine angels, and let that dreadful, joyful trumpet
sound : delay not, lest the living give up their hopes : de-
lay not, lest earth should grow like hell, and lest thy
church, by division, be crumpled all to dust, and dissolved,
by being resolved into individual units : delay not, lest
thine enemies get advantage of thy flock, and lest pride,
and hypocrisy, and sensuality, and unbelief, should prevail
against thy little remnant, and share among them thy
whole inheritance, and when thou comest thou find not
faith on the earth : delay not, lest the grave should boast of
victory; and having learned rebellion of its guest, should
plead prescription, and refuse to deliver thee up thy due.
0, hasten that great resurrection-day, when thy command
shall go forth, and none shall disobey ; when the sea and
earth shall yield up their hostages, and all that sleep in the
grave shall awake, and the dead in Christ shall first arise ;
when the seed that thou .sowest corruptible shall come
forth incorruptible ; and graves that received but rottenness,
and retained but dust, shall return thee glorious stars and
suns. Therefore, dare I lay down my carcass in the dust,
intrusting it, not to a grave, but to Thee ; and therefore
my flesh shall rest in hope, till thou raise it to the posses-
sion of the everlasting rest. Return, Lord! how long?
0, let thy kingdom come ! Thy desolate bride saith, come;
for thy Spirit within her saith, come, who teacheth her thus
TESTIMONY OF OLD ENGLISH DISSENTERS. 321
to pray with groanings after thee, which cannot be expressed :
the whole creation saith, come. — waiting to be delivered from
the bondage of corruption, into the glorious liberty of the
sons of God ; thyself hath said : Surely I come quickly.
Amen. Even so, come, Lord Jesus." — lb.
" This end is not far off. "We have but a little while to
wait, and we shall see the Lord upon the throne of his
glory, and see the accomplishment of his promise to his
saints ; for yet a little while, and he that comctli will come
and Avill not tarry. It is many ages since the apostle said
the end of all things is at hand." — Treatise on Conver-
sion.
From Josepu Alleine.
(Born A. D. 1G23, England; died 1068.)
In a letter written from his prison in Ilchcster jail, for
preaching the Gospel in his own house, to his flock in
Taunton, he said :
" If Paul do call upon so great an Evangelist as Timo-
thy, to remember that Jesus iras raised fro7n the dead
according to the Gospel, why should not I be often calling
upon myself, and upon you, my dearly beloved, to remem-
ber and meditate upon, and closely apply, the great and
weighty truths of the Gospel, which you have already re-
ceived ? . . . But I shall not, witli Paul, call upon you so
much to remember the resurrection of Christ, as the return
of Christ : Behold he comet h in the clouds, and every
eye shall see him ; your eyes and mine eyes. And all the
tribes of the earth shall mourn because of him. But we
shall lift up our heads, because the day of our redemption
drawcth nigh. This is the day I look for, and wait for,
and have laid up all my hopes in. If the Lord return not,
I jn-ofess myself undone : my preaching is vain, and my
suffering is vain ; and the bottom in which I have intrusted
all my hopes is forever miscarried. But I know whom I
have trusted. We have built upon the foundations of that
sure word : we are not built upon the sand of mortality.
Nor do we so run as uncertainly ; but the word of the
Lord abidcth forever, upon which word do we hope. How
fully doth this word assure us that this same Jesus that is
gone up into heaven shall so return, and that He shall ap-
322
ONE HUNDRED WIT2s^ESSES.
pear the second time unto salvation to tliem that look for
Him. 0, how sure is the tiling! How near is the time !
How glorious will His appearing be !
" The thing is sure ; the day is set ; God hath appointed
a day wherein He will judge the world by that Man whom
He hath ordained. The manner of it is revealed — Behold
the Lord cometh 'with ten thousand of his saints. The
attendants are appointed and nominated — The Son of
Man shall come in His glory, and all His holy angels
with Him. The thing, you see, is established, and every
circumstance is determined. How sweet are the words that
dropped from the precious lips of our departing Lord ! What
generous cordials hath He left us in His parting sermons,
and His last prayer ! And yet of all the rest these are the
sweetest, / 7cill come again and receive you to myself,
that where I am there you may be also. What need you
any further witness?" — Duff's Life of Alleine, p. 217.
"And ivill become? Tremble, then, ye sinners; but tri-
umph, ye saints ! Clap your hands, all ye that look for the
consolation of Israel ! children of the Most High, how
will you forget your travail, and be melted into joy ! This
is he in whom you have believed ; whom, not having seen,
ye have loved. my soul, look out and long ! my
brethren, be you as the mother of Sisera, looking out at
the windows, and watching at the lattice, saying Why are his
chariot-ioheels so long in coming? Though the time till
ye shall see him be very short, yet love and longing make it
seem tedious. My beloved, comfort your hearts with these
wox-ds : look upon these things as the greatest realities, and
let your aifections be answerable to your expectations. I
would not have told you these things unless I had believed
them ; it is for this hope that I am bound with this chain.
The blessing of the Holy Trinity be upon you, &c." —
Elements of Projjhetic Interpretation, p. 76.
On his death-bed, wdien he looked on his weak, consumed
hands, he would say :
' ' These shall be changed : this vile body shall be made
like to Christ's glorious body. 0, what a glorious day
will the day of the resurrection be ! Methinks I see it by
faith. How will the saints lift up their heads and rejoice ;
and how sadly will this wicked world look then ! 0, come,
TESTIMONY OF OLD ENGLISH DISSENTERS. 323
let US make haste ; our Lord will come shortly, let us pre-
pare ! '" — Duff's Life of J^eine^ p. 103.
From James Janeway.
(AVho died 1CT4.)
" Of this I am confident, through infinite mercy, that
the very meditation of that day hath ever ravished my soul ;
and tlic thought of the certainty and nearness of it is more
refreshing to me than the comforts of the woild.'' — Qiiolcd
frum Voice of the ChiircJi., p. 180.
From Stephen Charnock, D.D.
(Born A. D. 1028, in London; died 1080.)
"As the world, for the sin of man, lost its first dignity, and was
cursed after the fall, and the beauty bestowed on it by creation
defaced, so shall it recover that ancient glory, when he shall
be luUy restored, by the resurrection, to tliat dignity he lost
l)y liis first sin. As man shall be freed from his corrupti-
bility, to receive that glory which is prepared for him, so
shall the creatures be freed from that imperfection or cor-
ruptibility, those stains and spots upon the face of them,
to receive a new glory suited to their nature, and answera-
ble to the design of God, when the ' glorious liberty ' of the
saints shall be accomplished." — Attribitfes of God.
" As when (see Mestrazat on lleb. 1) a prince's nuptials
are solemnized, the whole country echoes with joy, so the
inanimate creatures, when the time of the marriage of the
Lamb is come, shall have a delight and pleasure from that
renovation. The apostle sets forth the whole irorhl as a per-
son fjroaiiinfj, and the Scriptures are fre;dom the Lord Jesus
Christ himself will be alone, visible, supreme Lord and
King of the Avliole earth.
" We believe that as this kingdom will be universal, so it
will be also an everlasting kingdom, that shall have no end,
nor cannot be shaken ; in which kingdom the saints and
faithful in Christ Jesus shall receive the end of their faith,
even the salvation of their souls ; where the Lord is they
shall be also.
" We believe that the New Jerusalem that shall come
down from God out of heaven, when the tabernacle of God
shall be with them, and he will dwell among them, will be
the metropolitan city of this kingdom, and Avill be the glo-
rious place of residence of both Christ and his saints forever,
and will be so situated as that the kingly palace will be on
Mount Zion, tlie holy hill of David, where his throne was."
— Crosby' s Hi^t. of the Haptlsts.
testimony of baptist divines. 339
From John Buntan.
(The Prince of Dreaiucrs; born A. D. 1028; died 1688.)
" None ever saw tins Avorlil as it was in its first creation;
but Adam and liis wife, neither will any see it unlil the
manifestation of the children of God: that is, until the re-
demption or resurrection of the saints. But then it shall be
delivered from the bondage of corruption into the glorious
liberty of the children of God. Adam, therefore, as a type
of Christ, reigned in the church almost a thousand years.
The world, tlierefore, ])eginning thus, doth show us how it
Avill end. viz., by the reign of the second Adam, as it began
with the reign of the first. These long-lived nvni, therefore,
show us the glory that the church shall have in the latter
day, even in the seven thousandth year of the world, thot
Sabbath when Christ shall set up his kingdom on earth.
According to that which is written : ' They lived and reigned
with Chri.st a thousand years.' .... Hence, therefore, in
the first place, the dragon is chained for these thousand
years." — John Banyan, on the First Chapters of
Genesis.
From Rev. John Gill, D.D.
(Tlic Baptist commentator; born A. D. 1G97, in England; died 1771.)
" We Christians look for new heavens, and a neip earth,
irherein dirc/lcth ri;jlifeousness, righteous persons, and.
they only, 2 Pet. 3 : 13. The things to be inquired into
are. what these new heavens and earth be, and who the
inhabitants of them.
I. What are meant by the new heavens and the new
earth, in the above passages ; — these are to be understood not
in a fiiTurative, but in a literal sense. 1. Not in a figura-
tive sense, as of the Gospel church state ; Peter could never
speak of the new heavens and new earth in this sense as
future. The Gospel church state, even in the first and
purest ages of it, was not perfect as the state of things will
be ; but in the new heavens and the new earth none but
such as are perfectly righteous will dwell in the New Jeru-
salem state : there will be no temple, no worship, in the
manner that now is. Nor is it to be understood of the state
of the Jews at the time of their conversion. This will be
340 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
before the new heavens and new earth are formed, Rev. 19 :
7, 8. Nor of the spiritual reign of Christ, which will be in
the present earth, and not in the new one. Nor of the
heavenly state, or the ultimate glory ; for these new heavens
and earth are distinct from the third heaven, the seat of
that. The camp of the saints, and the holy and beloved
city, are j'epresented as on earth, even at the end of a thou-
sand years, Rev. 20 : 9. 2. The new heavens and new
earth are to be understood in a literal sense; a literal sense
is not to be departed from without necessity ; the phrase,
Iteaven. and earthy is used by the apostle Peter frequently,
and always literally in the sublunary world ; by the new
ones can be meant no other. (1.) The new heavens must
be interpreted of the airy heavens, and of a new air in them ;
purged, purified, and refined by fire ; no storms of hail, no
stores of snow, no blustering storms and tempests, no
coruscations and flashes of lightning, nor peals of thunder;
but a pure, serene, and tranquil air, quite suited to the
bodies of raised saints ; the air will now be cleared of devils,
the whole body of them Avill be cast into the abyss.
(^2.) The new earth will be an earth refined and renewed,
and restored to its paradisaical estate, as it was before the fall.
It shall no more bring forth thorns and thistles, nor require
labor and pains to cultivate it. It must be but reasonable,
that since Christ hath redeemed his people from the curse
of the law, being made a curse for them, that every degree
of that curse should be removed ; which, as yet, is not from
the earth particularly : when the second Adam, and his
seed, come to enjoy the earth alone, accordingly, thciu icill
he 11.0 more curse, Rev. 22 : 3.
II. The inhabitants of the new heavens and the new earth
are next to be considered. These are described, 1. By the
name oi rigltteousness itself; wlierein, in the new heavens
and earth, dicelleth rirjhteoiisness, 2 Pet. 3: 13. that is,
righteous persons ; see Isaiah 60 : 21, Thy people shall be
all ri(jhteoiis, iheij shall inherit the land forever: Psal.
37 : 29, The righteous shall inherit the kaid, and difell
therein forever. 2. The inhabitants of which are the
palm-bearing company in Rev. 7 : 9, for this vision is
synchronal, or cotemporary, with that of the new heavens
and the new earth. These are the persons, and this Avill be
TESTIMONY OF BAPTIST DIVIXES. 341
the happy case of the inhabitants of the new heavens and the
new earth." — Gill's Divini/i/, pp. 427 — 8.
'• Christ Avill have a special, peculiar, ., pp. 04, 65.
'* When we reflect that in that day of which we speak
sorrow and sighing shall forever flee away, they who know
what sorrow and sighing mean may well desire it. When
we are assured that in that day God himself shall wipe
away tears from all faces, they Avho too well know what it
is to shed tears of bitterness may well long for its rising,
as then they shall bid an eternal farewell to all the troubles
of our fiillen humanit}'-, and exchange them for joy un-
speakable and fulness of glory." — lb., p. 06.
364 ONE HUXDRED "WITNESSES.
From the Rev. 0. J. Goodhart, M.A.
(Minister of St. Mary's Chapel, Reading.)
" While numberless passages all state clearly the pre-
millennial personal advent of Jesus, there is not a single
passage, Avhich can be produced from the Old Testament,
and it would be easy to sliow that this remark might be ex-
tended to the New, to prove that there is any advent of
Christ after the Millennium."— 76., p. 80.
" The time is flist running out; and soon he that shall
come, will come and will not tarry. And then., no longer
will the darkness contend with the light, no longer will the
struggle seem to be doubtful, or the throne of the universe
to be in abeyance ; no longer will heavenly truth throw out
its scattered and broken beams upon our sin-smitten earth ;
but out of the midst of fearful convulsion, and tremendous
storm, with flame of devouring fire, shall the Sun of
Righteousness arise in mid-day splendor, w^ith healing under
his wings, and bless our creation to its remotest bound with
his everlastiniz; and unclouded light.
" And now, then, you see what will come of all the pur-
poses of God. You see the first man, who was of the earth,
earthy, superseded by the second man, who is the Lord
from heaven : you see the world, that stood simply under
the law of creation, brought to the higher standing of the
law of redemption ; and you see the glory of redemption
made more glorious still by the glory of a complete salva-
tion. And how is all this to be ? Not, according to the
common notion, by the destruction of the heavens and of
the earth, but by their purification and renewal in right-
eousness and beauty. Then shall the morning stars again
sing together, and the sons of God shout for joy; for
when he bringeth again his first-begotten into the world, he
saith, ' And let all the angels of God worsliip him.' "
—lb.., p. 83.
"This, then, is the end of my hope! Thou, my Lord
and my God, shalt come again with powder and great glory ;
Thou shalt take unto Thee Thy great power and reign ; and
Thou shalt change my vile body, that it may be like unto
Thy glorious body, according to the working of Thy
mighty yjo?6'e/- ; and I shall awake up after Thy likeness!
TESTIMONY OF THE CUURCII OF ENGLAND. 365
It is enough, Lord ! Be it so ! I shall be satisfied with
it! "— 77te Priest upon his Throne, pp. 230, 231.
From the Rev. W. Dalton, M.A.
(Incumbent of St. Paul's, AVolverhampton.)
" Everything about us seems defiled and out of joint;
there is a heaving of the sea of discord, ^Yhich is felt to
agitate and disquiet, — a sort of prelude of that fearful
storm which will burst on the church just previous to its
eternal calm. We have now to meet with sorrows and be-
reavements in this world of separation ; we have now to
weep and lament over the uprisings of the evil principle
which we have inherited from Adam, and which struggles
so hard against the heavenly nature implanted by Christ;
all this we have now to meet, and therefore we have need of
]>aticnce. Your Lord would have you learn this lesson
daily, whilst yet he tarries in the heavenly sanctuary, and
has not sot out to take possession of his millennial kingdom.
But, then, he gives you the sweet assurance that the delay
is short, and that very soon we shall behold him in his
robes of majesty, attended by myriads of holy angels and
glorified saints, proclaiming, with a voice of supremacy,
that shall be heard to the utmost bounds of creation,
' Behold, I make all things new ! ' " — Lectures during
Lent, p. 106.
FiiOM THE Rev. J. W. Brooks, M.A.
(Rector of East Retford, England.)
"The signs of the Second Advent in the state of tlie
world at large are such as to impress my own mind with a
deep persuasion that we are on the eve of events of im-
mense — immense importance to mankind." — lb., pp.
100, 110.
" Though I distinguished only some few signs as in
themselves cheering, yet, when considered as the tokens of
our Lord's approach, all are cheering : therefore he bids us,
as in the text, ' when we shall see these things only begin
to come to pass, to lift up our heads because our re-
demption draweth nigh.' And if the beginnings of these
things are calculated to inspire us with hope and joy, how
31*
366
ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
much more their fulness ! Yes, those things -which are
dark and appalling to the world, — like the pillar and the
cloud, — will be as light and brightness to the saints; who,
when all is roaring and raging and upheaving round about
them, shall be ardently waiting for, but most surely expect-
ino;, and in the midst of it obtainino;, deliverance from cor-
ruption, into the glorious
of God."— 76., p. 152.
glorious liberty of the children
From the Kev. T. E. Birks, M.A.
(Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge.)
" Truth, in its details, makes a far greater demand on
our faith than when presented in a general form. The res-
urrection, as an abstract theory, may have a deep interest
even for worldly men. Philosophers may love to speculate
on its hidden laws ; while others, of a more imaginative
temper, may be allured by its beauty. It may awaken in
them a sti'ange sense of awe and mystery, and exercise
over them the fascination of some Avild and fliiry dream.
But the doctrine of the First Resurrection strips away
from the whole subject this unreal character. It is no longer
a lifeless theory, a plaything of the fancy ; it stands out in
bold relief as an historical fact, linked in with the chain of
actual events, and with the whole course of Divine provi-
dence. It now becomes a solemn reality of eternal interest,
which strikes on the unawakened conscience with intolera-
ble power. And thus thousands, who repeat continually
those words of the creed, almost without a thought, — ' I
believe in the resurrection of the body,' — would start, per-
haps, at the bare mention of the First Resurrection, as at
some apparition from the dead." — lb., p. 155.
" ' They lived and reigned with Christ a thousand years.'
Why is this precise period thus marked off, as it were, from
the immeasurable ages of eternity? The words of St.
Peter suggest an answer : ' A thousand years with the Lord
are as one day.' And Avhat mysterious day can be here de-
signed ? The key is given us in the very opening of the
Word of God. There, in the birth-week of creation, the
outlines of God's providence in redemption are set before
us. In six days these lower heavens and earth were made,
TESTIMONY OF THE CHURCH OF EXGLAXD. 367
and on the seventh God rested from his works. So, for near
six thousand years, the mystery of redemption is carried
on, till at length, at the sounding of the seventh angel, the
mystery of God shall be finished, and the Millennial Sab-
bath shall complete and hallow the new creation of God."'
— lb., pp. 185, 186.
" The scene of the martyrs' sufferings shall witness their
exaltation. They who have been rejected outcasts in a
world of rebels shall be crowned with honor and dominion
over a world redeemed from the foil. The glorious equity
of God shall thus be no less conspicuous than the triumph
of his grace ; and men and angels shall join in that adoring
song : ' Great and marvellous are thy works, Lord God Al-
mighty ; just and true are thy ways, thou King of
Saints!'"— 76., p. 187.
From the Rev. Alexander Dallas, M.A.
(Rector of Wonstou, Hants.)
" The history of this world's life, so far as we are informed
of it, is just as a week — 7,000 years, which is as a
mere speck in its whole existence. Before Adam was, there
was an eternity, during which the world was not ; and after
the period to which we are brought at the end of the book
of the Revelation there will be an eternity, during which
the world icill be ; for God has distinctly declared that he
Las made the world to be inhabited." — 76., p. 235.
" In order to restore the world exactly to what God made
it, to what we find it in the second chapter of Genesis, and
to make it what it shall be found millions of years hence. —
inhabited by the children of Adam, good men, very good,
as he made their father, and granted to man the sovereignty
over his works, — it pleased him to pay an enormous price ;
he gave his own Son to save the world, and to restore all
things on the earth." — 76., p. 236.
From the Rev. W. R. Fremantle, M.A.
(Rector of Claydon, Bucks.)
" As then the gray streak of the dayspring sheds a faint-
er light than the sun when risen in his strength, so the
grace of the Gentile morning has no glory in this respect
368 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
by reason of the glory that excelleth. During the personal
absence of the sovereign the influence of the crown is re-
flected by delegated agency ; but, ! what will be the
splendor of the day when the King appears, wearing his
many crowns, and attended by a train of ten thousand times
ten thousand of his saints,— when every tongue in heaven
shall say, ' Thou art the King of glory, Christ,' and when
every eye in Jerusalem sliall see the Lord to be her ever-
lastmg light, and her God her glory ! " — lb., p. 253.
From the Rev. Thomas Hill, B.D.
(Prebendary of Litchfield, and Vicar of Cliesterfield.)
"The Scriptures intimate to us that this period "of pro-
bation has its limit, and will end in a judgment to be passed
on all, both angels and men, by that man whom God hath
ordained : and that this judgment is immediately prepara-
tory to the establishment of a mighty kingdom, of Avhich
there shall be no end." — lb., p. 284.
"That truth, which nature and reason could but suggest
or approve, stands revealed in the broad page of inspiration,
from its earliest to its latest records. From the proclama-
tion of Enoch to the antediluvian rebels, of the Lord's
coming wath his holy myriads ' to execute judgment upon
all,' to the gracious assurance with which the canon of Scrip-
ture closes, ' Behold I come quickly, and my reward is
with 'me, to give every man according as his uwric shall
ie,' the judgment of the world in righteousness has been
the theme, support, and joy, of the faithful, and the subject
of their warnmg to the world in which they lived." —
lb., p. 285.
From the Rev. Edward Bickersteth.
(Late Rector of Watton, Herts; born A. D. 178C; died 1850.)
"This day, then, is at hand. The judgment of the
righteous is now very near. The time of judg-
ment may come before, in the ordinary course of nature,
the younger amongst us might die. Never could it be so
emphatically said as now, Stablish your hearts, for the
coming of the Lord draiceth nigh. Behold, the Judge
standeth before the door. Live, then, in the constant con-
TESTIMONY OF THE CHURCH OF ENGLAND. 869
templation of this coming judgment. Act in the constant
view of its solemn decisions. Dread, above all dread, being
unprepared to meet your God. Desire, above all desire, to
be ready for the coming of the Son of man." — //>., p. 345.
"Then shall wg realize the rapturous song -whicli has so
often below raised our souls to God, ' We praise thee,
God, we acknowledge thee to be the Lord. All the earth
doth worship thee, the Father everlasting. To thee all an-
gels cry aloud. The heavens and all the powers therein.
To thee cberubim and seraphim continually do cry. Holy,
holy, holy, Lord God of Sabaoth. Heaven and earth are
full of the majesty of thy glory.' This scene of bliss is
before us ; tliis glory is at hand. Meditate upon it. Live
forit."— /<^., pp. 346, 347.
From the Rev. Jas. Haldane Stewart, M.A.
(Incumbent of St. Bride's, Liverpool.)
" If there be any one topic more than another calculated
to solemnize the mind, to bring us as lowly suppliants to
the Throne of Grace, and to lead to watchfulness and prayer,
while at the same time it cheers and animates the spirit,
filling it with that blessed hope, which led the apostles, the
army of martyrs, and, we may add, our Protestant fore-
fathers, to ' count all things but loss for the excellency of
the knowledge of Christ Jesus their Lord,' — if there be
any subject calculated to produce these blessed eifects, it is
' the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour
Jesus Christ.' "—lb., pp. 351, 352.
" ! that the Holy Spirit, of his infinite mercy and
goodness, would deeply impress our minds with this important
truth ; so that, instead of being like those to whom the Lord
shall come unawares, we may be of that happy number who
are making ready for His appearing, and who, when He docs
come, shall be able to say, • Lo ! this is our God ; we have
■waited for Him, and He will save us : this is the Lord ; we
have waited for Him, we will be glad and rejoice in His sal-
vation.'" — lb., p. 355.
370 one hundred witnesses.
From the Rev. E. Hoare, M.A.
(Incumbent of Christ's Church, Ramsgate.)
At Christ's advent, "all conditions of the eternal cove-
nant will be fulfilled, and all the Avork to which he was
anointed amply performed. There will not remain one of
his elect ungathered, nor a single spot on the garment of
any one of them, when lie presents them spotless and un-
blamable before the throne. Throughout the world will
there be found no rebel thoughts, for the ' new heavens and
the new earth ' shall be filled with righteousness ; there
shall be no injustice, no support of sin, no strife and back-
bitings ; ' nation shall not lift up sword against nation,
neither shall they learn war any more.' There shall be no
more blood-stained battle-fields, nor any broken-hearted
widows, for the whole world shall rest under the holy sov-
ereignty of the Pi-ince of Peace." — The Priest iwon his
Throne* pp. 141, 142.
From tee Rev. B. Philpot, M.A.
(E.cctor of Great Crcssingham.)
" Hope is a prophetic grace ; and as faith gets more gen-
uine and distinct, hope will grow more active and sustain-
ing. When fliith's backward gaze on the bright obscure of
Calvary is clear and strong, then hope's prospective glance
penetrates into heaven itself, with animating anticipations of
the day when He shall ' rend the heavens and come
down.' "— /Z»., p. 271.
"Who can contemplate without a thrill of joy the sud-
den meeting in glory of all God's dear family ! Moses and
Abraham and David, the loving John, the resolute Peter,
the unwearied Paul, the weeping Mary, and Mary the
mother of Jesus ; some loved parent, it may be, or some
dear children of our own, whom we found it so hard to part
with even for so brief a season, — all Avill he there to meet
us, and to part no more forever ! Chiefest of all, Imman-
uel himself will be there ; our eyes shall behold Him and
not another; our hands shall handle Him, and our heads
*• This volume comprises the twelve discourses delivered at the Blooms-
bury Chapel, during Leut, A. D. 1849.
TESTIMONY OF THE CHURCH OF ENGLAND. 371
shall rest on His bosom ; and there shall be ' heard, as it
were, the voice of a great multitude, as the voice of many
waters, and as the voice of many thunderiugs, saying. Al-
leluia, for the Lord God omnipotent reigneth.'
"Nor to man alone, but to all this ' groaning creation,'
there cometh a glorious deliverance. The apostle, using
tlie same word in Heb. 2 : 3, connects this salvation with
Christs complete victory over the Prince of this world, and
the entire ' subjection of the world to come,' including the
' beasts of the field, the fowl of the air, and the fish of the
sea," beneath his righteous and peaceful dominion. (Com-
pare Heb. 2 : 3—8, with Psal. viii.)'— /Z»., pp. 283, 284.
"Am I looking for the coming of the Lord? Is the in-
clination of my mind to welcome Jesus? Amid the conflicts
of the wilderness am I wearing 'for an helmet the hope
of salvation " ? and having that hope, am I ' purifying my-
self even as He is pure " ? If these questions can be met
with confidence, then is there animating proof that our
hope of seeing the coming Saviour as he is, and reigning
with Him on earth, is a sure and ' blessed hope ; ' and ' the
day of the Lord will not overtake us as a thief in the night; '
yea, rather, it will accomplish our ' perfect consummation
and bliss, both in body and soul, in his eternal and everlast-
ing glory.' ''—lb., pp. 285, 286.
"Even now there is a sound of his chariot- Avheels upon
the mountains. He is on his way back to rescue his Aveary
bride from the conflict." — /6., p. 287.
From the Rev. Mourant Brock, M.A.
(Chaplain to the Bath Penitentiary.)
" ' We, according to his promise, look for a new heavens.'
These will be more beautiful than the present; and yet how
fail- are these ! ' And a new earth ; ' this also will t)e more
beautiful than the present, because for a higlier grade of
beings. And yet how fair is it ! And, to crown all, in these
'dwelleth righteousness.' Physical and moral loveliness
in sweet accord will here meet, and the result Avill be, what
eartli since the fall has never witnessed, — Perfection. Then
shall we l)ehold forms and converse with beings of surpassing
beauty, whom it shall neither harm us to admire, nor them
372 ONE HUXDRED WITNESSES.
to be admired. Then shall the love of the ci-eature ever be
hi continued and unresisting submission to the love of Jesus.
Whilst the glory that shall surround Him, and His, who
shall tell ! Only, Lord, may we soon behold it, even the
King in his beauty.''
'• How sweet the society of those who are departed ! How
odorous their lives, hoAv pleasant their deaths, how sweet
their love, how cherished their memory ! But, how sweeter
far their society under the happy auspices of the Heavenly
Jerusalem, and in the presence of Jesus ! Here, loved as
they were, still they were imperfect ; but there, perfect, per-
fected in Him who is the Head. And here the certainty of
separation cast an alloy into enjoyment ; but there, united to
them, we are united forever. Blessed state, which in bands
indissoluble shall link together those, who, here joined in
Jesus, shall there from his presence, and from each other,
never again be sundered ! "
' ' The believing man, whose eyes are opened to the future,
sees that vain is any expectation, in the present state, of
church perfection in the way of unity, or uniformity. But
to such an one, the future — the church of the future —
when every member will be holy and regenerate, and Christ
in person shall be present — to such an one it is the future
to which he turns his eye, and towards which he directs his
expectations. The New Jerusalem will reveal a perfect
Church of Eangs and Priests : perfect in unity within, for
they shall have one heart and one mind — and perfect in
uniformity without, for they shall have one present and
visible Head. Here will be a blessed church state indeed."
— /Z»., pp. 316, 317, 318.
" It is at the resurrection, called 'the adoption,' that re-
demption shall be fully manifested and perfected. The body
shall be redeemed from the grave. The spirit shall be fully
emancipated from the power of sin. Man"s habitation, the
earth, shall also be redeemed from all iniquity, whilst the
New Jerusalem descending from God out of heaven shall
give to redemption perfection and eternity. Then, and not
till then, shall be seen the fulness and perfection of the Re-
deemer's work. Then shall the top-stone be put to it. Then
shall redemption, the result and fruit of thousands of years
of preparation, shine forth in all its perfection and glory,
TESTIMONY OF ENGLISH AND SCOTCH LAYMEN. 373
the crowning Avork of the Almighty, the admiration of men
and angelSj through eternitj." — 76., pp. 322, 323.
From the Rev. John Hooper.
(Rector of Albur_y, Surrey.)
*' We cannot be too deeply impressed with a sense of the
vraritcss nnd suddciniess 0? the Lords appearing. . , Hence
the exhortation of our Lord, ' Watch, therefore, for ye
know neither the day nor the hour wherein the Son of man
Cometh.' Let us, then, remember that the sixth seal has
long been opened ; that tlie sixth trumpet has well-nigh
ceased to sound ; the sixth vial of God's wrath nearly elid-
ed : and that the solemn warning under the outpouring of
that vial has been proclaimed in our hearing — ' Jicliohl I
come as a thief. Blessed is lie that vatclicfh, and kccp-
etli his garments, lest he walk naked and theij see his
shame.' Let us take heed, therefore, that these words of
the Lord be not spoken in vain ; for we know not how soon
the seventh seal may l>e opened. We dare not count on
another year ! Yes. l)efore to-morrow, the last truni]) may
sound ; and then will tiie seventh and last vial of God's
wratli 1)0 poured out ! We have, therefore, the strongest
proof that can be given of the nearness of these events."
— Revelation of Jesus Christ, pp. 281, 282.
TESTIMONY OF ENGLISH AND SCOTCH LAYMEN.
From His Grace, George, Duke of Manchester.
" If we are led to expect a spiritual Millennium before
the second advent of Messiah, and that his return will be
only to judge the world at the dissolution of all things, we
must give up our expectation of a grammatical fulfilment
of the prophecies and promises ; because there would be
neither time nor place for the literal accomplishment of that
promise, towards wliich all the prophecies converge, and
from which all the promises of the ensuing glories radiate.
Those who hold that the church's triumpli will bo
during Christ's personal presence upon this earth receive the
prophecies, in the main, according to the plain tenor of their
language ; whilst their opponents, who expect the fulfilment
32
37-4 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
of the prophecies respecting the reign of Messiah, all
with regard to the restoration of Israel, and all relating to
the renovation of the earth, prior to the literal advent of the
Lord, must adopt a method of interpretation, which they
perhaps call spirituaUzing^ but Avhich, in fact, throws am-
biguity and mystery over language which to the literalist
appears clear and explicit." — The Finished Mystery, pp.
243, 2U.
From Wm. Cuninghame, Esq.
(Of Lainshare, in Ayr.)
" All the events of our o^yn times, — the growing disor-
ganization of the body politic, — the fears and expectations
of men, — the deep persuasion of an impending convulsion in-
rooted in every thinking mind, similar to the instincts of
animal nature befoi'e the approach of the earthquake, — the
solemn and awakening declarations of Scripture, — the clear
and unequivocal voice of prophecy, — every sign, every prom-
ise, every testimony, unite in announcing his approach."—
Fulness of Times, p. 166. A. D. 1834.
" If we, who have watched every sign in the spiritual
horizon for a long series of years, were now asked, ' Is any
sign of his coming yet accomplished?' we should be con-
strained to answer, ' To our view, not one sign remains un-
accomplished.' If we were further asked, ' Shall he come
this year ? ' our answer would be, ' We know not ; but
this much we know and believe, that he is at hand^ even
at the door.^ " — Visions, p. 100.
From Hugh Miller, Esq.
" Faith, undeceived by the mirage of the midway desert,
whatever form or name, political or religious, the phantasma-
goria may bear, must continue to look beyond its unsolid
tremulous glitter — its bare rocks exaggerated into air-
drawn castles, and its stunted bushes magnified into goodly
trees, — and, fixing her gaze upon the reci'eation yet future,
the terminal dynasty yet unbegun, she must be content to
enter upon her final rest — for she will not enter upon it ear-
lier — at return
TESTIMONY OF ENGLISH AND SCOTCH LAYMEN. 375
■ of Him, the woman's seed,
r
Last in tlie clouds from heaven to be revealed
In the glory of the Father, to dissolve
Satan with his perverted world, then raise
From the conflagrant mass, purged and refined.
New heavens, new earth, ages of endless date.
Founded in righteousness and peace and love.
To bring forth fruits, joy, and eternal bliss." — !Milton.
Footprints, p. 13G. A. D. 1850.
From Matthew Habershon, Esq.
(Of Bonner's Ilall, near Hackney.)
" The time undoubtedly is now near at hand when 'the
redemption of the body ' shall be experienced, and when these
bodies of our humiliation shall be fashioned like unto his
own glorious body. Well may the church, then, exult in
the prospect before her, of her complete and final deliver-
ance from all her enemies ; and anticipate, with feelings of
the highest delight, the joyful annunciation ' Behold, tho
Bridegroom cometli ! ' Her days of mourning and sorrow
will then be at an end, and ' God himself will wipe away
all tears from their eyes.' Christ will take unto himself
his great power, ' and reign with his saints on the earth; '
and the time be fully arrived when the great Juliilee of a
thousand years, so beautifully and rapturously described by
Isaiah, and in the last chapters of the Revelation, will com-
mence.
' scenes surpassing fable, and yet true !
Scenes of accomplished bliss ! which who can see.
Though but in distant prospect, and not feel
His soul refrcsheil with foretaste of the joy ?
*****
One song employs all nations ; and all cry,
" Worthy the Lamb, for he was slain for us ! "
The dwellers in the vales and on the rocks
Shout to each other, and the mountain tops
From distant mountains catcli the flying joy ;
Till, nation after nation taught tlie strain.
Earth rolls the rapturous Ilosanna round.
Behold tlie measure of the promise filled !
See Salem built, the labor of a God !
Bright as a sun the saci-ed city shines ;
All kingdoms and all princes of the earth
Flock to that light ; the glory of all lands
Flows into her ; unbounded is her joy.
And endless her increase. * * *
Pi'aise is in all her gates ; upon her walls.
37G ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
And in her streets, and in her spacious courts.
Is heard Salvation.
From every clime they come
To see thy beauty and to share thy joy,
Sion ! an assembly such as earth
Saw never, such as heaven stoops down to see.' " — Cowper.
Guide to Chronological Prophecy, pp. 53, 54. Pub. in 1835.
From William Thorp, Esq.
(Of London.)
" The great Messiah, the Son of God, will appear m maj-
esty and glory, to subdue every hostile power, and to dis-
place all earthly dominion, preparatory to the establishment
of his millennial kingdom Paradise shall be restored,
and coextended with the limits of the globe The
throne of God and of the Lamb shall be there, and his ser-
vants shall serve him." — Destiny of the British Emjm'Sj
p. 20. A. D. 1839.
From Charles Sabine, Esq.
(Of Owesty, Shropshire.)
"What has his church to fear? Why should she stop
her ear, when she is told that the Lord is at hand ? Why
should the bride tremble at the comino; of the Bridegroom,
or try to believe that his coming is all a fable, all a delu-
sion ? Why should the Lamb's wife turn away her eye
from the face of her beloved ? 0, but you say, ' She does
not; she looks for his spiritual coming.' His spiritual
coming ! What ! Is Ichabod written on her door ? Has
the Lord's Spirit departed from her ? Has he left her, to
whom was said, ' Lo I am with you alway, even to the
end of the world ' ? Has he broken his word ? Has he,
indeed, departed in spirit, as well as in person, that she is
looking for him thus to return to her ? His spiritual com-
ing ! Who can have taught her thus to tamper with, thus
to nullify, her hope ? Not the Lord himself, not the apostles,
not the angels, who stood by to comfort the widowed and
sorrowing church, who, as the cloud received her Lord out of
her sight, thus consoled her : ' Ye men of Galilee, why
stand ye gazing up into heaven ? This same Jesus, who
is now taken up from you into heaven, shall so come in like
TESTIMONY OF ENGLISH AND SCOTCH LAYMEN. 377
manner as ye have seen liim go into heaven.' Did he spir-
itually go ? Then spiritually he Avill return. Did he go
personally and bodily? Then personally and bodily will he
return. Who mocks the sorrow and taunts the hope of the
loving wife, by telling her that her absent husband will re-
turn to her spiritually? And where is the loving wife
whom such mockery would persuade to quit her Avatch-
tower, or her accustomed evening walk, that she niay look
out for and welcome the return of the beloved of her heart?
"But I hear it asked, as I often have, ' Where is the dif-
ference, whether we go to him, or he comes to us ? ' I leply,
simply this : that the departure of the individual believer's
spirit to the bosom of the Lord is one thing, but not the
thing of which we are speaking, The coming of the Lord
is another thing. I know well that the individual believer
is taught to concentrate all his hopes in the article of death,
when the spiritascends to God whogave it, and when he is told
that he shall receive his crown of glory. But, as I know
that St. Paul is still waiting for his, — for that crown which
the Lord, the righteous Judge, shall give him at that day,
the day of his appearing, and not to him only, but to all
those that love that appearing, — I know that such teaching is
not only unscriptural, but that it turns the eye of the churchy
and of each individual member of it, from the one great
object of hope — the coming of the Lord to raise his sleep-
ing saints, and to change his living ones, clothing them all
with his own image and likeness. It puts out of sight,
far out of sight, the resurrection of the body ; and not out
of sight only, but out of the reach of all practical, influential
belief. This was not the teaching of the apostles, who
preached Jesus and the I'csurrcction. not Jesus and deaths
as the hope of the church. Resurrection, not as an object
to be contemplated at the close, but at the commencement, of
the millennial kingdom. It was the resurrection of the
body which inspired them with hope, and which made them
look with such eager desire for the coming of the Lord.
' If by any means I might attain unto the resurrection of
the dead ! ' exclaims one who well knew what he was panting
and striving after, — a body fashioned like unto the glorious
body of his beloved Lord. No wonder the early Christians
were continually exclaiming, ' Come, Lord Jesus, come
32*
378 • ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
quickly.^ And wlien the last of the holy penmen heard the
words ' Surely I come quickly,' no wonder that he breathed
out his soul in the last words of inspiration, ' Amen, even so,
come. Lord Jesus.' And no wonder, now that the church
has been taught to put death in the place of the resurrec-
tion, that she cares not how long the Lord may tarry, or how
slow his chariot-wheels may be in coming. And why this
difference, this contrast between the hopes and expectations
of the primitive and the modern church ? Your ' Jubilee
Hynm ' explains it all. The world must be converted before
the Lord can come. This conversion may, and probably
will, take thousands of years to accomplish ; and Avhen ac-
complished, it is to enjoy a thousand years of blessedness
and glory, which may mean, as I have heard from the pul-
pit, a thousand years, each day for a year, or 365,000
years ; and then the Lord w'ill come to destroy it ; and then
the saints shall have their resurrection-bodies. What won-
der, then, that the church has fallen in love with the king
of terrors, and taken refuge in the blessedness of the dis-
embodied spirit, clothing it in all the glory of the disem-
bodied state ? What wonder that books are written by
learned divines to prove that there is no resurrection of the
body* but that all the change takes place at death ? What
wonder that a version of the Bible should have appeared
with 20,000 emenclations-f (?), and among them the substi-
tution of the ^future state ' for the resurrection^ and the
introduction of that state for the resurrection's synonym ?
But wonder it is that such things do not startle the church
from its dream. Will nothing do so but the midnight cry ?
0, sir, we laymen want apostolic preaching
and teaching on the subject of dispensational truth. We
know what it is, thank God ! We have the Bible in our
hands, ' the sure word of prophecy, a light shining in a
dark place until the day dawn, and the day-star arise.' We
are commanded to try the spirits whether they be of God,
since many false prophets are gone out into the world ; and
we, unlearned as we may be, can and do try them by the
standard of truth given to us for that purpose. We com-
pare scripture Avith scripture, and doctrine with doctrine. We
find that while some ministers are preaching that the world
* Prof. Bush's Anastasis. t Issued in London in 1845.
TESTIMONY OF ENGLISH AND SCOTCH LAYMEN, 379
is ripening into glory, others are preaching that it is ripen-
ing tor judgment. We know that both cannot be true. We
take the standard of truth in our hands at home, in our
closets, and we find that one class is teaching a Bible-truth,
the other a Popish fable. Ought tliose things so to be ?
' If the trumpet give an uncertain sound, who shall prepare
himself for the battle ? ' If one puli)it proclaims, ' Peace
and safety ! the Lord dclaycth his comiiicj,' and another,
' Watch^ for ye know neither the day nor the hour when
the Son of man cometh,^ who can be surprised if the joyous
"world looks on, listens, and laughs ? And listen and laugh
it does — such a laugh of merry mockery! And Satan
listens and laughs too — 0, such a laugh of malicious joy !
And the harlot laughs as she hands round the gilded cup,
and sings, for very wantonness, 'I sit a (|ueen forever : I
shall see no morrow. The Lord delayeth his coming. Thou
hast much goods laid up for many years. Eat, drink, and
be merry.'
"Well, here, you say, here we may surely sing with a
joyful heart. True : but it must not be a strain that tells
of 'the world's jubilee ' in the absence of theworkVs right-
ful Lord — of the earth's deliverance from bondage while
' the god of this world ' is triumphant and making the
whole creation groan. It must not be of a time anterior to
that when the cry shall be heard, ' The kingdoms of this
Avorld are become the kingdom of our Lord, and of his
Christ, and shall reign for ever and ever.' Tell me not that
it is the preaching of the Gospel that will do all this. It is
only the province of the Gospel to announce it. ' The
Gospel of the kingdom ' is one thing, ' the kingdom ' itself
is another thing. The invitation is not the feast. We have
come to talk about the Gospel as though there were something
cabalistic in the 7rord. We have come to regard it very
much as the Jew regards the law, or the Papist the crucifix.
It is a message — it is an announcement ; it is not that of
which it testifies — it is not the kingdom of Christ ; it has
done, and is doing, and will yet do, its appointed work, —
gather out the little flock to whom it is the Father's good
pleasure to give the kingdom. But it will do no more. It
will not heal the sick, for it is not its province. It will not
give sight to the blind, nor hearing to the deaf, nor feet to
380 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
the lame, for it is not its province. It will not raise the
dead, for it is not its province. It will not cause waters to
spring forth in the desert, nor make the wilderness flourish
and blossom as the rose. It will not dethrone the god of this
world, for it is not its province. It will not close the door
of the world's great hospital —
' The lazar-house, sad, noisome, dark, -wlierein are laid
Numbers of all diseased, all maladies
Of ghostly spasm, or racking torture, qualms
Of heart-sick agony, all feverous kinds.
Convulsions, ejjilepsies, fierce catarrhs,
Intestine stone and ulcer, colic pangs,
Demoniac frenzy, moping melancholy,
And moon-struck madness, pining atrophy,
Marasmus, and wide-wasting pestilence.
Dropsies and asthmas, and joint-racking rheums.'
" But all this is to be done : and when the number of the
elect is complete, — that number known only to Him who
keeps the book, 'the Lamb's book of life,' in which their
names are written ; when the last of the little flock shall
have heard the shepherd's voice through the instrumentality
of the preaching of the Gospel — then the trumpet shall
sound, and the dead shall be raised incorruptible, and we
(the living) shall be changed in a moment, in the twinkling
of an eye. And then the kingdom shall come, and God's
will be done on earth, as it is done in heaven, and the groans
of creation shall cease. Let the angel speed, then, his flight,
through the midst of heaven, having the everlasting Gospel
to preach unto them that dwell on the earth, and to every na-
tion, and kindred, and tongue, and peojDle, and say with a loud
voice, ' Fear God, and give glory to him, for the liour of
his judgment is come.' For then shall come the restitu-
tion of all things promised before the foundation of the world.
For concomitant with and consequent upon the second coming
of Christ shall be : The resurrection of the sleeping saints,
the change of the living saints, the casting out and binding
of Satan, the destruction of Antichrist, the gathering of
Israel, the descent of the new Jerusalem, the eradication of
the curse from the earth, the deliverance of the creature
from the bondage of corruption, the kingdom of Christ and
his saints, the whole earth filled with his glory ; and then
shall the Redeemer see of the travail of his soul and be
satisfied. And we shall be satisfied, too, ' if by any means
TESTIMONY OF A CONVERTED JEW. 381
we may attain unto the resurrection of the dead,' awake in
his likeness, and share in his glory." — Letter to the Rev.
Dr. RoJJlcs, author of the ''Jubilee Hynm.'' A.D. 1846.
From His Serene Highness, Charles, Landgrave of
Hesse.
(The father-in-law of the King of Denmark. From a speech delivered in the
palace of Gotturf, at the Annual Meeting of the Sleswich and Holstein Diblo
Society, A. D. 1829.)
" Is not his second coming, spoken of by our Lord to his
disciples, now near, since the appointed sign l)y him has
appeared? His disciples asked (Matt. 24 : 3), ' What will
be the sign of thy coming, and of the end of the world ? '
And Jesus answered and said unto them (v. 14), 'And this
Gospel of the kingdom shall be preached in all the world for
a witness unto all nations, and then shall the end come.'
The disciples considered the coming of our Lord as the end
of this world and the commencement of a new. ... In
Rev. 20 : 4, an account is also given of these thrones, and
of the first resurrection of those who had lost their lives for
the witness of Christ ; and these, adds St. John, ' lived and
reigned with Christ a thousand years.' " — Edinhuryh
Christ. List. June, 1830.
From the Rev. Ridley H. Herschell.
(A Hebrew, and Pastor of a Church of Converted Jews in the city of London.)
" Those who look for the ' restitution of all things' (Acts
3 : 21) at the second coming of the Messiah, the Lord Jesus
Christ, and who look for no permanent amelioration of the
state of the Avorld till then, are sometimes upl)raided as
taking gloomy and hopeless vie\YS of the present condition
of things, and of the effects of efibrts for the spread of the
Gospel. Now, I can honestly declare, that if I looked to
human efforts to bring about the millennium, I should be in
utter despair about it. Wlien I contemplate the small
progress that even the outward knowledge of Christianity
has made, and the nuich smaller progress of Christianity in
its vital power : when I see the powers of the world crushing
the Gospel, and the monster Popery desolating the fairest
and most successful of modern missions ; when I see the
382 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
spirit of liberty so often in base alliance with irreligion and
infidelity ; when I find some of the noblest minds of the day,
those who give the tone to the opinions of men of thought
and talent, doting about the excellence and perfection of
human nature ; when I behold the world, which is opposed
to God, so active and so able, and the church, on the con-
trary, so divided and so feeble, I see not a single ray of hope
that the conversion of the world, as it is called, will ere long
be ejQfected by missionary operations. Blessed, indeed, are
these operations ; they save individual souls ; they call out
the members of that glorious company who form the ' Bride,
the Lamb's wife ; ' but, if I trusted to them for the covering
the whole earth with the knowledge of the Lord, I should
regard the 'glory of the latter days' as at an almost hope-
less distance. I look for no gradual amelioration of the
world's condition ; the Scripture tells us to look for 'wars,
and rumors of wars ;' for ' famines, and pestilences, and
earthquakes in divers places ; ' for ' men's hearts failing them
for fear, and for looking after those things that are coming;
upon the earth ; ' and THEN, at that time, not when the
world is all converted, we shall ' see the Son of man coming
in a cloud with power and great glory ' (Luke 21 : 26, 27 ;
Matt. 24 : 7), to take unto Himself His great power and
reign. And, therefore, when we ' see these things begin to
come to pass,' Ave ' look up, and lift up our heads,' knowing
that our 'redemption draweth nigh' (Luke 21: 28), that
our Messiah will return to complete His work ; that, having
at His first coming made 'reconciliation for iniquity.' He
will at His second coming ' bring in everlasting righteous-
ness' (Dan. 9: 24), which shall 'cover the earth as the
waters cover the sea.' glorious period ! Who could
believe it near at hand, and be unduly occupied with the
concerns of this present evil age? Who can regard the
varied misei'y of the groaning earth, without ' looking for,
and hastening unto, the coming of the day of God ' (2 Peter
3 : 12), without fervently praying, ' Come quickly, Lord
Jesus'?" — Mystery of the Gentile Dispensation, pp.
120—123.
" It is a strange notion of the omnipotence of God to sup-
pose that He made a world Avhich He considered ' very
good,' and that Satan so marred it that God needed to *
TESTIMONY OF A CONVERTED JEW. 383
destroy it, and blot it out of His creation ! Is this consist-
ent either with the wisdom or the power of God? If He
has seen fit to provide a remedy for the evil caused by Satan
to one portion of His very good work — the spirit of man —
Avh}'^ should it be thought a strange thing, that the remedy
sliould also extend to the material portion of the work,
which was. equally with the other, pronounced ' very good;'
a thing right, proper, and suitable to exist? Shall we dare
to say that Satan has in this point foiled God, and has made
that which God pronounced good so irreparably evil, that it
must needs be destroyed, and exist no longer ?
'• It is sometimes maintained that the popular notion of
God utterly destroying the earth, and taking the righteous
to dwell elsewhere, in a place called heaven, is, even if an
error, a very harmless one ; l)ccause it does not signify Avhere
Ave are to lie hereafter, so that we dwell in the immediate
presence of God, where alone is happiness. There can be
no question as to the preeminent importance of ascertaining
the way in which futui-e happiness is to be attained ; but,
when this all-important question is settled, we are not desired
indolently to fold our hands, and to say. This suffices me, I
will keep solely to these first principles of the doctrine of
Christ. On the contrary, we are told to ' go on unto per-
fection' (Ileb. G: 1), and to 'add to our faith knowledge.'
In proportion as our views are scriptural, they will be influ-
ential : in proportion as they are distinct and well-defined,
in the same proportion will the impression they make be
vivid and abiding. It is treason against the God of truth
to say that error may answer our purpose as well as truth.
" But the banishment of matter out of God's creation, as
an essentially sinful thing, has not been harmless. It has
rendered the glorious doctrine of the resurrection of the body
a mere inert dogma; held, indeed, theoretically, but practi-
cally a dead letter, exercising no influence over tiie affec-
tions and hopes of the Christian. The happiness of the dis-
embodied spirit is all that is contemplated ; and whether that
spirit is again to rejoin the body or not, is a matter of com-
parative, if not absolute indifference, to a very large portion
of the church of Christ. In the days of the apostles it was
not so ; the happiness of the disembodied spirit is but slightly
alluded to as being preferable to the toilsome warfare of the
884 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
Christian life ; but the ' blessed hope ' that animated the
hearts of the early believers was ' the glorious appearing
of the great God, even our Saviour Jesus Christ, Avho shall
change our vile body, that it may be fashioned like unto
His glorious body.' (Titus 2: 13; Phillip. 3: 21.) The
apostles preached ' Jesus and the resurrection ; ' the moderns
seem to think the second of these topics superfluous." —
lb., p. 171—174.
TESTIMONY OF AMERICAET EPISCOPAL DIVINES.
From the Rt. Rev. C. P. McIlvaine.
(Bishop of Ohio.)
''What do Ave look for? Heaven, and rest, and glory,
indeed, but all as connected and consummated by the ap-
pearing of Jesus Christ. ' When Christ, who is our life,
SHALL appear, then shall we also appear with Him in
glory,' — ' We look for the Lord Jesus, who shall change
these vile bodies,' &c. The virgins have gone forth to meet
the Bridegroom. The most imposing aspect of the world at
the present time gives a most solemn aspect to the prophe-
cies of Daniel and Revelation concerning the time of the
end." — Wmthrop's Letters, p. 5. A. D. 1849.
From the Rt. Rev. John H. Hopkins.
(Bishop of Vermont.)
" Within the last ten or twelve years of my ministry, my
opinions have . . . undergone a thorough revolution. And
I cannot but think that any man whose mind is ready to
submit, with the humility of a child-like faith, to the only
infallible teacher — the Word of God — must yield, even at
the sacrifice of his previous prejudices, to the vast amount
of testimony which the Scriptures furnish to that important
doctrine, the personal advent, and re'tgn upon the regen-
erated earth, of the glorious Redeemer." — lb., p. 6. A. D.
1849.
From the Rt. Rev. John P. Henshaw, D.D.
(Late Bishop of Rhode Island.)
'Although we have formerly advocated the popular the-
ory ourselves, ... the common belief that there will be a
TESTIMONY OF AMERICAN EPISCOPAL DIVINES. 385
conversion of all nations to the faith of Christ, and a state
of universal peace and holiness throughout the world for the
space of a thousand years before the second advent of our
Lord, is, to our view, utterhj irreconcilable with what the
Scriptures teach." — Episcopal Recorder^ A. D. 1845.
Which " view includes no manifestation of Christ in His
human nature, no establishment of a dominion upon earth,
... no resurrection of departed saints, no transformation
of living ones, no binding of Satan for one thousand years,
no creation of a new heaven and a new earth, wherein
dwelleth righteousness." — Ibid.
"Ai-e we among the penitent, believing, and holy ones,
who are ' looking for and hasting unto the coming of the
day of God : ' or are we among the impenitent and unholy,
who will ' wail because of Ilim ' ?" — Ibid.
From Rev. Stephen H. Tyng, D.D.
(Of New York City.)
Jesus " will reign in visible glory among His saints upon
the earth, when He shall return, according to His promise
to them, without sin unto salvation. He has now, as
regards His visible presence, gone to receive for Himself a
kingdom, and to return. "When the appointed hour arrives,
the Son of man shall appear in His glory, and all his holy
angels with Him. ... To this blessed kingdom of the Son
of God multiplied prophecies of the Scripture bid us look
forward continually; and it is our blessed privilege to live
in nuccasinff expectation of the happy day, when angel
voices shall thus announce unto His waiting Zion: 'Thy
God reigneth.' " — Lectures oti the Laio, &c., pp. 371, 372.
A. D. 1849.
" In the great view of the Saviour's personal reign, on a
regenerated earth, as the final and everlasting abode of His
redeemed, I rest with confidence and delight." — HilVs
'■^Saints' Inheritance^'^ p. 271.
From Rev. Edward Winthrop, M.A.
(Rector of St. Paul's Church, Xomalk, Ohio.)
"The second coming of our Lord in power and great
glory, in the sense of a visible and personal advent, has
83
386 ONE HUNDRED -WITNESSES.
always been a cardinal doctrine in the faith of the church,
and is inserted as such both in the Apostles' and in the
Nicene creed. . . . This was, from the earliest times,
the hope of the church." — Winlhrojis Letters, p. 31.
A. D. 1849.
"This personal and visible advent of the Saviour is at
the resurrection of the saints ; but the resurrection of the
saints is anterior to the Millennium, and therefore the ad-
vent also is anterior to the Millennium." — Ibid., p. 75.
"The Millennium, or period denoted by the 'thousand
years,' is but the first epoch of His reign on the new earth ;
for it is written, ' of His kingdom there shall be no end.' " —
Ibid., p. 96.
"As we are rapidly approaching the grand crisis of this
world's history, it becomes us, in a devout and prayerful
spirit, carefully to note the signs of the times." — lb., p. 142.
Testimony of William Miller.
(Baptist. — Born A. D. 1782; died 1849.)
"Much testimony might be produced to show we are on
the end of the world. Yet the Scripture is fulfilling to the
very letter by those scoffers of the present day, who say,
' Where is the promise of His coming ? ' and, also, who ' say
in their liearts. My Lord delayeth His coming.' And some
of them are so awfully daring as to publish openly and
boldly to the world that He will not come this ' million of
years yet.' Strange infatuation ! It is time for all who
sincerely love our Lord to awake from their slumbers, trim
their lamps, and be ready ; for the Bridegroom is at the
door. Why will you be so backward in believing God's
Word ? Can you not discern the signs of the times ?
" I beseech you, sinner ! do not hear to those who will
deceive you. Look for yourselves ; read, study, and con-
sider for yourselves. You may depend upon it, every im-
portant movement of the nations, of the church, of sects
and societies, of the world, denotes the end of all things at
hand. A few more days to 1)0 numbered, and time will be
no more. Regard not those teachers who are crying peace
and safety, when sudden destruction cometh ; that say, ' My
Lord delayeth his coming.' Be warned by one who feels
TESTIMONY OF PRESBYTERIANS, ETC. 387
for your souls! I ask not for your honors, nor for your
money ; let them perish with the world. I ask you to
escape for your life, your eternal life. save, save your
soul ! Think of that world which will never end, of that
state which will never be changed. Think, my dear friend,
of your own good : buy the truth, buy oil, buy wine and
milk, without money and without price. Come, ye poor,
take hold of the riches which can never perish ; eat, ! cat
and drink of that food which can never cloy. — which, if a
man eat of, he shall live forever. Come, ye sick, here is
health for you ; yc lame, you will find strength ; yes, weary
ones may find rest, and captives go free. The bars of the
prison-iiouse will be broken, and the shackles of the slaves
will be unloosed. Captain Jesus is knocking at the door ;
King Immanuel will soon come in." — Memoirs, pp. 404-5.
TESTIMONY OF MINISTERS AND LAY MEMBERS OF
american presbyterian and congregational
churches.
From the Rev. George Duffield, D.D.
(Piistor of the First Presbj'tcrian Church of Detroit, Jlich.)
" Especially must he [who opposes this doctrine] meet
the (|uestion fairly and fully whether the kingdom of God,
the kingdom of heaven, as spoken of by Christ and his
apostles, is not regarded by them as future — not some-
thing in another globe or in heaven, but here, on this earth,
to be developed in a new and glorious dispensation, to be
introduced by Jesus Christ at his personal visible coming.
These are grave and solemn themes. Minds of the highest
order, Christians of the most ardent and devoted piety, and
scholars of the profoundest erudition, have embraced the
Millonarian faith as the true and genuine import of Gods
promises and the scheme of prophecy." — Millenariatiism
Defended, pp. 182, 183. A. D. 1843.
From the Rev. Charles K. Imbrie.
(Pastor of the First Presbyterian Church in Rahway, N. J.)
" It is a clear doctrine of the word of God, that the church
is to look, and long, and wait for the real, visible second
coming of the Lord ; and that we are to take heed, watch
388 OXE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
and pray; for we know not when the time is." — The
Kingdom of God, p. 40. A. D. 1850.
"If it be true that the apostles in all their epistles repre-
sent this coming of Christ as the only really glorious object
between them and the final redemption, surely we ought to
stand in the same position. Our views of the Millennium
ought to clash with no such duty." — 76., p. 47.
•'Tell me, I beseech j^ou, how I may expect any such
kingdom before the advent of our Lord, and yet look and
wish for that advent continually ? If that kingdom is not
to appear until his advent, tell me, further, how is it that
the Scriptures so continually associate that kingdom with
this earth, if it is to be withdrawn to some other point in
the universe." — Ih., p. 87.
From the Rev. Alfred Bryant.
(Pastor of the First Presbyterian Church in Nilcs, Mich.)
" Isaiah and Peter speak of the same new lieavens and
new earth : for the apostle says that his are the fulfilment
of those predicted by the prophet. ' We, according to his
promise,' that is, this promise of Isaiah, ' look for a new
heavens and a new earth, in which dwelleth righteousness.'
" But Peter declares that his are after the coming of the
Lord, and the dissolving of the elements, and the burning
of the earth ; and Isaiah teaches that his are before or at the
commencement of a state of things which can only take
place during the restoration of Israel and a converted world :
therefore, from a comparison of these Scriptures, it is clear
that the coming of the Lord must be before the conversion
of the world or Millennium. For, as Peter places the new
heavens and the new earth after the coming of the Lord,
and Isaiah places them before a converted Avorld, is it not
certain that the coming of Christ must be pre-millennial ? "
— Vieivs on Mlllenariainsm, p. 90. A. D. 1852.
From the Rev. Nathan Lord, D.D.
(Pres. of Dartmouth College, N. H.)
"There is nothing in the disordered nature and constitu-
tion of man ; nothing in the organizations of social life,
which are but the aggregation and embodiment of depraved
individuals : nothino; in the law of life and continuance im-
TESTIMONY OF PRESBYTERIANS, ETC. 389
pressed by the Creator equally upon individuals and collect-
ive bodies ; nothing in the prophecies of Scripture which
have been fulfilled in the past history of the nations;
nothing in the present state of the world, Pagan, Jewish, or
Christian; nothing in unfulfilled prophecy if interpreted in
consistency and harmony with the past; nothing in the
doctrinal theology of the Bil)lo, or any ethical science built
upon it ; there is nothing in all or any of these which justi-
fies the belief of a self-restoring power of man, or the pro-
gressive development of society into a perfect state, or any
purpose of God to produce, by his word and spirit, in con-
nection with natural civilization, a universal perfect state
before the dissolution of the present order of things, and the
second coming of Christ. But, contrarily, it is evident,
that the universal perfect state which is promised in the
Holy Scriptures, in which righteous men shall possess the
earth, God has provided for by a particular and express
supernatural covenant, which is independent and exclusive
of all natural civilizations, and has its successive fulfilments
in all ages, only as they are successively overthrown. . . .
..." It cannot fail to impress the diligent student of the
Bible, that the inheritance of the earth is not promised to
mankind in general, descended by ordinary generation from
Adam, who is of the earth, and earthly ; but only to the
ccclesia, who, by a supernatural generation, are descended
from the second Adam, the Lord from heaven. To Adam
no promise was made, but remotely and obscurely, that the
seed of the woman should bruise the serpent's head. To
Noah none was made, but in respect to earthly and natui-al
society. ' But to Abraham and his seed were the promises
made ; ' and to them only with express and specific limita-
tions : ' He saith not. And to seeds, as of many ; but as of
one, And to thy seed, which is Christ.' Only in this dis-
tinct and independent supernatural line do we obtain : ' If
ye are Christ's, then are ye Abraham's seed, and heirs accord-
ing to the promise.' The inheritance is equally specific ;
namely, the regenerated earth : ' For, in thy seed shall all
the families of the earth be blessed.' Till that predicted
time of restitution, when the
33*
' Redeemer, King, Creator,
Returns, in bliss to reign,'
890 ONE' HUNDRED "WITNESSES,
the earth is alien, -wicked, and abominable. It is vexed by
fallen spirits, by the passions of evil men, and all the re-
lated ills of a fallen state. It is plagued by unchristian and
anti-Christian powers, that fill it ^Yith confusions, violence,
and crime. These allied powers of evil are emphatically
symbolized in Scripture as ferocious wild beasts, and their
course is described equally by letter and by symbol, till it
is terminated by judgments of God: Dan. vii." — Intro-
ductory Notes to a Volume of the Sermons of his Son,
the Rev. J. K. Lord, pp. 79—82. A. D. 1850.
From the Rev. John King Lord.
(Late Pastor of the First Orthodox Congregational Church in Cincinnati.)
At the installation of Rev. Clark Perry, speaking of the
" utter and eternal separation between the church and the
world," he says:
"The methods of Divine Providence, and the operations
of the Holy Ghost, all tend to this separation, and not to
an ultimate absorption of the world by the church. The
present age is the period during which this work is to be
consummated. We expect, in the end of the age, the com-
plete distinction. As to particular circumstances, and times,
and operations, we have no knowledge. We know barely
the general facts that God will discern ultimately between
the righteous and the wicked, and that the whole course of
human aifairs is directed towards that decision. To express
the matter in its simplest form, we know that, in the pre-
dicted millennial glory of the church, all the individuals,
who, through their election of God in Christ, constitute the
church, will share ; whilst all who are not ordained to eter-
nal life, and enrolled among the members of Christ's mys-
tical body, Avill be forever excluded from it. All believers
will receive the promise ; all unbelievers will come short of
it, no matter where they lived, nor when they lived. Isaiah
looked for the glory of the Messianic age ; Abraham looked
for it ; Paul looked for it ; we who are Christians look for it.
We shall see it and share in it ; and so will they. They
have the same interest in it that we have. They hoped for
it, prayed for it, labored for it, just as we do. They had
the same grounds for expecting it that we have. Surely,
TESTIMONY OF PRESBYTERIANS, ETC. 391
when it comes, -when all the prophecies of Messiah's reign
shall be fulfilled, and Jerusalem shall be rebuilt, and the
fulness, the full number of the Gentiles, shall come in, and
Israel, those called in Isaac, shall be saved, surely in that
day of rejoicing the whole church of the fiiithful, without
an exception, shall bear their part.
"Now, here is unfolded the whole objective design of re-
demption ; not an imperfect church, greatly extended, but
a holy church, absolutely triumphant; not an intangible
presence, but a visible manifestation of Christ. This is
rest, the glory promised to Zion. Nothing inferior to this
in nature, nothing anterior in time, will answer the promise.
The dispensation introduced at the birth of Jesus did not
answer it. The sharpest trials of the church have been
since the death of Christ. The remaining period of this
dispensation will not answer it ; for still sharper trials await
the church in order to its purification. Deceivers of un-
paralleled subtlety, scoffers of the bitterest malignity, false
Christs, who shall work lying wonders, are to arise. The
]\Ian of Sin is to be revealed in all his giant proportions.
' False teachers shall introduce themselves, who privily
shall bring in damnable heresies, even denying the Lord
that Ijought them, and bring upon themselves swift destruc-
tion. And many shall follow their pernicious ways, by
reason of whom the way of truth shall be evil spoken of
So great will be the confusion, that the righteous shall
scarcely be saved. Certainly here is not, here cannot be,
the rest of the church. It remaineth. The fruits and
flowers of Paradise will not grow on this accursed soil. Joy
hath no home beneath these overhanging cypresses, and in
the shadows of the tomb. The songs of the redeemed can-
not be suncj in so strange a land. Everything here is for
trial, not for reward ; for increase of sanctification, not for
perfection. This is the desert. Mount Sinai is in it, cov-
ered with the lightnings that announce the presence of Jeho-
vah ; Mount Pisgah is in it, whence faith may discern the
coming glory ; the tabernacle is in it, and the Shekinah,
and tile pillar of cloud and flame ; but it is the desert still.
Out there, beyond those swelling waves, whose further shores
glisten in the reflected light of promise, beyond those dis-
tant mountains where watchmen listen for the sound of
392 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
chariot-wheels, beyond the reach of the noise and tumult of
earth — out there is the glorious land of our hopes. Thither
our footsteps are tending. When the eternal purposes, now
hidden in the mind of the Father, shall have been wrought
out, the course of this world will be finished, the year of
the Redeemed will come, the rest that remaineth for the
people of God will be theirs forever." — Sermons of Rev.
J. K. Lord, pp. 104—6.
He died A. D. 1849. His dying words were, " Tell the
church to hold on till Christ comes."
From the Rev. John Richards, D.D.
(Congregational Minister in Hanover, N. H.)
" In every case of preaching the Gospel to a nation or
tribe, it is a witness — sometimes only a witness for evil,
but usually both a witness for evil and a witness for good.
Yet in no instance in the history of the world has it been
the saving instrument to the many of such a nation or tribe,
but only to the few.
"We reach, then, this conclusion. The Gospel has been
preached in the world for eighteen hundred years, with just
such results as our Saviour implied in Matthew 24, and in
the great commission — for a witness — a witness resulting
only in evil to the many, a saving instrument but to the
few. There have been great fluctuations indeed, alterna-
tions of hope and disappointment, success and its absence.
In Europe, ten centuries of dark ages, and then the Reform-
ation ; in New England, a great revival in the eighteenth
century, and then forty years of adversity; in the nine-
teenth century, several seasons of general refreshing, with
corresponding depression succeeding. But through all
these ages God has been gathering in his elect, while the
Gospel has been chiefly a witness in them that are lost.
How long will this state of things, this general aspect of the
church and the world, continue? We answer, unhesitating-
ly, until the end ; for that is what Christ declares : ' This
Gospel of the kingdom must first be preached in all the
world for a witness unto all nations, and then shall the end
come." — Theological and Literary Journal, vol. vi., p.
669.
testimony of presbyterians, etc. 393
From the Rev. Thomas Wickes.
(Pastor of the First Congregational Church in Marietta, Ohio.)
" I would earnestly recommend to my hearers to read the
New Testament carefully, and notice how this coming, and
revelation, and appearing of Jesus Christ, is continually
alluded to as the hope of the church ; and how the people
of God are encouraged to endure through this present dark
jjcriod of tribulation unto that glorious day — to persevere
unto the end, watching and waitin2: for the coming of the
T 1
Lord.
" If Christ comes at the termination of this period of
reigning iniquity and delusion, he is coming quickly; and
we who love his appearing may wait the glorious day of
redemption, when our Immanuel Jesus shall take the scep-
tre, and reign so long as the moon endureth." — Wiclccs
on the Apomli/psc, pp. 367, 368. A. D. 1851.
From Rev. Hiram Carlton.
(Congregational Minister in Barnstable, Mass.)
" As the literal reign of the saints with Christ on earth
was an essential element in the creed of the Jews respect-
ing the resuiTcction, where could they have obtained their
views ? Certainly not from reason, for reason never dared
to conjecture." — Theo. t5* LH- Jour., p. 37. A. D. 1854,
" The privilege of reigning with Christ appertains to the
saints in a glorified and risen state. The condition of the
privilege of reigning with him is suffering with him, re-
maining steadfast during the time of sojourn in a mortal
body, subject to conflicts with the world and Satan. Con-
sequently, the reigning is beyond this life. ' And the sacred
Scriptures place it in the resurrection state ; when the
saints will be raised in a baly like unto that glorious body
of Christ, with which he will appear, and in which he will
reign."— 76., p. 399.
From David K Lord, Esq.
(Editor of tho Theological and Literary Journal.)
" It is expressly revealed that Christ is ... to descend vis-
ibly and assume the dominion of the race. ... He is to raise
394 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
the holy dead from their graves ; invest them with the offices
of kings and priests ; and cause them to reign with him on the
earth. He is to judge and accept the living saints, change
them from mortal to immortal, and give them to live in un-
spotted rectitude and blessedness under his reign. We are
explicitly assured, by the voice of the Redeemer himself,
that they are then to be freed from the curse, want, toil,
sorrow, death, brought on the race by Adam, and enter on
a life, in that respect, wholly new." — Tlieo. i^* Lit. Jour.,
p. 667. A. D. 1850.
From Eleazar Lord, Esq.
(Author of the " Epoch of Creation," " The Messiah," &c.)
" The course of things eventually to be realized on earth
will be such as would have taken place from the beginning,
had no apostasy occurred. The apostasy and the curse on
man and the earth will be overcome. The antagonism be-
tween the Mediator and the adversary will cease. The
earth, freed from the curse and from all enemies, renovated,
restored to its original beauty, will be the perpetual scene
of holiness and happiness." — The Messiah, p^ 32-4. A. D.
1853.
testimony of missiowakies op the cross.
From the Rev. Joseph Wolf.
(Missionary to Persia and Asia Minor.)
"Mullah Mohammed . . . said that he was glad to find
that I expect the speedy arrival of the Messiah Jesus." —
Missionary Labors, p. 58. A. D. 1831.
"He died for our sins; rose again; went to heaven,
whence he shall come again, according to my opinion, in the
year 1847, and reign at Jerusalem a thousand years." —
lb., p. 131.
To Chakam M. "I made the observation that the time
must be very nigh that Messiah will come."
^^ M. 'Do you believe in the coming of the Messiah? '
"/.. 'I should not be a true believer in the law and the
prophets, if I did not believe that he will soon come, and
the walls of Jerusalem will be built again.' " — Memoir, p.
TESTIMONY OF MISSIONARIES. 395
"I, Joseph Wolf, shall see, with my own eyes, Abraham,
Isaac, and Jacob, in their bodies, in their glorified bodies ;
and I shall see thee, Elijah ; and thee, Isaiah ; and thee,
Jeremiah; and thee, David, Avhose songs have guided me
to Jesus of Nazareth ; I shall see you all here at Jerusa-
lem, where I am writing these lines." — See p. 64.
From the Rev. II. W. Fox, B.A.
(Late Missionary from England to the Teloogoo people.)
"We are all daily longing and praying for the speedy
coming of our Lord to restore all things ; and sometimes
we are apt to wonder why lie delays his coming. But it is
not lie, but we, who arc the cause of the delay. He can-
not come, as he said, until the Gospel has been preached in
all nations for a witness ; and he has oi'dered his faithful
people to go and preach it. But wc don't go, and the Gos-
pel is not yet preached, and so his return is delayed. When
I have been in a village preaching the Gospel of the king-
dom, I feel, ' Now there is one more obstacle to Christ's
return removed.' '' — Memoir, p. 332. A. D. 1850.
" That He will come in the flesh, in infinite glory, visible
to all men ; and that, at his coming, the dead shall be raised
and the living changed, is a fact which 1 Thess. and 1 Cor.
15 do not allow us to doubt. Further, that up to the time
of His coming the mass of mankind Avill be unconverted
and unbelieving, is also distinctly suited in Matt. 24 and
elsewhere. ... I have a strong anticipation that the time is
not far distant." — lb., p. 246.
From Rev. Walter M. Lowrie.
(Late Missionary of the A. E. C. F. M. to the Cliincsc.)
" Since Avriting to you last, I have adopted many of the
millenarian views in regard to the second advent of Christ,
the return of the Jews, &:c. They seem to make many
things in the history of missions, that were dark before,
much more plain and encouraging. I find much satisfaction
in them, and often long inexpressibly for the ' coming and ap-
pearing ' of our Lord. ! to be found doing his work
when he comes, and not idling in the field to which he has
sent me ! " — Memoir, p. 357.
396 ONE HUNDRED WITNESSES.
" I perceive we shall not agree about Millenarianism, and
I hardly know whether it is worth while to open on the sub-
ject. I still find much comfort and encouragement in it.
But the question of comfort and encouragement is not the
jast one. Is it in the Scripture ? If it is, then ' He that
doeth his will shall know of the doctrine,' and enjoy its
fruits. I have lost none of my confidence in preaching, but
rather have felt it increased by means of these views." —
lb., p. 389.
From the Rev. Daniel Poor, D.D.
(Late American Missionary to Ceylon; born A. D. 1789; died 1855.)
Speaking of " The Saint's Inheritance," a valuable work,
by H. F. Hill, of Geneseo, N. Y., he writes :
"I am happy to find the writer so well grounded in what
I have long regarded the j)rimarij and fundamental point
of the whole subject, viz. : That the second advent, accord-
ing to the Scriptures, is to take place at the introduction or
commencement of the millennium, rather than at its termina-
tion ; and that Christ is coming to redeem the earth, to reign
during a thousand years." — Inheritance^ p. 272.
From the Eev. F. De "W. Ward.
(Late American Missionary to India, and now Pastor of the Presbyterian
Church, in Geneseo, N. Y.)
In commending the above-named work of Mr. Hill, he
says :
" Neither the intellect nor piety of that person is at all
to be envied who can refrain from thoughtful meditation
upon questions like these : What is to become of this vast
globe ? Is is literally to be dissolved, and
' Like the baseless fabric of a vision
Leave not a wreck behind ' ?
Is it to be the victim of some future explosion, which
shall send its mighty masses hurling through space, to fall
upon other planets, like the aerolites upon our own? Or is
it to be made over and become as the garden of the Lord, a
fit abode for, man to pass an etei^nity of immortality and
blessedness ? Are all mankind to be put in possession of
the sacred volume, and thus become individually perfect in
CONCLUDIXG REMARKS. 397
knowledge, love, purity, and every heavenly grace ? or are
multitudes to be overwhelmed with destruction by an Al-
mighty arm, and thus the victory be achieved? Again : Is
our Lord to revisit our earth in person, with an union of
majestic splendor and glory only cfjualled by the humilia-
tion and distress which attended his former mission ?
Again : What mean the Scriptures by the millennium —
tlie first and second resurrection — the battle of Gog and
Magog — the ministry of angels, and the extent of the Jew-
ish covenants ? These arc questions of admitted interest,
and will merit a thoughtful consideration. To say ' we do
not know,' is a ready mode of reply, but surely should not
satisfy the Christian, whose aim should be intcUifjenrc as well
as puhj. This may be his decision, but it should be arrived
at considerately."' — /6., p. 266.
IS SUCH TESTIMONY OF NO VALUE?
The foregoing extracts demonstrate conclusively that the
doctrines of the prc-millennial advent, the restoration of the
earth to its Eden state, the reign of Christ Avith the saints on
earth, and the duty of living in constant expectation of those
events, are not novelties, but are sustained by venerable
fathers, as well as by others in the church. There is the
testimony of Gentile and Jew, of bishop, priest, and layman,
of prince and people, of churchman and dissenter, of Calvin-
ist and Arminian, of reformer and martyr, of pastors of
churches and missionaries of the cross to heathen lands.
And, though the opinion of no man — whether he be "in
surplice or in gown, in ermine or in lawn, or in royal robe,"
or if he be arrayed in plain attire — is of any authority,
except as it accords with the Word of God, yet such testi-
monies from such Avitnesses are worthy of consideration by
intelligent and pious minds. The fact that " so great a
cloud of witnesses." and men of such distinguished intellectual
and moral worth, have found — some of them one. and some
of them all — those doctrines in the Word of Go.uV 1 8
JUN 1 5
JUL 24
ii\ !-\ i A ^,|
"A'PR 1?
\
DEMCO 38-297
Div.S. 236.3 T533T 443459